FCC ID: KR5HERMES2 Hardware for Enhanced Remote-, Mobility- & Emergency Services

 

E-Class Saloon Owner's Manual Mercedes-Benz Apple iOSAndroidTMNur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Symbols In this Owner's Manual, you will find the follow ing symbols:

& DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

# Please observe the warning notices in this Owner's Manual.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe envi ronmental notes Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behaviour or environmentally responsible disposal.

# Observe environmental notes.

* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.

# Observe notes on material damage.

% Useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you. Instruction X

(Q page) Further information on a topic Display Information in the multifunction dis play/multimedia display

*

+ Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system Corresponding submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia sys tem Marks a cause

*

Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R equipment R technical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus trations. The following are integral parts of the vehicle:

R Digital Owner's Manual R Printed Owner's Manual R Service Booklet R Equipment-dependent Supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Man ual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to:

R model R order R national version R availability The illustrations in this manual show a left-hand drive vehicle. On right-hand drive vehicles, the layout of components and controls differs accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehi cles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas:

R design 2135842910Z102 2135842910Z102 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 2 Contents At a glance .................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Overview of warning and indicator lamps ....... 8 Overhead control panel ................................ 12 Door control panel and seat adjustment ....... 14 Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 16 Digital Owner's Manual ............................. 18 Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual .......... 18 General notes ............................................. 19 Protection of the environment ...................... 19 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles ................... 19 Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts ...................... 20 Owner's Manual ............................................ 21 Operating safety ........................................... 21 Declaration of Conformity ............................ 22 Diagnostics connection ................................ 24 Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 24 Vehicle registration ....................................... 25 Correct use of the vehicle ............................ 25 Implied warranty ........................................... 25 QR code for rescue card ............................... 25 Data storage ................................................. 26 Copyright ...................................................... 28 Occupant safety ......................................... 29 Restraint system ........................................... 29 Seat belts ..................................................... 31 Airbags ......................................................... 36 PRE-SAFE system ....................................... 43 Safely transporting children in the vehi cle ................................................................ 45 Notes on pets in the vehicle .......................... 71 Opening and closing .................................. 72 Key ............................................................... 72 Doors ............................................................ 76 Boot .............................................................. 81 Roller sunblinds ............................................ 86 Side windows ................................................ 87 Sliding sunroof .............................................. 91 Anti-theft protection ..................................... 96 Seats and stowing ..................................... 99 Notes on the correct driver's seat posi tion ............................................................... 99 Seats .......................................................... 100 Steering wheel ............................................ 109 Easy entry and exit feature .......................... 111 Operating the memory function .................. 112 Stowage areas ............................................. 114 Cup holders ................................................ 125 Ashtray and cigarette lighter ....................... 126 Sockets ....................................................... 127 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial ...... 129 Fitting or removing the floor mats ............... 131 Fitting/removing the pennant holder .......... 132 Light and sight ......................................... 134 Exterior lighting .......................................... 134 Interior lighting ........................................... 143 Changing bulbs (only for vehicles with halogen headlamps) ................................... 144 Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system ............................................ 147 Mirrors ........................................................ 149 Operating the sun visors ............................. 152 Infrared reflective windscreen function ...... 153 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Climate control ......................................... 154 Overview of climate control systems .......... 154 Operating the climate control system ......... 155 Driving and parking ................................. 166 Driving ........................................................ 166 DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ 177 Automatic transmission .............................. 178 Refuelling .................................................... 182 Parking ....................................................... 188 Driving and driving safety systems ............. 196 Trailer hitch ................................................ 252 Bicycle rack ................................................ 256 Vehicle towing instructions ......................... 258 Instrument Display and on-board computer .................................................. 259 Instrument display overview ....................... 259 Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel .......................................................... 260 Operating the on-board computer ............... 261 Setting the additional value range .............. 262 Overview of displays on the multifunc tion display ................................................. 263 Adjusting the instrument lighting ............... 263 Menus and submenus ................................ 264 Head-up Display ......................................... 270 Tow-starting or towing away ....................... 395 Electrical fuses ........................................... 400 Contents 3 Multimedia system .................................. 272 Overview and operation .............................. 272 System settings .......................................... 281 Navigation ................................................... 291 Telephone ................................................... 317 Online and Internet functions ..................... 339 Media ......................................................... 347 Radio .......................................................... 356 Sound ......................................................... 359 Maintenance and care ............................. 362 ASSYST PLUS service interval display ........ 362 Engine compartment .................................. 363 Cleaning and care ....................................... 370 Breakdown assistance ............................ 381 Emergency .................................................. 381 Flat tyre ...................................................... 383 Battery (vehicle) ......................................... 389 Wheels and tyres ..................................... 404 Notes on noise or unusual handling char acteristics ................................................... 404 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres ........................................................... 404 Notes on snow chains ................................ 404 Tyre pressure .............................................. 405 Wheel change .............................................. 412 Emergency spare wheel .............................. 422 Technical data .......................................... 424 Notes on technical data .............................. 424 On-board electronics .................................. 424 Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number ........................................... 426 Operating fluids .......................................... 428 Vehicle data ................................................ 437 Trailer hitch ................................................ 439 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 4 Contents Display messages and warning/indi cator lamps .............................................. 442 Display messages ....................................... 442 Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 501 Index .......................................................... 519 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 6 At a glance Cockpit Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only At a glance Cockpit 7 1 Steering wheel gearshift paddle 2 Combination switch 3 DIRECT SELECT lever 4 Display (multimedia system) 5 Start/stop button 6 Control panel for the multimedia system 7 Climate control systems 8 Glove box 9 Hazard warning lights A Stowage compartment B Control elements for the multimedia system C Rear window roller sunblind D ECO start/stop function E Active Parking Assist F Sets the vehicle level G DYNAMIC SELECT switch 180 136 178 273 167 273 154 115 137 115 273 86 174 236 222 177 H PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamps I Control panel for the multimedia system J Adjusts the steering wheel K Control panel for:

On-board computer Operates cruise control or the variable limiter Operates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC L Unlocks the bonnet M Electric parking brake N Light switch O Control panel for:

Active Steering Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Head-up display 40 260 110 260 210 213 364 193 134 217 251 226 271 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 8 At a glance Overview of warning and indicator lamps Instrument display (standard) Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only At a glance Overview of warning and indicator lamps 9 1 Speedometer 2 ESP 3 #! Turn signal light 4 Steering assistance malfunction 5 Multifunction display 6 ! ABS malfunction 7 ; Engine diagnosis 8 Rev counter 9 % Diesel engine: preglow A ! Electric parking brake applied (red) B J Brakes (red) C # Electrical fault D Distance warning E ? Coolant too hot/cold F Coolant temperature display G J Brakes (yellow) 259 503 136 512 263 503 514 259 503 503 514 510 514 259 503 H ! Electric parking brake (yellow) I 6 Restraint system J Seat belt is not fastened K j Trailer hitch is not operational or is swivel ling L T Standing lights M Fuel level display 8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler flap location indicator N K Main beam O L Dipped beam P R Rear fog light Q AIR BODY CONTROL/DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL malfunctioning R h Tyre pressure monitoring system S ESP OFF 503 30 509 512 134 514 136 134 135 510 517 503 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 10 At a glance Overview of warning and indicator lamps Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only At a glance Overview of warning and indicator lamps 11 1 Speedometer 2 AIR BODY CONTROL/DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL malfunctioning 3 #! Turn signal light 4 Multifunction display 5 Rev counter 6 ESP OFF ESP 7 K Main beam L Dipped beam T Standing lights 8 ? Coolant too hot/cold 9 Coolant temperature display A Distance warning B Steering assistance malfunction C # Electrical fault 259 510 136 263 259 503 503 136 134 134 514 259 510 512 514 D J Brakes (red) E Seat belt is not fastened F Fuel level display G 8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler flap location indicator H R Rear fog light I 6 Restraint system J % Diesel engine: preglow K ; Engine diagnosis L J Brakes (yellow) M ! Electric parking brake applied (red) N h Tyre pressure monitoring system O ! ABS malfunction P ! Electric parking brake (yellow) Q j Trailer hitch is not operational or is swivel ling 503 509 514 135 30 514 503 503 517 503 503 512 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 12 At a glance Overhead control panel Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only At a glance Overhead control panel 13 1 Sun visors 2 p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 3 | Switches the automatic light control on/off 4 SOS emergency call system (Mercedes-Benz emergency call system) 5 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 6 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 152 143 143 336 143 143 7 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 8 Service call button (Mercedes me connect) 9 Spectacles compartment A 3 Opens/closes the panoramic sliding sun roof Opens/closes the roller sunblinds B Inside rear-view mirror 143 333 116 91 91 150 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 14 At a glance Door control panel and seat adjustment Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only At a glance Door control panel and seat adjustment 15 1 Adjusts the seats electrically 2 Switches the seat heater on/off 3 Switches the seat ventilation on/off 4 Adjusts the front passenger seat from the driv er's seat 5 & % Locks/unlocks the vehicle 6 Opens/closes the boot lid 7 Adjusts and folds the outside mirrors out/in electrically 8 W Opens/closes the right side window 9 W Opens/closes the rear right side window A Child safety lock for the rear side windows B W Opens/closes the rear left side window 103 108 109 103 77 81 149 87 87 70 87 C W Opens/closes the left side window D Opens the door E Sets the memory function F Sets the seat fore-and-aft adjustment G Adjusts the seat cushion length H Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support I Seat adjustment using the multimedia system J Adjusts the head restraints K Adjusts the seat cushion inclination L Adjusts the seat height M Adjusts the seat backrest inclination 87 76 112 102 102 104 106 104 102 102 102 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 16 At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only What to do in the event of an accident 1 QR code for accessing the rescue card 2 Safety vests 3 Button for SOS emergency call system 4 Checking and topping up operating fluids 5 Tow-starting and towing away 6 Flat tyre 7 Starting assistance 8 Hazard warning lamps 25 381 336 428 396 383 393 137 At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns 17 9 Fire extinguisher A Fuel filler flap with instruction labels for tyre pressure, fuel type and QR code for accessing the rescue card B Tow-starting and towing away C TIREFIT kit D First-aid kit (soft sided) E Warning triangle 383 182 396 385 382 382 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 18 Digital Owner's Manual Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Owner's Manual

# Select a menu item. You also have the option of calling up the Own er's Manual within a main function (e.g. via Infor-

mation on phone). The Digital Owner's Manual describes the func tion and operation of:

R the vehicle R the multimedia system For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated while driving. The Digital Owner's Manual contains the follow ing menu items:

R Search: allows you to search precisely for keywords. R Quick start: provides you with important information so that you can start using your vehicle immediately. R Tips: provides tips on how to use your vehicle in certain situations. R Messages: provides you with further informa tion about the messages in the instrument cluster. R Bookmarks: provides you with a list of all the bookmarks you have stored yourself. 1 Picture 2 Menu 3 Navigation window Some sections of the Digital Owner's Manual, such as warning notes, can be made visible by highlighting and pressing them.

% The Owner's Manual can also be found in the Mercedes-Benz Guides app in all common app stores. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Protection of the environment

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style The pollutant emission of your vehicle is directly related to the way you operate your vehicle. You can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-

responsible manner. Please observe the fol lowing recommendations on operating condi tions and personal driving style. Operating conditions:

# make sure that the tyre pressure is cor rect.

# do not carry any unnecessary weight

(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them).

# adhere to the service intervals. a regularly serviced vehicle will contrib ute to environmental protection.

# always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style:

# do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.

# do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary.

# drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.

# avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.

# change gear in good time and use each gear only up to of its maximum engine speed.

# switch off the engine in stationary traf fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function.

# drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECO display for a fuel-efficient driving style. General notes 19 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles EU countries only:

Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-

of-Life Vehicles Directive. A network of vehicle take-back points and dis mantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources. For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-

back conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz website for your country. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 20 General notes Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by not using recycled reconditioned components Daimler AG offers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the implied warranty is valid as for new parts.

# Use recycled reconditioned compo nents and parts from Daimler AG.

* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessories or from repairs or welding Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle:

R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Centre console

# Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas.

# Do not carry out repairs or welding.

# Have accessories retrofitted at a quali fied specialist workshop. You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal function. Only use Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conver sion parts and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independ ently approved by a testing centre. Certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehi cle's general operating permit. This is the case in the following situations:

R the vehicle type is different from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted. R other road users could be endangered. R the exhaust gas or noise level gets worse. Always specify the vehicle identification number

(VIN) ( page 426) when ordering Mercedes-

Benz Genuine Parts. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Owner's Manual This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of this Owner's Manual going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit ted with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illus trations. The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi cle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Operating safety

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mal functions or system failures If you do not have the prescribed service/

maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures.

# Always have the prescribed service/

maintenance work as well any required repairs carried out at a qualified spe cialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts Modification to electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com ponent parts. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. General notes 21 As a result, these may no longer function properly and/or jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

# Never tamper with the wiring and elec tronic component parts or their soft ware.

# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you modify the on-board electronics, the gen eral operating permit is rendered invalid.

& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system.

# When driving on unpaved roads or off-

road, regularly check the vehicle under side. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 22 General notes

# Remove trapped plants or other flam mable material, in particular.

# If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle:

R the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road R the vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pot hole R a heavy object strikes the underbody or chassis components In situations such as this, the body, the underbody, chassis components, wheels or tyres could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may not absorb the loads that arise as intended. If the underbody panelling is damaged, flam mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the underbody panelling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts on the exhaust system.

# Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. or

# If driving safety is impaired while con tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop. Declaration of Conformity Electromagnetic compatibility The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regu lation UN R10. Wireless vehicle components The following information applies to all compo nents of the vehicle and the information systems and communication devices integrated into the vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio waves:

The components of this vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the basic requirements and all other relevant conditions of Directive 2014/53/EU. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Jack Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

EC declaration of conformity 1. The signatory, as a representative Manufacturer:

BRANO a.s. 74741 Hradec nad Moravic, Opavsk 1000, Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Czech Republic ID No.: 64-387-5933 VAT Reg. No.: CZ64-387-5933 declares, as our sole responsibility, that the product:

2. a) Designation:

Jack Type, number:

A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18 B) A 240 580 00 18 C) A 639 580 02 18 Year of manufacture: 2015 Fulfils all relevant conditions Directive No. 2006/42/EC b) Description and purpose of use:

The jack is only intended for raising the specified vehicle in accordance with the operating instruc tions affixed to the jack. 3. Reference data of the harmonised standards or specifications A) ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, DBL 7382.20, MBN 10435, AS 2693 B) ISO 4063, ISO 14341-A, DBL 7392.10, MBN 10435 C) DBL 7392.10, DBL 8230.10 The technical documentation of the product is stored at the manufacturer's plant. Representa tive for the compilation of the technical docu mentation: Director of the Technical Department Brano a.s. 4. Hradec nad Moravic City 5. 05.05.2015 Date Signed by Director of Quality General notes 23 TIREFIT kit Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

EC declaration of conformity In accordance with EC Directive 2006/42/EC We hereby declare that the product Product designation: Daimler electric air pump Model designation: 0851ve, DT/UW 200046 MB part no.: A 000 583 8200 complies with the following relevant regulations:

2004/108/EC Applied harmonised standards, in particular:

DIN EN 55014-1 DIN EN 55014-2:2009-06 Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbH Address: Birkenhainerstrasse 77, 63450 Hanau, Germany Authorised representative: IMS dept. Date: June 2015 Signature: IMS-AM, IMS-AE-L Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 24 General notes Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic devices at a quali fied specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to con necting devices to the diagnostics con nection If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehi cle could be affected.

# Only connect equipment to a diagnos tics connection in the vehicle which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-

Benz.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

* NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery.

# Check the charge level of the battery.

# If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor mation being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the neces sary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety. Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop:

R work relevant to safety R service and maintenance work R repair work R modifications as well as installations and conversions R work on electronic components Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only MercedesBenz recommends a MercedesBenz service centre. ship. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre, for example. Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehi cles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehi cle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registra tion data. It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases:

R if your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer. R if your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle owner Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. When using the vehicle, observe the following information:

R the safety notes in this manual R technical data for the vehicle R traffic rules and regulations R laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Implied warranty

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instruc tions. Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola tion of these operating instructions. General notes 25 This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

# Follow the instructions in these operat ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehi cle damage. QR code for rescue card The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card con tains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at http://

www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 26 General notes Data storage Electronic control units Electronic control units are fitted in your vehicle. Some of these are necessary for the safe opera tion of your vehicle, while some assist you when driving (driver assistance systems). In addition, your vehicle provides comfort and entertainment functions, which are also made possible by elec tronic control units. Electronic control units contain data memories which can temporarily or permanently store technical information about the vehicle's operat ing state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or faults. In general, this information documents the state of a component part, a module, a system or the surroundings such as:

R operating states of system components (e.g. fluid levels, battery status, tyre pressure) R status messages concerning the vehicle or its individual components (e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, display of fastened seat belts) R malfunctions or defects in important system components (e.g. lights, brakes) R information on events leading to vehicle damage R system reactions in special driving situations

(e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of sta bility control systems) R ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain sensor) In addition to providing the actual control unit function, this data assists the manufacturer in detecting and rectifying faults and optimising vehicle functions. The majority of this data is temporary and is only processed in the vehicle itself. Only a small portion of the data is stored in the event or fault memory. When your vehicle is serviced, technical data from the vehicle can be read out by service net work employees (e.g. workshops, manufactur ers) or third parties (e.g. breakdown services). Services include repair services, maintenance processes, warranty claims and quality assur ance measures, for example. The read out is per formed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The respective service network locations or third parties collect, process and use the data. They document technical statuses of the vehicle, assist in finding faults and improving quality and are transmitted to the manufacturer, if neces sary. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this, the manufacturer requires technical data from vehicles. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet as part of repair or maintenance work. Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle convenience and info tainment functions yourself. This includes, for example:

R multimedia data such as music, films or pho tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system R address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an inte grated navigation system Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R entered navigation destinations R data about the use of Internet services This data can be saved locally in the vehicle or it is located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle (e.g. smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player). If this data is stored in the vehi cle, you can delete it at any time. This data is sent to third parties only at your request, partic ularly when you use online services in accord ance with the settings that you have selected. You can store or change convenience settings/

individualisations in the vehicle at any time. Depending on the equipment, this includes, for example:

R settings for the seat and steering wheel posi tions R suspension and climate control settings R customisations such as interior lighting If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can control this by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone can be output via the multimedia system. Cer tain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type of integration, this can include:

R general vehicle data R position data This allows you to use selected apps on your smartphone, such as navigation or music play back. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehi cle data is not directly accessible. Which type of further data processing occurs is determined by the provider of the specific app used. Which set tings you can make, if any, depends on the spe cific app and the operating system of your smartphone. Online services Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connec tion, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wire General notes 27 less network connection is enabled via the vehi cle's transmission and reception unit or via con nected mobile end devices (e.g. smartphones). Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online serv ices and applications/apps provided by the man ufacturer or other providers. Manufacturer's services Regarding online services of the manufacturer, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place (e.g. Owner's Manual, website of the manufacturer) along with the relevant data protection information. Per sonal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data is exchanged via a secure connection, e.g. the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Personal data is collected, pro cessed and used via the provision of services exclusively on the basis of legal permissions or with prior consent. The services and functions (sometimes subject to a fee) can usually be activated or deactivated. In some cases, this also applies to the entire vehicle's data connection. This excludes, in par ticular, legally prescribed functions and services. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 28 General notes Third party services If it is possible to use online services from other providers, these services are subject to the data protection and terms of use of the responsible provider. The manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged. Please enquire, therefore, about the type, scope and purpose of the collection and use of per sonal data as part of third party services from their respective provider. Copyright Information on free and open-source software licences for your vehicle's software can be found on the data storage medium in your vehicle document wallet and on the Internet together with updates at:

http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Restraint system Protection by the restraint system The restraint system includes the following com ponents:

R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi cle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, seat belt tensioners and/or airbags supplement the protection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Seat belt tensioners and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident. In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu pant must observe the following information:

R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos sible. R Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. However, no system available today can com pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying. Occupant safety 29 Reduced restraint system protection

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from modifications to the restraint system The restraint system can no longer function correctly after alterations have been made. The restraint system may then not protect the vehicle occupants as intended by failing in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for example

# Never alter the parts of the restraint system.

# Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their software. If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom modate a person with disabilities, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driv ing aids which have been approved for your vehi cle by Mercedes-Benz. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 30 Occupant safety Restraint system functionality When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint sys tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional. Malfunctioning restraint system A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys tem if:

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on. R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint sys tem If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be trig gered unintentionally or might not be trig gered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe cialist workshop. Function of the restraint system in an acci dent How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated:

R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-

emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the colli sion. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred cannot play a deci sive role in airbag deployment, nor do they pro vide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, for exam ple, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle deceleration. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only The components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other:

Component Detected deploy ment situation Seat belt tensioners Driver's airbag, front passenger front air bag Frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover Frontal impact Knee airbag Frontal impact Side impact airbag Side impact Window airbag Belt airbag PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Side impact, rollover, frontal impact Frontal impact Side impact The front passenger front airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger front airbag is correct

( page 40).

& WARNING Rick of burns from hot airbag components The airbag parts are hot after an airbag has been deployed.

# Do not touch the airbag parts.

# Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, partic ularly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an airbag deployed. Occupant safety 31 If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an air bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released:

R The bang will not generally affect your hear ing. R In general, the powder released is not haz ardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 32 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly.

# Always ensure that all vehicle occu pants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Always observe the instructions about the cor rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat

( page 99). In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro vide the intended level of protection, each vehi cle occupant must observe the following infor mation:

R The seat belt must not be twisted and must fit tightly and snugly across the body. R The seat belt must be routed across the centre of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. R Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoul der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin ted, abrasive or fragile objects. R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Never allow babies and chil dren to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads

( page 114). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat. If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on

"Children in the vehicle" ( page 46). Reduced seat belt protection

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam ple.

# Adjust the seat properly before begin ning your journey.

# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only routed across the centre of your shoul der.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller build Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable addi tional restraint system. If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly.

# Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint system.

& WARNING Danger of injury or death due to blocked seat belt anchorages The restraint effect of the seat belt is impaired if objects between the front seat and the door are blocking the movable seat belt anchorage on the front seat. The seat belt may not then provide the proper protection.

# Before starting a journey, make sure that there are no objects between the front seat and the door.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations:

R If the seat belts are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R If the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty R If the seat belt tensioners, seat belt anchorages or seat belt retractors have been modified Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible, e.g. due to splinters of glass. Occupant safety 33 Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified seat belt tensioners could acciden tally trigger or fail to function as intended.

# Never modify the seat belts, seat belt tensioners, seat belt anchorages or seat belt retractors.

# Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean.

# Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tension ers Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protec tive function. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 34 Occupant safety

# Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners immediately replaced at a qualified specialist work shop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.

# Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted. Information on the belt airbag in the rear seat belt The BELTBAG identification indicates that a rear seat belt is equipped with a belt airbag. When activated, the belt airbag increases the protected area of the vehicle occupant's ribcage.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to use of a non-approved child restraint sys tem In an accident, the belt airbag may damage a non-approved child restraint system or a child restraint system which has not been approved for use in conjunction with the belt airbag. As a result, the child restraint system may not be able to provide the intended level of protection. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom mends that you only use a child restraint sys tem which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz in combination with a belt airbag. Information on child restraint systems

( page 49). Fastening and adjusting seat belts If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can not be pulled out any further.

# Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor responding seat. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Press and hold the seat belt outlet release and slide seat belt outlet 3 into the desired position.

# Let go of the seat belt outlet release and ensure that seat belt outlet 3 locks into position. Vehicles with automatic front passenger front airbag deactivation system:

* NOTE Deployment of the seat belt ten sioner and side impact airbag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger seat, the seat belt tensioner and the side impact airbag may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other sys tems.

# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Vehicles without automatic front passenger front airbag deactivation system:

* NOTE Deployment of the seat belt ten sioner when the front passenger seat is unoccupied If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger seat, the seat belt tensioner may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems.

# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Seat belt adjustment function Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: if the front seat belt is not pulled tight across your body, the seat belt adjustment may automatically apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia sys tem ( page 35). Occupant safety 35 Releasing a seat belt

# Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue. Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Vehicle settings . Belt adjustment

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger The seat belt warning lamp in the instru ment display is a reminder that all vehicle occu pants must wear their seat belts correctly. In addition, an acoustic warning tone may sound. As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 36 Occupant safety Function of the rear seat belt status display The rear seat belt status display is only available for certain countries. Airbags Overview of airbags The rear seat belt status display informs you which rear seat belt is not fastened. You can immediately dismiss the rear seat belt status display using the back button on the left-

hand side of the steering wheel ( page 261). 1 Knee airbag 2 Driver's airbag 3 Front passenger front airbag 4 Window airbag 5 Side impact airbag The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. When activated, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Potential protection from each airbag:

AIRBAG Potential protection for Knee airbag Thigh, knee and lower leg Driver's airbag, front passenger front airbag Head and ribcage Window airbag Head Side impact air bag Ribcage, also pelvis for front seat occupants The front passenger front airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger front airbag is correct

( page 40). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only* NOTE Important points to remember if the front passenger seat is unoccupied

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if:

R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat. R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.

# Stow objects in a suitable place.

# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Protection by the airbags Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a cor rectly fastened seat belt. If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended pro tective function and deployment may even cause further injuries. To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all vehicle occupants:

R Have their seat belt fastened correctly, including pregnant women. R Are seated properly and keep as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information.

# Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant. To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information:

R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; the driver's seat and front Occupant safety 37 passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa tion on the correct driver's seat position

( page 99). R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. R Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. R Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy ment area of the airbag. R If children are travelling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes ( page 46). R Always stow and secure objects correctly. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 38 Occupant safety Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the follow ing:

R There are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessory parts, such as cup holders, attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on doors, side windows or side panelling. R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. Reduced airbag protection

& WARNING Risk of injury from modifica tions to the airbag cover If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no lon ger function correctly.

# Never modify an airbag cover and do not affix objects to it. The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol ( page 36).

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre vent the deployment of the airbags integra ted into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the operation of the auto matic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted.

# You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the correspond ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc tions of the sensors in the door panelling Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not per formed correctly to the doors or door panel ling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do.

# Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.

# Always have work on the doors or door panelling carried out at a qualified spe cialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro tection and cannot provide the intended pro tective function in the event of an accident.

# Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced. Have deployed airbags replaced immediately. Status of the front passenger front airbag Function of the automatic front passenger front airbag deactivation system The automatic front passenger front airbag deac tivation system is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint system. The front passenger front airbag is enabled or disabled accordingly. Occupant safety 39 When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, always make sure of the follow ing:

R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi tioned correctly ( page 52). R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. R Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust ment. R The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. R The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. R The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina tion and the head restraint setting accord ingly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect the func tion of the automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff. This could result in the front passenger front airbag not functioning as intended during an accident.

# Do not place any objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system.

# The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.

# The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possi ble, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 40 Occupant safety A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information:

R Fasten seat belts correctly ( page 31). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos sible. The front passenger front airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example in the fol lowing situations:

R The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the sitting sur face.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to deactivated front passenger airbag If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front passenger airbag is disa bled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:

R The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. R The person is seated correctly.

# Ensure, both before and during the jour ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas sification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger front airbag deactivation system self-test. The status of the front passenger front airbag is displayed. Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps

( page 40). Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica tor lamps Vehicles without automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat. Have automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta tus of the front passenger front airbag is correct for the current situation. After fitting a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat:

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continu ously. the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side ( page 66). Self-test of automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously. The status of the front passenger front airbag is displayed after the self-test:

R PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front passenger front airbag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. R PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continu ously: the front passenger front airbag is dis abled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger front airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. Occupant safety 41

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from using a rearward-facing child restraint system when the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Always ensure that the front passenger air bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 67). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 42 Occupant safety not fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat. Instead, fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat. After fitting a forward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat: depend ing on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the fol lowing information.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward-

facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and you position the front passenger seat too close to the cockpit, in the event of an acci dent, the child could:

R Come into contact with the vehicle inte rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is lit, for example. R Be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.

# Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet on the vehicle to the shoul der belt guide on the child restraint sys tem. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.

# Always observe the child restraint sys tem manufacturer's installation instruc tions. When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 67). If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con tinuously or be off, depending on the person's stature. A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information:

R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with a stature correspond ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger front air bag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person with a build corresponding to that of an adult should not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp either lights up continuously or remains off, depending on the result of the classification.

-

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or a person of smaller stature should use a rear seat. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only-

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: a person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front passenger airbag can not perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the front passenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:

R The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a cor rectly fastened seat belt. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

R Child restraint system on the front passenger seat ( page 67). R Suitable positioning of the child restraint sys tem ( page 52). PRE-SAFE system PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protec tion) PRE-SAFE is able to detect certain critical driv ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas ures to protect the vehicle occupants. Occupant safety 43 PRE-SAFE can implement the following meas ures independently of each other:

R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the sliding sunroof. R Vehicles with memory function: moving the front passenger seat to a more favoura ble seat position. R Vehicles with multicontour seat: increas ing the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. R PRE-SAFE Sound: provided that the multi media system is switched on, generates a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro tective mechanism of a person's hearing.

* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat The automatic adjustment of the seat posi tion may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 44 Occupant safety

# Stow objects in a suitable place. Reversing the PRE-SAFE system measures If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings your self.

# If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases. Function of PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) PRE-SAFE PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact. PRE-SAFE PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other:

R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a higher flashing frequency. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is cancel led automatically when the vehicle pulls away. If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. System limitations The system will not initiate any action in the fol lowing situations:

R when reversing or R when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear impact The system will not initiate any braking applica tion in the following situations:

R whilst driving or R when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist Information on PRE-SAFE Impulse Side If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE-

SAFE Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front-seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the centre of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated. This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant. If PRE-SAFE Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual display message appears

( page 443). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Safely transporting children in the vehicle Closely observe the following when travel ling with children in the vehicle

% Also strictly observe the safety notes for the specific situation. In this way you can recog nise potential risks and avoid dangers if chil dren are travelling in the vehicle

( page 46). Be diligent Bear in mind that neglecting to secure a child in the child restraint system may have serious con sequences. Always be diligent in securing a child carefully before every journey. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 1.50 m in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information:

R Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi cle. R The child restraint system must be appropri ate to the age, weight and size of the child. R The vehicle seat must be suitable for fitting a child restraint system ( page 52). Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Generic term "child restraint system"

The generic term "child restraint system" will be used in this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example:

R a baby car seat R a rearward-facing child seat R a forward-facing child seat R a child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Occupant safety 45 Observing laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle. Make sure that the child restraint system is approved in accordance with the valid test speci fications and guidelines. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Only use approved child restraint systems Only child restraint systems with the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle:

R UN R44 R UN R129 (i-Size child restraint systems) Information on child restraint system approval categories and details on the approval label on the child restraint system ( page 53). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 46 Occupant safety Detecting risks, avoiding danger Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems:

R the ISOFIX or i-Size mounting brackets R the vehicle's seat belt system R the Top Tether anchorages Installing an ISOFIX or an i-Size child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of fitting the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys tem, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system

( page 58). Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo site direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Always secure a child restraint system cor rectly

& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by incorrect installation of the child restraint system If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed on a suitable seating position, it cannot perform its intended protective func tion. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change of direction.

# Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.

# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.

# Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cush ions.

# Always use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them.

# Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle If the child restraint system is not correctly installed or secured, it could release in the event of an accident, sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Occupant safety 47 R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition R Also secure Top Tether if present. Do not alter the child restraint system

& WARNING Risk of injury due to altera tions to the child restraint system The child restraint system may no longer function as it is supposed to if you make alterations or attach objects to it, e.g. toys or unsuitable accessories. This poses an increased risk of injury!

Never alter the child restraint system. Only attach accessories which the manufacturer of the child restraint system has authorised especially for this child restraint system. MercedesBenz recommends Mercedes-Benz care products for cleaning child restraint sys tems recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems Child restraint systems or their retaining sys tems that have been subjected to a load in an accident may then not be able to perform their intended protective function. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change of direction.

# Always replace child restraint systems immediately that have been damaged or involved in an accident.

# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.

# Always fit child restraint systems cor rectly, even when not in use.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information:

-

-

-

Install the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system on the rear seat ( page 58). Secure the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat ( page 65). Secure the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat

( page 68). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the jour ney, that the status of the front passenger front airbag is correct for the current situation ( page 40). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 48 Occupant safety Avoiding direct sunlight Observe when stopping or parking

& WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns on these parts, particularly on metallic parts of the child restraint system.

# Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.

# Protect it with a blanket, for example.

# If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could:

R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, children could also set the vehi cle in motion, for example, by:

R releasing the parking brake. R shifting the automatic transmission out of park position j. R starting the engine.

# Never leave children and animals unat tended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the digital vehicle key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If people particularly children are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injury!

# Never leave anyone particularly chil dren unattended in the vehicle.

# Never leave animals in the vehicle unat tended. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Overview of recommended child restraint systems Further information on the correct child restraint system can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Occupant safety 49 Vehicles with belt airbags: when securing a child in a child restraint system on an outer rear seat, it is essential to observe the following instructions:

R Only use a child restraint system approved by Mercedes-Benz.

- Weight category 0, 0+ or 1: the child restraint system must be installed on the ISOFIX or i-Size child seat securing sys tem.

- Weight category II/III: only use the approved child seats KIDFIX or KIDFIX XP. R Secure a rearward-facing child restraint sys tem with the ISOFIX or the i-Size child seat securing system. R Secure a forward-facing child restraint sys tem with the ISOFIX or the i-Size child seat securing system and, if present, the Top Tether anchorage. R Observe the notes in "Belt airbag in rear seat belt" ( page 34). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 50 Occupant safety Securing with ISOFIX Weight category Size category Category 0+:

up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months Size category E Category I:

918 kg Size category B1 Type1 Approval number 1 Manufacturer: Britax Rmer. BABY SAFE plus E1 04 301 146 DUO plus E1 04 301 133 Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat belt Weight category Category 0:

up to 10 kg and up to approx. 6 months Type1 Approval number 1 Manufacturer: Britax Rmer. BABY SAFE plus II E1 04 301 146 Order number2 2 With colour code 9H95. B6 6 86 8224 A 000 970 17 02 Order number2 2 With colour code 9H95. A 000 970 13 02 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Occupant safety 51 Weight category Category 0+:

up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months Category I:

918 kg and from approx. 9 months up to 4 years Category II/III:

1536 kg and from approx. 412 years Category II/III:

1536 kg and from approx. 412 years Type1 Approval number BABY SAFE plus II E1 04 301 146 DUO plus E1 04 301 133 KIDFIX E1 04 301 198 KIDFIX XP E1 04 301 304 Order number2 A 000 970 13 02 A 000 970 17 02 A 000 970 20 02 A 000 970 23 02 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 52 Occupant safety Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for fitting a child restraint system Securing systems for child restraint systems Vehicle seat Left/right rear seat Preferred securing system:

ISOFIX child seat securing system

( page 55) or i-Size child seat securing system

( page 57) Also secure Top Tether if present

( page 60) Front passenger seat Securing system:

R Vehicle seat belt ( page 62) Alternative securing system:

R Vehicle seat belt ( page 62) Be sure to observe:

R If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta tus of the front passenger front airbag is correct for the current situation. R Notes on the automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Vehicle seat Centre rear seat Securing system:

R Vehicle seat belt ( page 62) Approval categories for child restraint sys tems Only use approved child restraint systems Only child restraint systems with the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle:

R UN-R44 R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems) Identification on child restraint system Information such as approval category, weight category and type approval number can be found on the approval label on the child restraint system. There may be further information such as the ISOFIX size categories, depending on the approval category of the child restraint system. Approval categories in accordance with UN-

R44 Example of an approval label Occupant safety 53 R Universal: child restraint systems in the

"Universal" category are approved for instal lation in vehicles. They can be used in accordance with the overviews of suitability of seats for the anchorage of child restraint systems on seats labelled U, UF or IUF. The identification IUF refers to ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must be addi tionally anchored with Top Tether or support points. R Semi-Universal: child restraint systems in the "semi-universal" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. R Vehicle-specific: child restraint systems in the "vehicle-specific" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R Suitability of seats for the anchorage of belt-

secured child restraint systems

( page 62). 54 Occupant safety in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Approval categories in accordance with UN-

R129 Example of an approval label R iSize: child restraint systems in the "iSize"

category are approved for installation in vehi cles with iSize mounting brackets. They can be used in accordance with the overviews on suitability of seats for the anchorage of child restraint systems on seats labelled iU. The identification iU refers to iSize child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must be addi tionally anchored with Top Tether or support points. Please note the suitability of the vehicle seat Depending on the approval category, there are forward-facing and rearward-facing child restraint systems. Their use can be restricted for certain vehicle seats:

R Suitability of seats for the anchorage of ISO FIX child restraint systems ( page 55). R Suitability of seats for the anchorage of iSize child restraint systems ( page 57). Fitting the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system on the rear seat Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Occupant safety 55 Overview of the suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems ISOFIX identification ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed restraint systems. R The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in accordance with UN R44 ( page 53). R Attach only child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with UN R44 as per the following ISOFIX tables. Carry cot Size class:

F G Equipment:

Left/right rear seat ISO/L1 ISO/L2 X X X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight group and/or size class. Weight group 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approx. 6 months) Size class:

E Equipment:

Left/right rear seat ISO/R1 IL IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 56 Occupant safety Weight group 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months) Size class:

Equipment:

Left/right rear seat E D C ISO/R1 ISO/R2 ISO/R3 IL IL IL (1) IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

(1) When using a child restraint system in the size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat to the highest position and move the seat back rest to an upright position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system. Weight group 1 (918 kg and approx. 9 months to 4 years) Size class:

Equipment:

Left/right rear seat D C B B1 ISO/R2 ISO/R3 ISO/F2 ISO/F2X IL IL (1) IUF IUF Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Size class:

A Equipment:

Left/right rear seat ISO/F3 IUF Occupant safety 57 IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight group.

(1) When using a child restraint system in the size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat to the highest position and move the seat back rest to an upright position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system. Overview of the suitability of the seats for attaching an iSize child restraint system i-Size identification iSize is a standardised securing system for specially designed restraint systems. R This symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an iSize child restraint system in accordance with UN R129 ( page 53). R It is possible to attach child restraint systems that are permitted in accordance with

- UN R44 as per the ISOFIX tables ( page 55) or

- UN R129 as per the following iSize tables Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 58 Occupant safety Front passenger seat i-Size child restraint system

(ISO/R2, ISO/F2X) X Left/right rear seat iU X Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category. i-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category". Fitting the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system on the rear seat

& WARNING Risk of injury if the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold for wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. R If this is the case, the vehicle occupant would be forced into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. R Objects or loads in the boot/load com partment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the seat backrest and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip. If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is excee ded For ISOFIX or iSize child restraint systems in which the child is secured using the seat belt integrated in the child restraint system, the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is 33 kg. If the child and the child restraint system together weigh more than 33 kg, the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system with integra ted seat belt does not offer sufficient protec tion. Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint systems and Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example.

# If the child and the child restraint sys tem together weigh more than 33 kg, only use an ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt.

# Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system:

R in the manufacturer's installation and operat ing instructions for the child restraint system used R on a label on the child restraint system, if present Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When fitting a child restraint system, observe the following:

O Always observe the correct use and the suit ability of the seats for attaching a child restraint system. ISOFIX child seat securing system

( page 55) iSize child seat securing system

( page 57) O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat forward slightly. When fitting an ISOFIX child restraint sys tem, observe the following:

O When using a baby car seat in Group 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system in Group 1 on a rear Occupant safety 59 seat: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system. O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in Group 1: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. In addition, the seat backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the vehicle seat. When you remove the child restraint sys tem, install the head restraint again immedi ately and adjust all the head restraints cor rectly. O For certain child restraint systems in weight groups 2 or 3, there may be certain restric tions in the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 60 Occupant safety O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the head restraints accordingly. When fitting an iSize child restraint sys tem, observe the following:

O When using a rearward-facing child restraint system: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint sys tem. O When using a forward-facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possi ble. In addition, the seat backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possi ble, lie flat against the backrest of the vehi cle seat. When you remove the child restraint sys tem, install the head restraint again immedi ately and adjust all the head restraints cor rectly. 1 ISOFIX mounting bracket 2 iSize mounting bracket Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system or the iSize child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the centre seat When fitting a child restraint system, the seat belt for the centre seat could be damaged.

# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap ped.

# Remove covers 1 or 2.

# Attach the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint sys tem to both mounting brackets in the vehicle.

# Having removed the child seat, reattach cov ers 1 or 2. Securing Top Tether

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after fitting Top Tether belts If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an acci dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident.

# Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting Top Tether belts.

# Observe the lock verification indicator. If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt:

The risk of injury can be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt facilitates an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with ISOFIX or iSize and the vehicle. Occupant safety 61

# If necessary, move head restraint 1 upwards ( page 106).

# Fold up cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3.

# Fit the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.

# Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint 1 between the two head restraint bars.

# Hook Top Tether hook 5 of Top Tether belt 4 without twisting into Top Tether anchor age 3.

# Tension Top Tether belt 4. Always comply with the child restraint system manufactur er's installation instructions when doing so.

# Fold down cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3.

# If necessary, slide head restraint 1 down wards ( page 106). Make sure that you do Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 62 Occupant safety not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 4. Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt Notes on the suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems Rear seats without a belt airbag Weight category Left/right rear seat Centre rear seat1 1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat. Category 0: up to 10 kg Category 0+: up to 13 kg Category I: 9 to 18 kg Category II: 15 to 25 kg Category III: 22 to 36 kg U, L U, L U, L U, L U, L U, L U, L U, L U U U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category. L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Occupant safety 63 Rear seats with a belt airbag Weight category Category 0: up to 10 kg Category 0+: up to 13 kg Category I: 9 to 18 kg Category II: 15 to 25 kg Category III: 22 to 36 kg Left/right rear seat X X X L1 L1 1 Only use the approved child seats KIDFIX or KIDFIX XP. X Not suitable for children in this weight category. L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Vehicles with belt airbags: when securing a child in a child restraint system on an outer rear seat, it is essential to observe the following instructions:

R Only use a child restraint system approved by Mercedes-Benz. R Observe the notes in "Overview of recom mended child restraint systems"

( page 49). R Secure a rearward-facing child restraint sys tem with the ISOFIX or the i-Size child seat securing system. R Secure a forward-facing child restraint sys tem with the ISOFIX or the i-Size child seat securing system and, if present, the Top Tether anchorage. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 64 Occupant safety Front passenger seat Notes Notes on the child restraint system on the front passenger seat R If it is absolutely necessary for you to fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 68). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger front airbag is correct for the current situation ( page 40). Front passenger seat Weight category Front passenger front airbag enabled1 Front passenger front airbag disabled1, 2 1 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest posi tion. 2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. Category 0: up to 10 kg Category 0+: up to 13 kg Category I: 9 to 18 kg Category II: 15 to 25 kg X X UF, L UF, L U, L U, L U, L U, L Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Occupant safety 65 Weight category Front passenger front airbag enabled1 Front passenger front airbag disabled1, 2 Category III: 22 to 36 kg UF, L U, L X Not suitable for children in this weight category. UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category. L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Rec ommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category. Attaching the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat

& WARNING Risk of injury if the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold for wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. R If this is the case, the vehicle occupant would be forced into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. R Objects or loads in the boot/load com partment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the seat backrest and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip. If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. When fitting a belt-secured child restraint sys tem, observe the following:

O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O For a child restraint system in the "Univer sal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 66 Occupant safety Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" ( page 62). O When using a baby car seat in Group 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system in Group 1 on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system. O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in Group 1: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. When you remove the child restraint sys tem, install the head restraint again immedi ately and adjust all the head restraints cor rectly. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat. O For certain child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, there may be certain restrictions in the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the head restraints accordingly. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat forward slightly.

# Fit the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the rear seat.

# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for wards and downwards from the seat belt out let. Notes on vehicles without automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff Sticker visible when the front passenger door is open Vehicles without automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Make sure you observe the following informa tion:

R Never fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat R Always fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat

-

Suitability of seats for attaching belt-

secured child restraint systems

( page 62) Secure the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat ( page 65)

-

R Notes on forward-facing and rearward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 67) Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat Observe the specific instructions for the rear ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. Occupant safety 67

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from using a rearward-facing child restraint system when the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Always ensure that the front passenger air bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor:

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: always observe the status of the front passenger front airbag. R If it is absolutely necessary to fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, always observe the information on automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff

( page 39). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 68 Occupant safety R When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger front airbag must always be disa bled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continu ously ( page 40). R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is out, the front passenger front airbag is enabled. The front passenger front airbag may deploy during an accident. Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following:

O Observe the child restraint system manufac turer's installation and operating instruc tions. O For a child restraint system in the "Univer sal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat. Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" ( page 62). O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in group I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. When you remove the child restraint sys tem, install the head restraint again immedi ately and adjust all the head restraints cor rectly. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. O For certain child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, there may be certain restrictions in the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. O When fitted, the child restraint system must not be braced between the roof and the seat and/or twisted. Adjust the seat back rest inclination accordingly. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the head restraints accordingly. O Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions.

# Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.

# Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust ment.

# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.

# Set the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.

# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.

# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for wards and downwards from the seat belt out let.

# If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly. Child safety locks Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could:

R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, children could also set the vehi cle in motion, for example, by:

R releasing the parking brake. R shifting the automatic transmission out of park position j. R starting the engine.

# Never leave children and animals unat tended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the digital vehicle key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehi cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

R Releasing the parking brake. Occupant safety 69 R Shifting the automatic transmission out of park position j. R Starting the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip ment and become trapped.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If people particularly children are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injury!

# Never leave anyone particularly chil dren unattended in the vehicle.

# Never leave animals in the vehicle unat tended. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 70 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could:

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out of the vehicle and be hit by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

# Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are travelling in the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the digital vehicle key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. Child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows are available. The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside. Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows

# Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate).

# Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly.

# To activate/deactivate: press button 2. Opening/closing the side window in the rear is possible:

R with indicator lamp 1 lit: via the switch on the driver's door Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Never leave animals in the vehicle unat tended.

# Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car rier. Occupant safety 71 R with indicator lamp 1 off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driv er's door Notes on pets in the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat tended in the vehicle If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten ded or unsecured, they could possibly press down buttons or switches. Thereby an animal may:

R activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example R switch systems on or off and endanger other road users Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking manoeuvres and injure vehicle occupants in the process. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 72 Opening and closing Key Overview of key functions

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could:

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out of the vehicle and be hit by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, children could also set the vehi cle in motion, for example, by:

R releasing the parking brake. R shifting the automatic transmission out of park position j or shifting manual trans mission into idle position. R starting the engine.

# Never leave children and animals unat tended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

# Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key"

function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

* NOTE Damage to the key caused by magnetic fields

# Keep the key away from strong mag netic fields. 1 Locks 2 Battery check lamp 3 Unlocks 4 Opens/closes the boot lid The key locks and unlocks the following compo nents:

R the doors R the boot lid R the fuel filler flap If you do not open the vehicle within approx imately 40 seconds after unlocking:

R the vehicle is locked again Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R anti-theft protection is reactivated Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This can impair the key's function.

% If battery check lamp 2 does not light up after pressing the % or & button, the battery is discharged. Replacing the key battery ( page 74). Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Vehicle set-

tings . Acoustic lock

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Activating/deactivating the panic alarm Requirements:

% The panic alarm function is only available in certain countries. R The ignition is switched off.

# To activate: press button 1 for approx imately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered.

# To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again. or

# Press the start/stop button on the cockpit

(the key is inside the vehicle). Changing the unlocking settings Possible unlocking functions of the key:

R Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap Opening and closing 73

# To switch between settings: press the

% and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. If the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected:

R Pressing the % button a second time cen trally unlocks the vehicle. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel filler flap are unlocked. Reducing the energy consumption of the key All vehicles: if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time, you can reduce the energy consumption of the respec tive key. To do so, deactivate the key functions.

# To deactivate: press the & button on the key twice in quick succession. The battery check lamp of the key flashes twice briefly and lights up once.

# To activate: press any button on the key. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 74 Opening and closing

% When the vehicle is started with the key in the stowage compartment of the centre con sole, the key functions are automatically activated ( page 169). Removing/inserting the emergency key

# Press release knob 1 again and fully remove emergency key 2.

# To insert: press release knob 1.

# Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate position or fully until it engages. Replacing the key battery

& DANGER Serious damage to health caused by swallowing batteries Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub stances. Swallowing batteries may cause serious damage to health. There is a risk of fatal injury.

# Keep batteries out of the reach of chil dren.

# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

# To remove: press release knob 1. Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.

# Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in the intermediate position.

% You can use the intermediate position of emergency key 2 to attach the key to a key ring.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat teries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.

#

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Requirements:

R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work shop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Remove the emergency key ( page 74).

# Press release button 2 down fully and slide cover 1 in the direction of the arrow.

# Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove.

# Remove battery compartment 3 and take out the discharged battery.

# Insert the new battery into battery compart ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the bat tery. Opening and closing 75

# Push in battery compartment 3.

# Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it engages. Problems with the key Problem You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Possible causes:

R The key battery is weak or discharged. R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. R The key is faulty.

# Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary ( page 74).

# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock ( page 74). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 76 Opening and closing Problem You have lost a key. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.

# If necessary, have the mechanical lock changed as well. Doors Notes on the additional door lock The additional door lock is only available for vehicles for the United Kingdom.

& WARNING Risk of injury to persons inside the vehicle when the additional door lock is activated If the additional door lock is activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. If there are persons in the vehicle, they can no longer leave the vehicle, e.g. in hazardous situations.

# Never leave persons unattended in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly persons or persons in need of help.

# If there are persons in the vehicle, do not activate the additional door lock. The additional door lock is automatically activa ted in the following situations:

R The vehicle is locked using the key. R The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO. If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me connect, the additional door lock is not activa ted. If the additional door lock is activated, the doors cannot be opened from the inside.

% After locking you can issue a signal with the horn. You can prevent the additional door lock from being activated by deactivating interior protec tion before locking the vehicle ( page 98). Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside

# United Kingdom only: observe the notes on the additional door lock ( page 76). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY LESS-GO. Opening and closing 77 Locking/unlocking the vehicle with a Digital Vehicle Key Requirements:

R One of the following versions of the Digital Vehicle Key is available:

-

- Digital Vehicle Key sticker Suitable mobile phone

# Pull door handle 2. Locking pin 1 pops up when the door is unlocked.

# To unlock: press button 1.

# To lock: press button 2. This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. The vehicle is not unlocked:

R If you have locked the vehicle using the key. R The vehicle is equipped with the "Digital Vehicle Key" function. R The "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect: http://

www.mercedes.me. R The mobile phone must be sufficiently charged.

% You can check the suitability of your mobile phone by entering the phone number at http://www.mercedes.me. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 78 Opening and closing Information about suitable mobile phones can be obtained from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or at http://www.mercedes-

benz.com/connect.

% Mercedes-Benz recommends that you carry the emergency key in case of function restrictions.

% The function is only available in combination with Mercedes me connect and only in cer tain countries.

% Protective cases around the mobile phone can impair the range of functions. If the vehicle has been parked for longer than two weeks, the NFC aerial in the door handle is deactivated.

# Pull the door handle. The NFC aerial is activated.

# Touch the door handle on the driver's door in the area where NFC aerial 1 is located with the part of the Digital Vehicle Key where the NFC aerial is located. The vehicle is locked or unlocked alternately. If you lose your Digital Vehicle Key, deactivate the "Digital Vehicle Key" service in Mercedes me connect via http://www.mercedes.me. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY LESS-GO Requirements:

R The key is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m. R The driver's door and the door at which the door handle is used are closed. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur face of the door handle.

# Convenience closing: touch recessed sen sor surface 2 for an extended period. If you open the boot lid from outside it is auto matically unlocked.

# To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or 2.

% Further information on convenience closing

( page 89). Problems with KEYLESS-GO Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Opening and closing 79 You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. Possible causes:

R KEYLESS-GO has been deactivated . R The key battery is weak or discharged. R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. R The key is faulty.

# Activate KEYLESS-GO ( page 73).

# Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary ( page 74).

# Use the emergency key to unlock or lock the vehicle ( page 74).

# Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 80 Opening and closing Activating/deactivating the automatic lock ing feature The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn ing faster than walking pace.

# To activate: press and hold button 2 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.

# To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds. In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated:

R While the vehicle is being tow started/

pushed. R The vehicle is being tested on the dynamom eter. Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the emergency key

% If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using the emergency key, first press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv er's door using the emergency key.

# Insert the emergency key as far as it will go into opening 1 in the cover.

# Pull and hold the door handle.

# Pull the cover on the emergency key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.

# Release the door handle. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Boot Opening the boot lid

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

# Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.

# Never drive with the boot lid open.

* NOTE Damage to the boot lid by obsta cles above the vehicle The boot lid swings upwards when it is opened.

# Therefore, make sure that there is suffi cient clearance above the boot lid. You have the following options to open the boot lid:

Opening and closing 81

# Pull the boot lid handle.

# Pull boot lid remote operating switch 1.

# Press and hold the p button on the key.

# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: move your foot below the bumper ( page 84).

# Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos ing feature: with the boot lid stopped in an

# To unlock: turn the emergency key anti-

clockwise to position 1.

# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position 1.

# Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin der until it engages and is seated firmly. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 82 Opening and closing intermediate position, pull it upwards and release as soon as it begins to open. With the boot lid opening limiter switched on, manually pull the stopped boot lid upwards. Vehicles with boot lid convenience closing feature: if an object restricts the boot lid during the automatic opening process, obstacle detec tion stops the boot lid. The obstacle detection function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. Closing the boot lid

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.

# Before the journey, secure objects, lug gage or loads against slipping or tipping over. Comply with the loading guidelines when loading the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the boot lid Parts of the body could become trapped dur ing automatic closing of the boot lid. More over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process.

# Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process.

# Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:

R Press the p button on the key. R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the boot lid. R Pull the boot lid handle. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement with your foot below the rear bumper. You have the following options to close the boot lid:

# Pull the boot lid down using the handle recess and push it closed.

# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: with the boot lid completely opened, kick your foot below the bumper ( page 84).

# Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos ing feature: pull the boot lid handle and release it as soon as it starts to close.

# Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos ing feature: with the boot lid stopped in an intermediate position, push it downwards. The boot lid continues to close. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos ing and KEYLESS-GO: with the boot lid com pletely opened, press and hold the p but ton on the key (with the key close to the vehi cle).

# Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos ing feature: press boot lid remote operating switch 1.

# Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos ing feature: press closing button 1 on the boot lid.

# Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos ing and KEYLESS-GO: press locking button 2 on the boot lid. If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the boot lid will close and the vehicle will be locked. Opening and closing 83 Boot lid automatic reversing function If an object obstructs the boot lid during the automatic closing process, the boot lid will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function The reversing function does not react:

R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. R over the last 8 mm of the closing path. In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trap ped.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

# If someone is trapped, use one of the following options:

R Press the p button on the key. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 84 Opening and closing R Press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the boot lid. R Pull the boot lid handle. HANDS-FREE ACCESS function With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or interrupt boot lid movement by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately. Observe the notes when opening ( page 81) and closing ( page 82) the boot lid.

% A warning tone sounds while the boot lid is opening or closing.

& WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system.

# Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the boot lid:

R when using an automatic car wash R when using a high pressure cleaner

# Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure that the key located is at least 3 m away from the vehicle in such situa tions. When making the kicking movement, make sure that your feet are firmly on the ground, other wise you could lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Requirements:

R The key is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle while performing the kicking movement. R Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only The boot lid could be opened or closed uninten tionally, in the following situations:

R If a person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R If objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage. R Clamping straps, tarpaulins or other cover ings are pulled over the bumper. R A protective mat with a length reaching over the boot sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R The protective mat is not secured correctly. R Work is being undertaken on the trailer hitch, on trailers or rear bicycle racks. Deactivate KEYLESS-GO ( page 73) or do not carry the key about your person in such situa tions. Switching separate boot locking on or off If you centrally unlock the vehicle while separate locking is activated, the boot will remain locked. 1 Detection range of the sensors If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds. System limitations The system may be impaired or may not function if:

R Snow or dirt, e.g. from road salt, covers the sensor area. R The kicking movement is made using a pros thetic leg. Opening and closing 85

# To switch on: slide the switch to position 1.

# To switch off: slide the switch to position 2.

% If an accident has been detected, the boot will unlock even if separate locking is switched on. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 86 Opening and closing Activating/deactivating the boot lid opening limiter Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Vehicle set-

tings . Boot lid open. limiter This function allows you to avoid bumping the boot lid on a low garage ceiling, for example.

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Roller sunblinds Extending the rear side window roller sun blinds

* NOTE Damage to the inertia reel due to it snapping back If suddenly snapped back, the inertia reel may be damaged.

# Always move the roller sun blind man ually.

# Do not drive with the roller sun blind hooked in and one or more side win dows open at the same time.

# Pull the roller sunblind out by tab 1 and hook it onto brackets 2 at the top of the window. Extending/retracting the rear window roller sunblind

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when extending or retracting the roller sun blind Body parts could become entrapped in the sweep of the roller sunblind when it is being extended or retracted.

# Make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sunblind when it is being extended or retracted.

# If someone becomes trapped, briefly press the button again. The opening or closing process is briefly stopped. The roller sun blind then returns to its starting position.

* NOTE Damage caused by objects

# Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Side windows Opening and closing the side windows

# If someone is trapped, release the but ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window. Opening and closing 87

# To extend or retract: press button 1.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when opening a side window When you open a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.

# If someone is trapped, release the but ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows Children could become trapped if they oper ate the side windows, particularly when unat tended.

# Activate the override feature for the rear side windows.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Requirements:

R The power supply or the ignition is switched on. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 88 Opening and closing 1 Closing 2 Opening The buttons on the driver's door take prece dence.

# To start automatic operation: press the W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.

# To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again. When the vehicle is switched off, the side win dows can continue being operated. The function is available for around five minutes or until a front door is opened.

% Vehicles with electric roller sunblinds in the left and right rear doors: the buttons for the rear side windows also open and close the roller sunblinds . Automatic reversing function of the side win dows If an object blocks a side window during the closing process, the side window opens again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window The reverse function does not react:

R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers R during resetting This means that the reverse function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

# If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again. Automatic function of the side windows The side windows are automatically closed when the vehicle is switched off:

R if it starts to rain (detection by the rain sen sor on the windscreen) Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R in the event of extreme outside temperatures R after six hours R if there is a malfunction in the power supply The side windows are closed as far as the venti lation position. Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: the side win dows will be closed completely if the sliding sun roof is open. If the side windows are blocked during auto matic closing, the side window concerned will open again slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof and the side windows is then deactivated. Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

# Press and hold the % button on the key. The following functions are performed:

R the vehicle is unlocked R The side windows are opened. R The sliding sunroof is opened. R The panoramic sliding sunroof is opened. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on. If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic sliding sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first.

# To continue convenience opening: press the % button again.

# To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. Opening and closing 89 Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment caused by inadvertent convenience closing When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win dow and the sliding sunroof.

# Observe the complete closing proce dure when using convenience closing.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

# Press and hold the & button on the key. The following functions are performed:

R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. R The sliding sunroof is closed. R The panoramic sliding sunroof is closed.

# To close the roller sunblinds: press the

& button again. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 90 Opening and closing

# To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button.

% Convenience closing can also be operated with KEYLESS-GO ( page 78). Problems with the side windows Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

# Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area in the process.

# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.

# To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side win dow. If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

# Immediately after the window is blocked, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed, and hold the switch for an additional second. The side window will be closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly:

Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# repeat the previous step. The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function. The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature. The key battery is weak or discharged.

# Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary ( page 74). Opening and closing 91 Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof

% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panoramic sliding sunroof.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped while opening and closing the sliding sunroof During opening and closing, parts of the body could get caught in the sweep of the sliding sunroof.

# When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or

# Press the button in any direction during the automatic opening/closing process. The opening/closing process is stop ped.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the slid ing sunroof is operated by children Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment while opening and closing the roller sunblinds When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding sunroof.

# When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 92 Opening and closing

# Release the switch immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or

# Press the switch in any direction during the automatic opening/closing process. The opening/closing process is stop ped.

* NOTE Malfunction caused by snow and ice Snow and ice may lead to a malfunction of the sliding sunroof.

# Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice.

* NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects Objects that protrude from the sliding sun roof may damage the sealing strips.

# Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. R The roller sunblind can be operated only when the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed.

# To start automatic operation: press the 3 button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.

# To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press the 3 button in any direction. The opening/closing process is stopped. R Check whether the panoramic sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof rack is fitted. 1 Raising 2 Opening 3 Close/lowering Use the 3 button to operate the panoramic sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind. R The panoramic sliding sunroof can be oper ated only when the roller sunblind is open. Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If there is an object obstructing the sliding sun roof during the closing process, the sliding sun roof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub stitute for your attentiveness.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only& WARNING Risk of entrapment even with the reversing feature active The reverse function does not react in partic ular:

R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers R over the last 4 mm of the closing path R during resetting This means that the reverse function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or

# Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The closing process is stopped. Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If there is an object obstructing the roller sun blind during the closing process, the roller sun blind will open again automatically. The auto matic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of move ment.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers. This means that the reversing function can not prevent entrapment in these situations.

# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. Opening and closing 93 or

# Press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process is stopped. Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof

% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panoramic sliding sunroof. By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you can interrupt the automatic functions: "Rain closing function when driving" and "Automatic lower ing". The sliding sunroof is automatically closed when the vehicle has been switched off:

R if it starts to rain (detection by the rain sen sor on the windscreen) R in the event of extreme outside temperatures R after six hours R if there is a malfunction in the power supply The sliding sunroof then rises at the rear in order to continue ventilating the vehicle interior. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 94 Opening and closing If the sliding sunroof is blocked during an auto matic closing procedure, the roof is opened slightly again. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof and the side windows is then deactivated. Rain closing function when driving Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: if it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof is automatically lowered while the vehicle is in motion. Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: if the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it is automatically lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it is raised again automatically.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment by auto matic lowering of the sliding sunroof At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers slightly at the rear. This could trap you or other persons.

# Make sure that nobody reaches into the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the vehicle is in motion.

# If somebody becomes trapped, briefly push the sliding sunroof button for wards or backwards. The sliding sunroof lifts during opening. Problems with the sliding sunroof

% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panoramic sliding sunroof. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injury by closing the sliding sunroof again If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased force. Parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area in the process.

# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Opening and closing 95 or

# Press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process is stopped. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

# Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resist ance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and reopens again slightly:

# Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof is closed again with increased force. Vehicles without a panoramic slid ing sunroof: the sliding sunroof does not operate smoothly. Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind does not operate smoothly.

# Push the 3 button up to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is fully open.

# Press the 3 button for another second.

# Close the sliding sunroof.

# Pull and hold the button 3 little by little until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.

# Pull and hold the button 3 little by little until the roller sunblind is fully closed.

# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 96 Opening and closing Anti-theft protection Function of the immobiliser The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. The immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off and deactivated when the ignition is switched on. ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations:

R when a door is opened R when the boot lid is opened R when the bonnet is opened R when interior protection is triggered

( page 97) R when tow-away protection is triggered

( page 97) The ATA system is primed automatically after approximately ten seconds:

R after locking the vehicle with the key R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system is activated. The ATA system is automatically deactivated:

R after unlocking the vehicle with the key R after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment

( page 169) R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GO

% When the MercedesBenz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is auto matically sent to the Customer Assistance Centre ( page 337). Deactivating the ATA

# Press the %, & or p button on the key. or

# Press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 169) Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:

# Grasp the outside door handle with the key outside the vehicle. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Function of tow-away protection An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-

away protection is primed. Tow-away protection is automatically primed after about 60 seconds:

R after locking the vehicle with the key R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Tow-away protection is only primed when the fol lowing components are closed:

R the doors R the boot lid Tow-away protection is automatically deactiva ted:

R after pressing the % or p button on the key R after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment

( page 169) R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GO R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Information on detecting damage on a parked vehicle ( page 195). Priming/deactivating tow-away protection Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Vehicle settings . Tow-

away protection

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Tow-away protection is primed again in the fol lowing cases:

R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. Function of interior protection When interior protection is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detec ted in the vehicle interior. Opening and closing 97 Interior protection is primed automatically after approximately ten seconds:

R after locking the vehicle with the key R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Interior protection is only primed when the fol lowing components are closed:

R the doors R the boot lid Interior protection is automatically deactivated:

R after pressing the % or p button on the key R after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment

( page 169) R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GO R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS The following situations can lead to a false alarm:

R moving objects such as mascots in the vehi cle interior Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 98 Opening and closing R when the side window is open R when the sliding sunroof is open R when the panoramic sliding sunroof is open Priming/deactivating interior protection Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Vehicle settings . Inte-

rior motion sensor

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Interior protection is primed again in the follow ing cases:

R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Notes on the correct driver's seat position

& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations:

R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt. Ensure the following when adjusting the steering wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:

R you are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible R you are sitting in an upright position R your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion Seats and stowing 99 R your legs are not fully stretched and you can depress the pedals properly R the back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint R you can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent R you can move your legs freely R you can see all the displays on the instru ment cluster clearly R you have a good overview of the traffic con ditions R your seat belt is pulled snugly against your body and is routed across the centre of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 100 Seats and stowing Seats Adjusting the front seat mechanically and electrically (without Seat Comfort Package)

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the digital vehicle key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The seats can be adjusted when the ignition is switched off.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.

# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil dren in the vehicle".

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations:

R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Seats and stowing 101

* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back.

# When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped.

# While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints which are not fitted or are adjusted incorrectly If head restraints are not fitted or are adjus ted incorrectly, they cannot provide protec tion as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

# Always drive with the head restraints fitted.

# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam ple.

# Adjust the seat properly before begin ning your journey.

# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoul der. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 102 Seats and stowing Adjusting the front seat manually and elec trically (with Seat Comfort Package)

# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:

lift lever 4 and slide the seat into the desired position.

# Make sure that the seat is engaged.

# To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever 5 and slide the front section of the seat cushion forwards or backwards. 1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat fore-and-aft position

# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:

lift lever 3 and slide the seat into the desired position.

# Make sure that the seat is engaged. 1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion inclination 4 Seat fore-and-aft position 5 Seat cushion length Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Adjusting the front seat electrically

# Save the settings with the memory function

( page 112). Adjusting the front passenger seat electri cally from the driver's seat Requirements:

R the power supply is switched on This function is available only in vehicles with an electrically adjustable front passenger seat. Seats and stowing 103 1 Head restraint height 2 Seat backrest inclination 3 Seat height 4 Seat cushion length 5 Seat cushion inclination 6 Seat fore-and-aft position You can call up the following functions for the front passenger seat:

R seat adjustment R seat heater R seat ventilation R memory function Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 104 Seats and stowing

# To select the front passenger seat: press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.

# Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the door control panel on the driver's side. Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support 1 Raise 2 Soften 3 Lower 4 Harden

# Using buttons 1 to 4, adjust the contour of the backrest individually to suit your spine. Head restraints Adjusting the front seat head restraints mechanically

& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations:

R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints which are not fitted or are adjusted incorrectly If head restraints are not fitted or are adjus ted incorrectly, they cannot provide protec tion as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

# Always drive with the head restraints fitted.

# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

# To raise: pull the head restraint up.

# To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down.

# To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards.

# To move backwards: press release knob 2 and push the head restraint backwards. Seats and stowing 105 Adjusting the front seat luxury head restraints mechanically

# To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: pull or push right or left-hand side bolster 2.

# To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 106 Seats and stowing

# To move backwards: press release knob 1 and push the head restraint backwards. Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats mechanically Fitting/removing the rear seat head restraints Removal The head restraints can be removed only in vehi cles with folding rear seat backrests.

# Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go.

# Push release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint. Fitting

# Insert the head restraint such that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.

# Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position.

# Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.

# To raise: pull the head restraint up.

# To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down.

# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it slightly forwards ( page 116). Configuring the seat settings Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . a Seats

# Select Driver's seat or Passenger seat. Adjusting the backrest side bolsters

# Select Side bolsters.

# Select the setting. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Adjusting the seat contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest (lumbar)

# Select Lumbar.

# Adjust the air cushion. Memory function

# Save the seat settings with the memory func tion ( page 112). Setting automatic adjustment of the lateral support (active multicontour seat) Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . a Seats With this function, the lateral support of the active multicontour seat is automatically adjus ted to the driving and cornering dynamics of the vehicle.

# Select Driver's seat or Passenger seat.

# Select Dynamic seat.

# Select setting: Off, Level 1 or Level 2. Overview of massage and workout programs Massage programmes The following programmes can be selected:

R Hot Relaxing back R Hot Relaxing shoulder R Activating Massage R Classic Massage R Wave Massage R Mobilizing Massage Active Workout The Act. Workout backrest and Act. Workout cushion programs require your active coopera tion. Tensing and releasing also helps to improve blood flow to your muscles. Press against a pres sure point as soon as you feel it. Seats and stowing 107 Selecting the massage programme for the front seats Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . a Seats

# Select Driver's seat or Passenger.

# Select Massage.

# Select a massage programme. The massage programme runs for approx imately 9 to 15 minutes, depending on the setting.

# To set the massage intensity: switch High intensity on O or off . Resetting seat and massage settings Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . a Seats . Reset

# Select Yes or No. Depending on whether the settings for the driver or front passenger seat are selected, only the selected seat can be reset. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Make sure that no objects or docu ments are on the seats when the seat heater is switched on. Requirements:

R the power supply is switched on 108 Seats and stowing Switching the seat heater on/off

& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat edly switching on the seat heater Repeatedly switching on the seat heater can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. The health of persons with limited tempera ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affec ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.

# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heater.

* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heater is switched on When the seat heater is switched on, over heating can occur due to objects or docu ments placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface.

# To switch on/increase the level: press but ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps light up. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# To switch off/reduce the level: press but ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heater is switched off.

% The seat heater automatically switches down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heater is switched off. Setting the panel heating Requirements:

R The seat heater is activated ( page 108). Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Vehicle set-

tings . Panel heating

# Select one or more seats. The armrests of the selected seats and the centre console are heated. Switching the seat ventilation on/off Requirements:

R the power supply is switched on

# To switch on/increase the level: press but ton 1 repeatedly until the desired ventila tion level is set. Depending on the ventilation level, up to three indicator lamps light up. Seats and stowing 109

# To switch off/reduce the level: press but ton 1 repeatedly until the desired ventila tion level is set. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventila tion is switched off. Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel manually

& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations:

R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 110 Seats and stowing steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil dren when adjusting the steering wheel Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the digital vehicle key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

# Push release lever 1 down as far as it will go. The steering column is unlocked.

# Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the steering wheel.

# Push release lever 1 up as far as it will go. The steering column is locked.

# Check and make sure that the steering col umn is locked by moving the steering wheel. Adjusting the steering wheel electrically The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is switched off. 1 To adjust the distance to the steering wheel 2 To adjust the height

# Save the settings with the memory function

( page 112). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Switching the steering wheel heater on or off Requirements:

R The power supply or the ignition is switched on.

# Turn the lever in the direction of arrow 1 or 2. If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on. Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature

& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy exit feature If you pull away while the easy entry and exit feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle.

# Always wait until the adjustment proc ess is complete before pulling away.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped while adjusting the easy entry and exit feature When the easy entry and exit feature adjusts the steering wheel and the driver's seat, you and other vehicle occupants particularly children could become trapped.

# During the adjustment process for the easy entry and exit feature, make sure that no one has any body parts in the Seats and stowing 111 sweep of the steering wheel or the driv er's seat. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel:

# Move the adjustment lever of the steer ing wheel. The adjustment process is stopped. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat:

# Press the seat adjustment switch. The adjustment process is stopped.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the digital vehicle key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. Vehicles with memory function: you can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position buttons. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 112 Seats and stowing

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during activation of the easy entry and exit feature by children If children activate the easy entry and exit feature, they can become trapped, particu larly when unattended.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel will move upwards and the driv er's seat will move back in the following situa tions:

R you switch the ignition off when the driver's door is open R you open the driver's door when the ignition is switched off

% The steering wheel will move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driv er's seat will move backwards only if it is not already in the rearmost position. The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last drive position in the fol lowing cases:

R you switch the power supply or the ignition on when the driver's door is closed R you close the driver's door when the ignition is switched on The last drive position is stored in the following situations:

R you switch the ignition off R Vehicles with memory function: call up the seat settings via the memory function. R Vehicles with memory function: save the seat settings via the memory function. Vehicles with memory function: press one of the memory function saved position buttons to stop the adjustment process. Setting the easy entry and exit feature Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Vehicle set-

tings . Easy Entry/Exit

# Select Steer. wheel and seat, Steering wheel only or Off. Operating the memory function

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving If you use the memory function on the driv er's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made.

# Use the memory function on the driv er's side when the vehicle is stationary. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. The memory function can be used when the igni tion is switched off. Storing Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. The following systems can be selected:

R Seat, backrest and head restraint R Steering wheel R Outside mirrors R Head-up display

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when set ting the seat with the memory function When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants particu larly children could become trapped.

# During the adjustment process of the memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

# If someone becomes trapped, press a memory position switch or seat adjust ment switch immediately.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children Children could become trapped if they acti vate the memory function, particularly when unattended.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the digital vehicle Seats and stowing 113

# Set the seat, the steering wheel, the head-up display and the outside mirrors to the desired position.

# Press memory button M together with one of preset position buttons 1, 2 or 3. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 114 Seats and stowing

# To call up: press or briefly hold preset posi tion button 1, 2 or 3. The front seat, the steering column, the head-up display and the outside mirror move to the stored position. Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

# Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.

# Never drive with the boot lid open.

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.

# Before the journey, secure objects, lug gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrectly stowed objects If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects so that they can not be thrown around in such situa tions.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot.

& WARNING Risk of burning from the tail pipe or tailpipe trim The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these car parts, you could burn yourself.

# Always be particularly careful when in the vicinity of the tailpipe and tailpipe Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only trims and supervise children very closely when in this area.

# Before any contact, allow the car parts to cool down. The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle:

R never exceed the permissible gross mass or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle

(including occupants). R the load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. R always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. R secure the load using the tie-down eyes and distribute the load evenly. Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior Overview of the front stowage compart ments Seats and stowing 115 Locking and unlocking the glove box 1 Stowage compartment in the doors 2 Stowage/telephone compartment in the armrest with multimedia connections and stowage compartment, e.g. for an MP3 player 3 Stowage compartment in the front centre console with a USB port (depending on the vehicle's equipment) 4 Glove box

# Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clock wise 2 (to lock) or anti-clockwise 1 (to unlock). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 116 Seats and stowing Opening the spectacles compartment Opening the stowage compartment in the rear armrest

# Press button 1.

# Press release catch 1 and swing the cover of the armrest upwards. Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat Folding the rear seat backrest forwards

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged, they could fold for wards, e.g. during sudden braking or in the event of an accident. R If this were the case, the vehicle occu pant would be forced into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt would not be able to provide the intended protection and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the boot cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the seat backrest and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Requirements:

R The rear seat backrest head restraints are fully inserted. R The centre seat backrest has been unlocked. If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. The centre and outer seat backrests can be fol ded forwards separately. Seats and stowing 117

# Left and right seat backrests: pull release lever 1.

# Centre seat backrest: pull release catch 3 of seat backrest 2 forwards.

# Fold the corresponding seat backrest for wards. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 118 Seats and stowing Folding the rear seat backrest back

* NOTE Damage to the seat belt The seat belt could become trapped and thus damaged when folding back the seat back rest.

# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap ped when folding back the seat back rest.

# Move the driver's or front passenger seat for wards, if necessary. Locking the release catch of the centre rear seat backrest Requirements:

R The left and centre seat backrests are engaged and joined together. You can lock the centre seat backrest release catch if you want to secure the boot against unauthorised access. The centre seat backrest can then be folded forwards only together with the left seat backrest.

# Fold corresponding seat backrest 1 back until it engages. Left and right seat backrests: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. Centre seat backrest: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, red lock verification indicator 2 will be visible. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Securing the ski and snowboard bag in the boot

& WARNING Risk of injury due to using the through-load ski bag incorrectly Seats and stowing 119 A maximum of four pairs of skis or two snow boards may be transported in the ski and snow board bag. The through-load ski bag in conjunction with the lashing straps cannot restrain any objects other than skis. Vehicle occupants could be struck in the event of sudden braking or an accident in the following cases:

R if you transport other heavy or sharp-

edged objects in the through-load ski bag R if you do not secure the through-load ski bag with the lashing straps

# Only store skis in the through-load ski bag.

# Always secure the through-load ski bag with the lashing straps so that it cannot move around.

# Fold the centre rear seat backrest forwards.

# Slide the ski and snowboard bag between the outer seat backrests into the rear.

# Open zip 2.

# Fold the centre and left seat backrests for wards.

# To lock: slide catch 1 upwards. The release catch of the centre seat backrest is locked.

# To unlock: slide catch 1 downwards. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 120 Seats and stowing

# Load the ski and snowboard bag with the skis or snowboards.

# Close zip 2.

# Pull the tensioning strap tight by the loose end.

# Cross lashing straps 1.

# Engage hooks 3 of lashing straps 1 in tie-

down eyes 4. Make sure that the fasteners of hooks 3 are facing upwards. Overview of the tie-down eyes Observe the notes on loading the vehicle

( page 114). Hooking the luggage net

& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrectly stowed objects If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects so that they can not be thrown around in such situa tions.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. 1 Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat) Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

# Vehicles with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat: fold up the tie-down eye.

# Hook the luggage net 1 into the front and rear tie-down eyes.

# Vehicles without a through-loading fea ture in the rear bench seat: hook the rings into the luggage net's hooks 1.

# Hook the rings into the hooks on the boot floor. EASY-PACK boot box Adjusting the height of the EASY-PACK boot box to any position

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped and injured when moving the floor up When the floor moves up, your hands may become trapped on the frame of the EASY-

PACK boot box and objects may be thrown upwards.

# When the floor moves up, make sure that your hands are not within the sweep of the floor.

# If someone becomes trapped, carefully push the centre of the floor downward.

# Remove all objects from the floor before moving it up. Seats and stowing 121

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when pressing in the EASY-PACK boot box When the EASY-PACK boot box is pressed into the retracted position, your hands may become trapped. Children, in particular, may injure themselves when doing so.

# When pressing the EASY-PACK boot box in, make sure that your hands are not within the range of movement of the EASY-PACK boot box.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the digital vehicle key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 122 Seats and stowing

* NOTE Damage to the extended EASY-

PACK boot box The EASY-PACK boot box may be damaged when it is extended.

# Do not place any objects on or press down on the EASY-PACK boot box frame.

# Do not close the boot lid when the EASY-PACK boot box is extended.

# Always observe the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK boot box.

# Do not use the EASY-PACK boot box when the rear seats are folded for wards. The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK boot box is 10 kg. To prevent the box from being overloaded, the box floor will lower onto the boot floor when the load reaches approximately 5 kg.

* NOTE Damage to the EASY-PACK boot box by objects Objects which are sharp-edged, pointed, fragile, rounded or heavy and objects that roll can damage the EASY-PACK boot box and be thrown out.

# Do not transport objects which are sharp-edged, pointed, rounded or frag ile and objects that roll in the EASY-

PACK boot box.

# Always stow and secure such objects outside of the box in the boot.

# To remove: pull handle 2 on the box.

# To increase the load capacity: press the centre of floor 1 downwards to the desired position and box size.

# To reduce the load capacity: press button 3.

# To stow: press the box in completely using handle 2 until it locks in place. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only% Observe the notes on cleaning the EASY-

PACK boot box ( page 378). Installing or removing the EASY-PACK boot box Fitting Seats and stowing 123 Removal

# Turn rotating catches 6 outward.

# Lower box 1 and pull it out of anchorages 4.

# Pull box 1 back out of openings 3. Opening the stowage space under the boot floor

* NOTE Damage to the handle in the boot floor If the handle in the boot is left protruding, the handle may be damaged.

# Unhinge the handle before you close the boot lid and press the handle closed again.

# Turn rotating catches 6 outward.

# Insert retainers 2 of box 1 into outer holes 3.

# Raise box 1 and press hooks 5 into rear shelf 4.

# Turn rotating catches 6 inward. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 124 Seats and stowing

# Pull handle 1 up and hook it into drip rail 2. Attaching a roof rack

& WARNING Risk of injury if the maximum roof load is exceeded When you load the roof, the centre of gravity of the vehicle rises and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics change. During cor nering, the vehicle tilts more strongly and may react more sluggishly to steering move ments. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as the steer ing and braking characteristics, will be greatly impaired.

# Always comply with the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section.

* NOTE Vehicle damage from non-

approved roof racks The vehicle could be damaged by roof racks which have not been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

# Only use roof racks tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

# Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof rack is fitted:

R the sliding sunroof can be fully raised. R the boot lid can be fully opened.

# Position the load on the roof rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sus tain damage even when it is in motion.

* NOTE Damage to the panoramic sliding sunroof when a roof rack is fitted The panoramic sliding sunroof may be dam aged by the roof rack if you attempt to open it when the roof rack is fitted. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Do not open the panoramic sliding sun roof if a roof rack is fitted. In order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior, you can raise the panoramic sliding sunroof. Seats and stowing 125 If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic condi tions and you may lose control of the vehicle.

# Only use the cup holder when the vehi cle is stationary.

# Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.

# Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.

* NOTE Damage to the covers The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened.

# Do not use metallic or hard objects.

# Carefully fold covers 1 upwards in the direction of the arrow.

# Secure the roof rack to the anchorage points under covers 1.

# Comply with the roof rack manufacturer's installation instructions.

# Secure the load on the roof rack. Cup holders Fitting the cup holder in or removing it from the centre console (automatic transmission)

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in motion. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 126 Seats and stowing

# To remove: slide catch 2 forwards and pull out cup holder 1.

# To fit: insert cup holder 1 and slide back catch 2.

% The cup holder rubber mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water. Opening the cup holder in the rear armrest

* NOTE Damage to the cup holder When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged.

# Only fold the rear armrest back when the cup holder is closed.

# Press cup holder 1 or 2.

# Place a container in or remove a container from cup holder 1 or 2. Ashtray and cigarette lighter Using the ashtray in the front centre console

* NOTE Damage to the stowage compart ment under the ashtray The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest lit cigarettes on it.

# Ensure that the ashtray is fully engaged. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# To open: push up the cover 2 of the ash tray on its right or left side.

# To remove the insert: press insert 1 upwards slightly and pull it out upwards.

# To refit the insert: press insert 1 into the holder until it engages. Using the rear ashtray

# To open: pull cover 2 out by its top handle edge.

# To remove the insert: push ribbing 3 from the left side and pull insert 1 upwards and out.

# To fit the insert: fit insert 1 from above and press down into the holder until it engages. Requirements:

R The ignition is switched on. Seats and stowing 127 Using the cigarette lighter

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from the hot cigarette lighter You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga rette lighter. In addition, flammable materials may ignite if:

R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example

# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.

# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# Press in cigarette lighter 1. The cigarette lighter will pop out automati cally when the heating element is red-hot. Sockets Using the 12 V socket in the front centre console Requirements:

R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 watts (15 A). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 128 Seats and stowing

# Lift up cap 1 of the socket and insert the plug of the device. If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compart ment open. Using the 12 V socket in the rear passenger compartment Requirements:

R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 watts (15 A).

# Briefly press the trim element of cover 2.

# Lift up cap 1 of the socket and insert the plug of the device. Using the 230 V socket in the rear

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam aged connecting cables or sockets When a suitable device is connected, the 230 V power socket will be carrying a high voltage. You could receive an electric shock if the connecting cable or the 230 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet.

# Use only connecting cables that are dry and free of damage.

# When the ignition is switched off, make sure that the 230 V power socket is dry.

# Immediately have the 230 V power socket checked or replaced at a quali fied specialised workshop if it is dam aged or has been pulled out of the trim.

# Never plug the connecting cable into a 230 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor rect handling of the socket You could receive an electric shock:

R if you reach into the socket. R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects into the socket.

# Only connect suitable devices to the socket. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Requirements:

R Only connect devices with a suitable plug which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in.

# Insert the plug of the device into 230 V socket 1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp 2 lights up. R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 150 watts. R Do not use multiple socket outlets. USB port in the rear

# Open flap 3. Seats and stowing 129 You can charge a USB device, e.g. a mobile phone, at USB ports 1 using a suitable charg ing cable. The devices can be charged with 5 V (2.1 A) and when the ignition is switched on. Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial Notes on wireless charging of the mobile phone

& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrectly stowed objects If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 130 Seats and stowing

# Always stow objects so that they can not be thrown around in such situa tions.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment If you place objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, they may heat up excessively and even catch fire.

# Do not place additional objects, espe cially those mode of metal, in the mobile phone stowage compartment.

* NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stow age compartment If you place objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, these may be dam aged by electromagnetic fields.

# Do not place credit cards, storage media or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone stowage compartment.

* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged.

# Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment. R The charging function and wireless connec tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior aerial are only available if the ignition is switched on. R Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment. R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior aerial. R The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This depends on the appli cations (apps) currently running. The mobile phone can be cooled in the mobile phone stowage compartment when the air conditioning system is switched on. The cooling output in the mobile phone stow age compartment is highest when the con troller in the glove box is closed. R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior aerial via the charging module. R To ensure more efficient charging and con nection with the vehicle's exterior aerial, remove the protective cover from the mobile Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only phone. Protective covers which are designed for wireless charging are excluded. R When charging, the mat should be used if possible. Wireless charging of the mobile phone in the front Requirements:

R The mobile phone must be suitable for wire less charging (Qi-compatible mobile phone). You can find a list of Qi-compatible mobile phones at:

http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

# Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When the charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the multimedia system display.

% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water. Fitting or removing the floor mats

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. Seats and stowing 131

# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

# To fit: press stud 1 into holder 2. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 132 Seats and stowing

# To remove: pull the floor mat off the holders 2. Fitting/removing the pennant holder Fitting The pennant holder is fitted or removed in identi cal fashion on both the driver's and front passenger sides.

# Press cover 1 and turn it forwards in the direction of travel.

# Remove the cover. Removing

# Position pennant holder 2 horizontally on the opening and press it in.

# Turn pennant holder 2 in the opposite direction to the direction of travel until it is in a vertical position and engages in place.

# Press pennant holder 2 into the opening and turn it forwards in the direction of travel until it is in a horizontal position.

# Remove pennant holder 2. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Seats and stowing 133

# Fit cover 1 and turn it backwards in the opposite direction to the direction of travel. The pennant holder can be stowed in the lug gage nets in the boot, for example. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 134 Light and sight Exterior lighting Notes on changing the lights when driving abroad Vehicles with halogen or static LED head lamps: it is not necessary to change the head lamps. The legal requirements are also met in countries in which traffic drives on the other side of the road. Vehicles with Intelligent Light System: before crossing the border into countries in which traf fic drives on the other side of the road, it is nec essary to set the headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam ( page 142). Once the headlamps have been changed:

R oncoming traffic will not be dazzled R the edge of the road will not be illuminated as far or as high R the "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog light" functions will not be available The headlamps must be reset to asymmetrical dipped beam when you return from abroad. Information about lighting systems and your responsibility The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation. Light switch Operating the light switch 1 W Left-hand parking lights 2 X Right-hand parking lights 3 T Standing lights and licence plate light ing 4 Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position) Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 5 L Dipped beam/main beam 6 R Switches the rear fog lights on or off When dipped beam is activated, the indicator lamp for the standing lights T is deactivated and replaced by the dipped beam indicator lamp L.

# Always park your vehicle safely and in a well-

lit area, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations.

* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery.

# Where possible, switch on the right X or left W parking light. In the case of severe battery discharging, the standing lights or parking lights are automati cally switched off to facilitate the next engine start. The exterior lighting (except standing and park ing lights) switches off automatically when the driver's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting

( page 142). Automatic driving lights function The standing lights, low beam and daytime run ning lights are switched on automatically depending on the ignition status and the light conditions.

& WARNING Risk of accident when the dipped beam is switched off in poor visi bility When the light switch is set to , the dipped beam may not be switched on auto matically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray.

# In such cases, turn the light switch to L. The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting. Light and sight 135 Activating/deactivating the rear fog light Requirements:

R The light switch is in the L or posi tion.

# Press the R button. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps. Adjusting the headlamp range (halogen headlamps without active suspension) The headlamp range adjuster allows you to adjust the cone of light from the headlamps in relation to the vehicle's load condition. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 136 Light and sight

# Turn the headlamp range adjuster to the position that corresponds to the load condi tion of your vehicle. Operating the combination switch for the lights 3 Headlamp flasher 4 Indicator, left

# Use the combination switch to activate the desired function. High beam

# To switch on: turn the light switch to the L or position. g Driver's seat and front passenger seat occu pied 1 Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rear seats occupied 2 Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rear seats occupied, boot laden 3 Driver's seat and front passenger seat occu pied and maximum permissible rear axle load utilised 1 High beam 2 Indicator, right

# Push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 1. When the high beam is activated, the indica tor lamp for low beam L will be deactiva ted and replaced by the indicator lamp for the high beam K.

# To switch off: move the combination switch back to its starting position. Headlamp flasher

# Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights Indicators

# To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding indicator will flash three times.

# To indicate continuously: push the combi nation switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4.

# Press button 1. The hazard warning lights will switch on auto matically if:

R the airbag has been deployed R the vehicle brakes sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill Light and sight 137 When you pull away again, the hazard warning lights will switch off automatically at approx imately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lights using button 1. Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED Functions of the Intelligent Light System The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation and provide exten ded functions for improving illumination of the road. The system comprises the following functions:

R Active headlamps ( page 138) R Cornering light ( page 138) R Motorway mode ( page 138) R Enhanced fog light function ( page 139) R Adverse weather light ( page 139) R City lighting ( page 139) The system is active only when it is dark. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 138 Light and sight Active headlamps function Cornering light function R The headlamps follow the steering move ments. R Relevant areas are better illuminated during travel. The functions are active when the dipped beam is switched on. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving is also evaluated and the active headlamps func tion adjusts the light in advance. The cornering light improves the illumination of the carriageway over a wide angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for example. It can be activated only when the dipped beam is switched on. The function is active:

R At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn sig nal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned. R At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h when the steering wheel is turned. Roundabout and intersection function: the cornering light is activated on both sides through an evaluation of the current GPS position of the vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or intersection. Motorway mode function Motorway mode increases the range and bright ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibil ity. The function is active if a motorway journey is detected by:

R the vehicle's speed R the multifunction camera Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R the GPS The function is not active:

R at speeds below 80 km/h. Enhanced fog light function The enhanced fog light function reduces glare for the driver and improves the illumination of the edge of the carriageway. The function is active:

R at speeds below 70 km/h when the rear fog lights are switched on The function is not active:

R at speeds above 100 km/h after activation R when the rear fog lights are switched off Function of the adverse weather light The adverse weather light reduces reflections in rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in the headlamps. This reduces the glare for the driver and other road users. Function of city lighting City lighting improves the illumination of road sides within built-up areas using a broader distri bution of light. The function is active:

R at low speeds R in illuminated parts of built-up areas Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off Requirements:

R The ignition is switched on. Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Light settings . Intell. Light System

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Light and sight 139 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function of Adaptive Highbeam Assist

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recog nise the following road users:

R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic main beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 140 Light and sight

# Always observe the traffic carefully and switch off the main beam in good time. System limitations Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted if:

R Visibility is impaired, for example in fog, heavy rain or snow. R There is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi tions. The main beam switches off automatically:

R At speeds below 25 km/h. R If other road users are detected. R If street lighting is sufficient. At speeds above approx. 50 km/h:

R The headlamp range of the dipped beam is regulated automatically based on the dis tance to other road users. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off

# To switch on: turn the light switch to the position.

# Switch on the main beam using the combina tion switch. When the main beam is switched on auto matically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display comes on.

# To switch off: switch off the main beam using the combination switch. Adaptive Highbeam Assist switches automati cally between:

R Dipped beam R Main beam At speeds above 30 km/h:

R If no other road users are detected, the main beam is automatically switched on. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not rec ognise the following road users:

R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road users that have lights, or may recognise them too late. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic main beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.

# Always observe the traffic carefully and switch off the main beam in good time. System limitations Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following sit uations:

R when visibility is impaired, such as in fog, heavy rain or snow R there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traf fic conditions. Light and sight 141 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus switches auto matically between:

R Low beam R Partial high beam R High beam Partial high beam uses the high beam to shine past other road users rather than dazzling them. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 142 Light and sight The vehicle in front is illuminated by the low beam. At speeds above 30 km/h:

R If no other road users are detected, the high beam will be switched on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial high beam will be switched on automatically. At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is suffi cient street lighting:

R The partial high beam will switch off auto matically. R The high beam will switch off automatically. At speeds above approximately 50 km/h:

R The headlamp range of the low beam is regu lated automatically based on the distance to other road users. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off

# To switch on: turn the light switch to the position.

# Switch on the main beam using the combina tion switch. When the main beam is switched on auto matically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp on the multifunction display comes on.

# To switch off: switch off the main beam using the combination switch. Setting the dipped beam Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Light set-

tings . Dipped-beams

# Select Left-side traffic or Right-side traffic. Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Light settings . Exte-

rior light shut-off

# Set the switch-off delay time. Setting the surround lighting Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Light settings . Loca-

tor lighting

# Activate O or deactivate the function. If the surround lighting is switched on, the exte rior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the surround lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting Front overhead control panel Control panel in the grab handle 1 p Front left reading lamp 2 | Automatic interior lighting control 3 c Front interior lighting 4 u Rear interior lighting 5 p Front right reading lamp

# To switch on or off: press button 1 - 5 accordingly. 1 p Rear reading lamp

# To switch on or off: press button 1. Adjusting the ambient lighting Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Light settings . Ambi-

ent lighting Setting the colour

# Select Colour.

# Set a colour. Light and sight 143 Adjusting the brightness

# Select Brightness.

# Set a brightness value. Activating the brightness for zones

# Select Brightness zones.

# Activate O or deactivate the function. The Display, Front and Rear zones can be set separately. Activating multi-coloured lighting

# Select Multi-colour.

# Activate O or deactivate the function. There are ten preset colour combinations available. Activating multi-coloured animation

# Select Multi-colour anim..

# Activate O or deactivate the function. The chosen colour combination changes at predefined intervals. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 144 Light and sight Activating dependency on air conditioning settings

# Select Climate.

# Activate or deactivate the function. If changes are made to the temperature set ting in the vehicle, the colour of the ambient lighting changes briefly. Activating welcome lighting

# Select Welcome.

# Activate O or deactivate the function. When the vehicle is unlocked, a special inte rior lighting sequence runs. Setting the interior lighting switch-off delay time Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Light settings . Inte-

rior light shut-off

# Set the switch-off delay time. Changing bulbs (only for vehicles with halo gen headlamps) Notes on changing bulbs Overview of the bulbs to be changed Halogen headlamps

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts whilst replacing a bulb Bulbs, lamps and plugs can become very hot during operation. When replacing a bulb, you could burn your self on these component parts.

# Allow the component parts to cool down before replacing the bulb. R Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its glass has been scratched. The bulb may otherwise explode. R Do not touch the glass bulb with your bare hands. R Protect bulbs from moisture and do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids. 1 Turn signal light: bulb PY 21 W 2 Main beam: bulb H7 55 W 3 Dipped beam: bulb H7 55 W Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Tail lamps Changing the front bulbs (vehicles with halo gen headlamps) Fitting/removing the cover in the front wheel arch Requirements R The lighting system is switched off. R The appropriate front wheel is turned inwards. 1 Turn signal light: bulb PY 21 W 2 Reversing light: bulb W 16 W Light and sight 145

# Removal (left-hand side of the vehicle):

using a screwdriver, turn rotating catches 1 clockwise as far as they will go. Cover 2 will be released.

# Removal (right-hand side of the vehicle):

using a screwdriver, turn rotating catches 1 anti-clockwise as far as they will go. Cover 2 will be released.

# Remove cover 2.

# To fit: insert cover 2 into the wheel arch liner. R Left-hand side of the vehicle: using a screwdriver, turn rotating catches 1 anti-clockwise as far as they will go. R Right-hand side of the vehicle: using a screwdriver, turn rotating catches 1 clockwise as far as they will go. Cover 2 will be locked. Replacing bulbs in the halogen headlamp Requirements R High beam/low beam: bulb, type H7 55 W. R Indicator: bulb, type PY 21 W. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 146 Light and sight R The lighting system is switched off. R The cover in the front wheel arch has been removed. R The bonnet is open. 1 Low beam 2 High beam/indicator

# Turn the relevant housing cover anti-clock wise and remove it.

# High beam/low beam: turn the socket anti-

clockwise and remove it.

# Indicator: turn the socket anti-clockwise, release it and remove it.

# Pull the bulb out of the socket.

# Insert the new bulb into the socket such that the entire base of the bulb is resting on the bottom of the socket.

# Insert the socket and turn it clockwise.

# Press on the housing cover and turn it clock wise.

# Replace the cover on the front wheel arch. Changing the rear bulbs (vehicles with halo gen headlamps) Opening and closing the side trim panels in the boot

# To open: release right-hand or left-hand side trim panels 1 at the side and remove.

# To close: reinsert side trim panel 1. Replacing the tail lamp bulbs Requirements R Indicator: bulb, type PY 21 W. R Reversing light: bulb, type W 16 W. R The lighting system is switched off. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R The side trim panel in the boot is open. Light and sight 147 Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system Switching the windscreen wipers on/off

# Push the upper and lower catches on the plug together and remove the plug.

# Push tab 1 outwards and remove the bulb mount.

# Indicator: push bulb 2 gently into the bulb mount, turn it anti-clockwise and remove it from the bulb mount.

# Insert the new bulb into the bulb mount and turn it clockwise.

# Reversing light: pull bulb 3 out of the bulb mount.

# Insert the new bulb into the bulb mount.

# Insert the bulb mount again.

# Insert the plug until the catch hooks engage audibly.

# Close the side trim panel. 1 g Windscreen wipers off 2 Intermittent wiping, normal 3 Intermittent wiping, frequent Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Moving the wiper arms into the change posi tion

# Switch the ignition on, and switch it off again immediately.

# Within around 15 seconds, press button on the combination switch for around three seconds ( page 147). The wiper arms will move into the change position. Removing the wiper blades

# Fold the wiper arms away from the wind screen. 148 Light and sight 4 Continuous wiping, slow 5 Continuous wiping, fast

# Turn the combination switch to the corre sponding position 1 - 5.

# Single wipe / washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R Single wipe R Wiping with washer fluid Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

# Always switch off the windscreen wip ers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.

# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc tion of arrow 1 away from the wiper arm as far as it will go.

# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal position.

# Remove the wiper blade in the direction of arrow 4 away from the wiper arm. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Fitting the wiper blades

# Switch the ignition on.

# Press button on the combination switch. The wiper arms will move into the original position. Maintenance display

# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1.

# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking position.

# Make sure that the wiper blade sits correctly.

# Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind screen. Light and sight 149

# Remove protective film 1 from the mainte nance display on the tip of the newly fitted wiper blades. If the colour of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced.

% The duration until the colour change varies depending on the usage conditions. Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors

& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations:

R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi cle is in motion Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 150 Light and sight

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis judgement of distances when using the outside mirror The outside mirrors reflect objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. As a result, you may misjudge the distance between you and the road user driving behind you, e.g. when changing lanes.

# Therefore, always look over your shoul der in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you. Folding the outside mirrors in/out

# Briefly press switch 1. Resetting the outside mirrors

% If the battery has been disconnected or com pletely discharged, the outside mirrors must be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.

# Briefly press switch 1. Adjusting outside mirrors

# Press the 3 or 4 buttons to select the out side mirror to be adjusted.

# Press button 2 to adjust the position of the mirror glass. Engaging the outside mirrors

# Vehicles without electrically folding outside mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into the correct position.

# Vehicles with electrically folding outside mir rors: press and hold button 1. You will hear a click and the mirror will audi bly engage in position. The outside mirror is set to the correct position. Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function

& WARNING Risk of burns and poisoning due to the anti-dazzle mirror electrolyte Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only The electrolyte is harmful and causes irrita tion. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.

# If you come into contact with electro lyte, observe the following:

R Rinse the electrolyte from your skin and seek medical attention immedi ately. R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, rinse them thor oughly with clean water and seek medical attention immediately. R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. R Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. Light and sight 151 The front-passenger outside mirror moves back to its original position in the following situations:

R you shift the transmission to another trans mission position R at speeds greater than 15 km/h R you press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir ror on the driver's side automatically go into anti-dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror. System limitations The system does not go into anti-dazzle mode in the following situations:

R the engine is switched off R reverse gear is engaged R the interior lighting is switched on Function of the front-passenger outside mir ror parking position

% The parking position is available only in vehi cles with a memory function. The parking position makes parking easier. The front-passenger outside mirror tilts down wards and shows the rear wheel on the front-

passenger side in the following situations:

R the parking position is stored ( page 152) R the passenger mirror is selected R reverse gear is engaged Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 152 Light and sight Storing the parking position of the front-

passenger outside mirror using reverse gear Storing

# Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2.

# Engage reverse gear.

# Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button 1. Calling up

# Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2.

# Engage reverse gear. The front-passenger outside mirror moves to the stored parking position. Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Vehicle set-

tings . Auto. fold-in mirrors

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Operating the sun visors Using the single sun visor

# Glare from the front: fold sun visor 1 down.

# Glare from the side: swing sun visor 1 to the side. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Vehicles with an additional sun visor: fold additional sun visor 2 down. Infrared reflective windscreen function Areas permeable to radio waves 1 are best visi ble from outside the vehicle when the wind screen is illuminated using an external light source. Light and sight 153

# Vehicles with an extendable sun visor: slide sun visor 1 horizontally as required. Using the additional sun visor The infrared reflective windscreen is coated and reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle inte rior. The coating shields the vehicle interior against radio waves up to the gigahertz range. Radio-controlled equipment, such as toll sys tems, can be mounted only on areas of the wind screen that are permeable to radio waves 1. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 154 Climate control Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC automatic cli mate control: an interior air filter must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pol lution level monitoring and the air filtering func tion work correctly. Make sure that the filter is installed correctly and the filter housing in the engine compartment is closed correctly using the cap and always tightly sealed when in opera tion. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work car ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. THERMATIC control panel overview The indicator lamps in the buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated. 6 Vehicles without a stationary heater: t calls up the air conditioning menu Vehicles with a stationary heater: ! calls up the air conditioning menu, switches the residual heat on/off ( page 157) 7 Switches the rear window heater on/off 8 Vehicles without a stationary heater: 0 switches the synchronisation on/off

( page 157) Vehicles with a stationary heater: &

switches the stationary heater on/off

( page 159) 9 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off

( page 157) A Switches the A/C function on/off

( page 156) B w Sets the temperature, right THERMOTRONIC control panel overview The indicator lamps in the buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated. 1 w Sets the temperature, left 2 _ Sets the air distribution 3 H Sets the airflow or switches off climate control 4 Sets climate control to automatic mode ( page 156) 5 Defrosts the windscreen Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Switches the residual heat on/off

( page 157) 7 Switches the rear window heater on/off 8 Vehicles without a stationary heater:

switches the A/C function on/off

( page 156) Vehicles with a stationary heater: &

switches the stationary heater on/off

( page 159) 9 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off

( page 157) A _ Sets the air distribution, right B w Sets the temperature, right Climate control 155 Rear operating unit 1 Sets the temperature 2 Display 3 Sets the airflow Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off

# To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using the H button.

# To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using the H button. 1 w Sets the temperature, left 2 _ Sets the air distribution, left 3 H Sets the airflow or switches off climate control 4 Sets climate control to automatic mode ( page 156) 5 Defrosts the windscreen 6 ! Calls up the air conditioning menu Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 156 Climate control

% If climate control is switched off, the win dows may mist up more quickly. Switch off climate control only briefly. Switching the A/C function on/off via the control panel The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air.

# Press the button. Switch off the A/C function only briefly other wise the windows may mist up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not a sign that there is a malfunction. Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . b Climate control . A/C The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air.

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Setting climate control to automatic mode In automatic mode, the set temperature is con trolled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply.

# Press the button.

# To switch to manual mode: press the H or _ button. Climate style Climate style function In automatic mode, you can select the following climate style settings for the driver's and front passenger areas:

R FOCUS: high airflow, slightly cooler setting R MEDIUM: medium airflow, standard setting R DIFFUSE: low airflow, slightly warmer and draught-free setting Setting the climate style Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . b Climate control . Cli-

mate mode

# Select FOCUS, MEDIUM or DIFFUSE.

% To feel the effect of the climate style, the function must be active ( page 156). Overview of the air distribution settings The symbols on the display indicate which vents the airflow is being directed through:

defroster vents P centre and side air vents O footwell vents S centre, side and footwell vents a defroster and footwell vents _ all vents b defroster, middle and side air vents W automatic air distribution Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Climate control 157 Setting the rear climate control using the multimedia system Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . b Climate control . Rear Setting the airflow

# Select Airflow.

# Set the airflow. Setting the temperature

# Select Temperature.

# Set the temperature. Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronisation function via the control panel The climate control can be operated centrally using the synchronisation function. The tempera ture and air distribution setting for the driver side is adopted automatically for the front passenger side.

# Press the 0 button. The synchronisation function is deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate zones are changed. Windows misted up on the outside

# Switch on the windscreen wipers.

# Press the button. Activating or deactivating the climate con trol synchronisation function using the mul timedia system Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . b Climate con-

trol . SYNC The climate control can be controlled centrally using the synchronisation function. The tempera ture setting is automatically adopted for all cli mate zones.

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside

# Press the button.

# If the windows continue to mist up: press the button. Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

# Press the g button. The interior air will be recirculated. Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after some time.

% If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly. Switching the residual heat on/off Requirements:

R The vehicle is parked. It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilat ing the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes.

# To switch on: press the ! button. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 158 Climate control Residual heat is switched off automatically. Activating and deactivating ionisation Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . b Climate control . Ioni-

sation Ionisation cleans and refreshes the interior air of the vehicle. The ionisation of the interior air is odourless.

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . b Climate control . Air freshener The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra grance throughout the vehicle interior from a fla con located in the glove box.

# To set the intensity: select High, Medium, Low or Off. Inserting or removing the flacon of the fra grance system Fragrance system Setting the fragrance system Requirements:

R Automatic climate control is activated. R The glove box is closed.

& WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per fume If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into con tact with their eyes.

# Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk.

# If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water.

# If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons Full flacons must not be disposed of with household waste.

#

Full flacons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it. Refillable flacon

# Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon.

# Fill the flacon with a maximum of 15 ml.

# Screw the cap back on to the flacon. Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate informa tion sheet with the flacon. Information on the windscreen heater The windscreen heater is switched on automati cally if the button is activated. After the vehicle is started, the windscreen heater is switched on automatically as required. Climate control 159 Stationary heater/ventilation Stationary heater/stationary ventilation function R The air inside the vehicle is heated or ventila ted to the set temperature. R The air inside the vehicle cannot be cooled down to temperatures below the outside temperature. R If the outside temperature changes, ventila tion mode automatically switches to heating mode or heating mode automatically switches to ventilation mode. The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outlet are situated at the right-hand front wheel. Switching the stationary heater/stationary ventilation on/off via the control panel

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi sonous exhaust gases If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi 1 Cap 2 Flacon

# To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go.

# To remove: pull out the flacon. If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 160 Climate control cle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.

# Always switch the stationary heater off in enclosed spaces without an air extraction systems, e.g. in garages.

# Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run ning.

# Open a window on the windward side of the vehicle to ensure an adequate sup ply of fresh air.

& WARNING Risk of fire due to hot station ary heater components When the stationary heater is switched on, parts of the vehicle can become very hot, e.g. the stationary heater exhaust system.

# After heating or ventilating the vehicle twice, drive for a longer period of time. Requirements:

R The fuel tank is filled to at least reserve fuel level. Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with:

R hot parts of the stationary heater exhaust system R the exhaust gas itself

# When the stationary heater is switched on, make sure that:

R hot vehicle parts do not come into contact with flammable materials. R the exhaust gas can flow out of the stationary heater tailpipe unhin dered. R the exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials.

* NOTE Battery discharge caused by sta tionary heater or stationary ventilation operation Operating the stationary heater or stationary ventilation drains the battery.

# Set the desired temperature using the w button. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Press button 1. The red or blue indicator lamp in button 1 lights up or goes out. The indicator lamp colours have the following meaning:

R Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on. R Red: stationary heater is switched on. R Yellow: departure time is preselected. The stationary heater/stationary ventilation switches off automatically after 50 minutes. Operation using the app: the stationary heater/ventilation can also be operated via the Mercedes me connect app. Further information can be found in the separate Owner's Manual under http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/

connectme/en_GB/index.html. Setting the stationary heater/stationary ven tilation using the multimedia system Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . b Climate control . Aux-

iliary heating You can pre-set three departure times for auto matic activation of the stationary heater.

# Select an option. Setting the stationary heater/stationary ven tilation via remote control Requirements:

R The fuel tank is filled to at least reserve fuel level. Climate control 161 Switching on immediately

# Press and hold the u button. Setting the departure time

# Briefly press the u button.

# Press the , or . button repeatedly until the time to be changed appears in the display. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 162 Climate control

# Press the u and ^ buttons simultane ously. The symbol flashes on the remote control display.

# Press the , and . buttons to set the desired departure time.

# Press the u and ^ buttons simultane ously. The new departure time is stored. Up to three departure times can be stored.

# To activate the departure time: select the desired departure time and press and hold the u button. The symbol, the departure time and, depending on the selected departure time, the letter A, B or C appear on the display.

# To deactivate the departure time: select the desired departure time and press and hold the ^ button. OFF appears on the display.

# To check the status of the stationary heater: briefly press the u button. Switching off immediately

# Press and hold the ^ button. Overview of the remote control displays (sta tionary heater/stationary ventilation) 1 Stationary ventilation switched on 2 Stationary heater switched on 3 Selected departure time 4 Remaining time for the stationary heater/

stationary ventilation (in minutes) 5 Stationary heater/stationary ventilation active 6 Departure time activated 7 Signal strength Further possible displays:

R Time: activated departure time. R Zero minutes: the running time for the sta tionary heater is increased, as the engine has not yet reached operating temperature when it is started. R OFF: the stationary heater/stationary venti lation is switched off. Replacing the remote control battery (sta tionary heater)

& DANGER Serious damage to health caused by swallowing batteries Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub stances. Swallowing batteries may cause serious damage to health. There is a risk of fatal injury.

# Keep batteries out of the reach of chil dren.

# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat teries Requirements:

R a CR2450 lithium battery Batteries contain toxic and corro sive substances.

#

Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

# Press a pointed object into recess 1. Climate control 163

# Slide battery cover 2 backwards in the direction of the arrow.

# Insert new battery 3 with the lettering facing upwards.

# Slide battery cover 2 in the opposite direc tion to the arrow onto the remote control until the battery cover engages. Problems with the remote control for the stationary heater/stationary ventilation Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions FAIL FAIL The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty.

# Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. The starter battery is not sufficiently charged.

# Charge the starter battery. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 164 Climate control Problem FAIL Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The fuel tank content is below the reserve fuel level.

# Refuel at the nearest filling station. The stationary heater is malfunctioning.

# Have the stationary heater checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Air vents Adjusting the front air vents

& WARNING Risk of burns/frostbite due to not maintaining a sufficient distance to the air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents.

# Always ensure that all vehicle occu pants maintain a sufficient distance to the air vents.

# If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. To guarantee the fresh air supply through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following:

R Always keep the vents and the ventilation grille in the vehicle interior free. R Keep the air inlet free of deposits

( page 370).

# To open or close: turn controller 2 to the left or right as far as it will go.

# To adjust the air direction: hold air vent 1 in the centre and move it up or down or to the left or right. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Adjusting the rear air vents

# To open or close: turn controller 2 to the left or right as far as it will go.

# To adjust the air direction: hold rear air vent 1 in the centre and move it up or down or to the left or right. Opening or closing the air vent in the glove box

* NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive objects in the glove box Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the glove box may be damaged by the air vent located inside the glove compartment.

# Close the air vent when you heat the vehicle.

# At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and switch on the A/C func tion. The automatic climate control must be switched on to cool the glove box. Climate control 165 1 Air vent controller 2 Air vent

# To open or close: turn controller 1 to the left or right. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 166 Driving and parking Driving Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles Observe the notes on the following topics in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to recog nise dangers. R Rear axle locking differential R AMG Performance exhaust system R AMG ceramic high-performance composite brake system R RACE START R DRIFT MODE R AMG RIDE CONTROL Switching on the power supply or ignition using the start/stop button

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could:

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out of the vehicle and be hit by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, children could also set the vehi cle in motion, for example, by:

R releasing the parking brake. R shifting the automatic transmission out of park position j or shifting manual trans mission into idle position. R starting the engine.

# Never leave children and animals unat tended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

# Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key"

function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases causes poisoning.

# Never leave the engine running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only& WARNING Risk of fire caused by flam mable material on the exhaust system Flammable materials brought in by either ani mals or environmental influences may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the engine or exhaust system.

# Therefore, check regularly that there are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system. Requirements:

R the key is located in the vehicle and the key battery is not discharged. R or: a Digital Vehicle Key is located in the marked space ( page 168). Driving and parking 167

# To switch on the ignition: press button 1 twice. The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. The ignition is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met:

R you do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes. The transmission is in position j. or The electric parking brake is applied. R you press button 1 once. Starting the vehicle Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but ton Requirements:

R the key is located in the vehicle and the key battery is not discharged. R or: a Digital Vehicle Key is located in the marked space ( page 168).

# To switch on the power supply: press but ton 1 once. You can activate the windscreen wiper, for example. The power supply is switched off again if the fol lowing conditions are met:

R you open the driver's door. R you press button 1 twice. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 168 Driving and parking

# shift the transmission to position j or i.

# depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once.

# If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-

essential consumers and press button 1 once. If the vehicle still does not start, one of the fol lowing display messages appears in the multi function display:

# Place the key in the marked space See Own-

er's Manual: start the vehicle in emergency operation mode ( page 169). or

# Key not detected Place smartphone in charg-

ing bracket: place the mobile phone in the marked space ( page 131). You can switch off the engine while driving by pressing button 1 for about three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips". Starting with a Digital Vehicle Key Requirements:

R one of the following versions of the Digital Vehicle Key is available:

-

- Digital vehicle key sticker suitable mobile phone R the vehicle is equipped with the "Digital Vehi cle Key" function. R the "Digital Vehicle Key" service is activated via Mercedes me connect: http://

www.mercedes.me. R the mobile phone must be sufficiently charged. R a Digital Vehicle Key is located in the centre of the marked space 1.

% You can check the suitability of your mobile phone by entering the phone number at http://www.mercedes.me. Information about suitable mobile phones can be obtained from your Mercedes-Benz service centre or at http://www.mercedes-

benz.com/connect.

% Mercedes-Benz recommends that you carry the emergency key in case of function restrictions.

% The function is only available in combination with Mercedes me connect and only in cer tain countries.

% Protective cases around the mobile phone can impair the range of functions. Using the Digital Vehicle Key for the first time

# Make sure that there is a valid vehicle key in the vehicle. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button. Any further starts with the Digital Vehicle Key The key is not needed for any further starts.

# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button. The "Digital Vehicle Key" service can be deacti vated in Mercedes me connect at http://

www.mercedes.me. The function is then deacti vated in the mobile phone via an online connec tion. If connection to the Internet is not possible, e.g. after the mobile phone or the Digital Vehicle Key sticker has been stolen, the key function can be deactivated at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Starting the vehicle in emergency operation mode If the vehicle does not start and thePlace the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual display message appears in the multifunction display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.

# Make sure that marked space 2 is empty.

# Remove key 1 from the key ring.

# Place key 1 in marked space 2. The vehicle will start after a short time. If you remove key 1 from marked space 2 the engine continues running. For further vehicle starts however, key 1 must be loca ted in marked space 2 during the entire journey.

# Have the key 1 checked at a qualified spe cialist workshop. Driving and parking 169 If the vehicle does not start:

# place key 1 in marked space 2 and leave it there.

# depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button.

% You can also switch on the power supply or the ignition with the start/stop button. Starting the vehicle via Remote Online serv ices Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before commencing your journey

% This function is not available in all countries. If you start the vehicle via your smartphone, the previously selected air conditioning adjustment is active. Ensure the following before starting the engine:

R the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 170 Driving and parking R the fuel tank is sufficiently filled. R the starter battery is sufficiently charged.

% You can also set the temperature with your smartphone. Information on Mercedes me connect and other services: http://

www.mercedes.me This function is not available for all models. Charging the battery before commencing your journey

% This function is not available in all countries. R If the vehicle battery is discharged, you receive a message on your smartphone. R You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. R The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes. Ensure the following before starting the engine:

R the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R the fuel tank is sufficiently filled. Starting the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap ment due to unintentional starting of the engine Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work.

# Always secure the engine against unin tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work. Requirements:

R park position j is selected. R the anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R the panic alarm is not activated. R the hazard warning lights are switched off. R the bonnet is closed. R the doors are closed and locked. R the windows and sliding sunroof are closed.

# Start the vehicle using the smartphone:

R after every vehicle start, the engine runs for ten minutes. R you can carry out a maximum of two consec utive starting attempts. The vehicle must be started once with the key before trying to start the vehicle again with the smartphone. R you can stop the vehicle again at any time. R further information can be found in the smartphone app. Securing the engine against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work:

# switch on the hazard warning lights. or

# unlock the doors. or

# open a side window or the sliding sunroof. Running-in notes Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec ognise dangers. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only To preserve the engine during the first 1,500 km:

R drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds. R drive the vehicle in drive program A or ;. R change gear before the rev counter needle is of the way to the red area of the rev coun ter. R do not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. R avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle. R do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown). R only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1,500 km. This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following running-in notes:

R in certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensor system adjusts automatically while a certain distance is driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not achieved until the end of this teach-in process. R brakepads, brake discs and tyres that are either new or have been replaced only ach ieve optimum braking effect and grip after several hundred kilometres of driving. Com pensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Notes on driving

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. Driving and parking 171

# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable footwear Operating the pedals may be impaired by wearing unsuitable footwear, e.g.:

R platform shoes R high-heeled shoes R slippers

# Always wear suitable footwear when driving so that you can operate the ped als safely. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 172 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident when switch ing off the ignition when driving If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will then need to use considerably more force to steer and brake.

# Do not switch off the ignition while driv ing.

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases causes poisoning.

# Never leave the engine running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction.

# Do not shift down on slippery road sur faces to increase the engine braking effect.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to poi sonous exhaust gases If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi cle. This is the case, for example, if the vehi cle is stuck in snow.

# When the engine or the stationary heater are running, keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle clear of snow.

# Open a window on the side of the vehi cle facing the wind to ensure an ade quate supply of fresh air.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may over heat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail.

# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.

# Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.

* NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings by permanently depressing the brake pedal

# Do not permanently depress the brake pedal while driving. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# To use braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away

# Do not warm up the engine when sta tionary. Pull away immediately.

# Avoid high engine speeds and full throt tle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.

# Do not allow the wheels to spin.

* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata lytic converter.

# Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.

# Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Limited braking effect on salt-treated roads:

R due to salt build-up on the brake discs and brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side. R maintain a much greater safe distance to the vehicle in front. To prevent salt build-up:

R brake occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions. R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey. ECO start/stop function Operation of the ECO start/stop function Vehicles without a 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ Boost technology) Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec ognise dangers. Driving and parking 173 The engine is automatically switched off if the following conditions are met:

R you brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans mission position h or i. R if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met. The symbol appears in the multifunction display when the vehicle is stationary. If not all the vehicle conditions are met, the symbol appears in the multifunction display. The engine is restarted automatically if:

R you release the brake pedal in transmission position h when the HOLD function is not active. R you shift from transmission position j. R you engage transmission position h or k. R you depress the accelerator pedal. R you change the vehicle level. R an automatic engine start is necessary. If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/

stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn ing tone sounds. The Vehicle is operational Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 174 Driving and parking Switch off the ignition before exiting display message also appears in the multifunction dis play. If you do not switch off the ignition, the ignition is automatically switched off after one minute. Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys tem (EQ Boost technology) The engine is switched off automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met:

R you brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans mission position h or i. R you engage transmission position j. R you depress the brake pedal when driving at speeds below 20 km/h. The needle of the rev counter points to zero in the multifunction display. If you switch on the HOLD function or select transmission position P, the engine will automati cally stop in the following situations:

R you stop behind a vehicle that is pulling away. R you turn the steering wheel hard at a low speed. Switching the ECO start/stop function off/on The engine is restarted automatically if:

R you release the brake pedal in transmission position h when the HOLD function is not active and the vehicle does not start to move. R you engage transmission position h or k. R you release the brake pedal and the vehicle starts to move on a gentle downhill gradient at a speed below 5 km/h. R you depress the accelerator pedal. R you change the vehicle level. R an automatic engine start is necessary. If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/

stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn ing tone sounds. The Vehicle is operational Switch off the ignition before exiting display message also appears in the multifunction dis play. If you do not switch off the ignition, the ignition is automatically switched off after one minute.

# Press button 1. If indicator lamp 2 lights up, the ECO start/

stop function is switched on.

% Depending on the model, the button may also be located at a different position in the centre console. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only ECO display function The ECO display summarises the driving charac teristics from the start of the journey to its com pletion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style. You can influence consumption if you:

R drive with particular care R drive the vehicle in drive program ;. R observe the gearshift recommendations R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling R 3 Consistent speed The inner segment is grey and the outer seg ment empties:

R 1 Sporty acceleration R 2 Heavy braking R 3 Fluctuations in speed You have driven economically when:

R the three outer segments are completely fil led simultaneously R the ECO display border lights up The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style is shown under Bonus from start . The range displayed does not indi cate a fixed reduction in consumption. The inner segment lights up green and the outer segment fills up:

R 1 Moderate acceleration ECO Assist function Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys tem (EQ Boost technology):

Driving and parking 175 ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expec ted route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead, e.g. a speed limitation or a round about, it appears on the multifunction display 1. The following symbols can be displayed:

Not all events can be displayed, depending on the engine type. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 176 Driving and parking 1 Event ahead 2 Distance to the event ahead 3 "Foot off the accelerator" prompt A different number of segments 2 will appear around the symbol depending on the distance to the event ahead:

R few segments: the event ahead is near. R many segments: the event ahead is further away. When the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist calculates the optimal speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and downhill gradient. The Foot off the accelerator message will appear on the multifunction display. If the driver lifts off the accelerator pedal in good time, the remaining segments on the display will turn green until the event shown is reached. The drivetrain will be set for maximum fuel economy. The vehicle will coast, with the combustion engine switched off if necessary, and recuperate on its own using the electric motor. Recuperation will charge the battery. If there is no response to the Foot off the accel-

erator prompt, the segments will remain white. The event will be shown for a short time after it has been passed. If the event involves a vehicle ahead and when the coast-down recommendation is given, all segments will immediately turn green once there is a response to the Foot off the accelerator prompt. For Active ECO Assist in drive program ;, symbol 3 will appear on the multifunction dis play and on the head-up display beside transmis sion position h. Symbol 3 will also appear when the assistant display is not selected. ECO Assist is active only in drive programs ;

and A. System limitations ECO Assist can function more precisely if the route is maintained when route guidance is active. The basic function is also available with out active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be foreseen. The qual ity depends on the map data. ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsi ble for keeping a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The driver must be ready to brake at all times irrespective of whether the system inter venes. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, or due to rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicin ity of the multifunction camera or the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured. R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt or snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are covered. R If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date. R If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs on construction sites or in adjacent lanes. Displaying ECO Assist On-board computer:

, Assistance

# Select ECO Assist. DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec ognise dangers. Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs:

R = (Individual): individual settings R B (Sport Plus): particularly sporty driving style R C (Sport): sporty driving style R A (Comfort): comfortable and economi cal driving style R ; (Eco): particularly economical driving style

% The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display of the on-board com puter. Depending on the drive program selected, the following vehicle characteristics will change:

R drive

-

-

engine and transmission management Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R ESP R vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL: suspension Driving and parking 177 R steering Selecting the drive program

# Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards or backwards. The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 178 Driving and parking Configuring drive program I Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . e DYNAMIC SELECT . Individual

# Select the individual setting. Switching the operation feedback for drive programmes on/off Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . e DYNAMIC SELECT

# Switch User notification on O or off . When this function is active, a corresponding message is shown in the multimedia system display when a drive programme is selected with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. Displaying vehicle data Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . e DYNAMIC SELECT

# Select Vehicle data. The vehicle data is displayed. Displaying engine data Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . e DYNAMIC SELECT

# Select Engine data.

% The values for engine output and engine tor que may deviate from the nominal values. Items that can influence this are, for exam ple:

R Engine speed R Sea level R Fuel grade R Outside temperature Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could:

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out of the vehicle and be hit by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. Moreover, children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example:

R releasing the parking brake. R shifting the automatic transmission out of park position j. R starting the engine. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Never leave children and animals unat tended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

# Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key"

function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect gearshifting If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply.

# If you engage the transmission position h or k always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time. Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the trans mission position. The current transmission posi tion is displayed in the multifunction display. j Park position k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive position Driving and parking 179 Engaging reverse gear R

# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance. The transmission position display shows k in the multifunction display. Engaging neutral N

# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. The transmission position display shows i in the multifunction display. Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral i even if the ignition is switched off:

# start the vehicle.

# depress the brake pedal and engage neutral i.

# release the brake pedal.

# switch off the ignition. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 180 Driving and parking

% If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the automatic transmission remains in neutral i. Engaging park position P

# Observe the notes on parking the vehicle

( page 188).

# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle is stationary.

# When the vehicle is stationary, press button j. Park position is engaged when the transmis sion position display j is shown in the mul tifunction display. If no transmission position display appears, secure the vehicle to pre vent it from rolling away. Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met:

R you switch off the engine of the stationary vehicle in transmission position h or k. R you open the driver's door when the vehicle is at a standstill or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position h or k.

% To manoeuvre with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while stationary and engage transmission position h or k again. Engaging drive position D

# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. The transmission position display shows h in the multifunction display. When the automatic transmission is in transmis sion position h, it shifts the gears automati cally. This depends on the following factors:

R the selected drive program R the position of the accelerator pedal R the driving speed Manual gearshifting

& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction.

# Do not shift down on slippery road sur faces to increase the engine braking effect. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1 or 2. Manual gearshifting is activated for a short time. The current gear is displayed in the multifunction display.

% How long the manual gearshifting stays acti vated is dependant on the driving style.

# To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2.

# To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1.

# To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2 and hold it in place. The transmission position h appears in the multifunction display.

% If you select the Manual drive setting in drive program =, manual gearshifting is permanently activated. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec ognise dangers. Gearshift recommendation Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec ognise dangers. The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.

# If gearshift recommendation message 1 is shown on the multifunction display, shift to the recommended gear. Driving and parking 181 Using kickdown Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec ognise dangers.

# Maximum acceleration: depress the accel erator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached to protect the engine from overrevving. Glide mode function Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec ognise dangers. With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterised by the following:

R the combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and the engine continues to run in idle. R the transmission position h is displayed in green in the multifunction display. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 182 Driving and parking R vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ Boost technology): the com bustion engine is switched off depending on the driving situation. All of the vehicle func tions remain active. Glide mode is activated if the following condi tions are met:

R drive program ; is selected. R the speed is within a suitable range. R the road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends. R there is no trailer coupled to the trailer hitch, and no bicycle rack fitted. R you are no longer depressing the accelerator or brake pedal.

% Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive when in drive program =. Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active Brake Assist: Glide mode is also deactivated depending on the traffic situation and the vehi cle then switches to overrun mode. Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow ing parameters:

R incline R downhill gradient R temperature R height R speed R operating status of the engine Refuelling Refuelling the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable.

# Fire, naked flames, smoking and creat ing sparks must be avoided.

# Switch off the ignition and, if it has been in use, switch off the stationary heater before you refuel your vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

# Do not inhale fuel vapour.

# Keep children away from fuel.

# Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.

# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten tion immediately. Do not induce vomit ing.

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge Electrostatic charge can create sparks and thereby ignite fuel vapours.

# Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. This discharges any electrostatic charge that may have built up.

# Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.

& WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture Vehicles with a diesel engine:

If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. While the engine is running, component parts in the exhaust system may overheat without warning.

# Never refuel using petrol.

# Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a petrol engine:

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

# Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free fuel that conforms to European EN 228, or an equivalent specification.

# The RON requirement is located in the fuel filler flap. Driving and parking 183 Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel using:

R diesel R regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON R petrol with more than 10% ethanol by vol ume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100 R petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30 R petrol with additives containing metal If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:

# Do not switch the ignition on.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a diesel engine:

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 184 Driving and parking

# Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European stand ard EN 590, or an equivalent specifica tion. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, only refuel with low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm.

# Vehicles without diesel particulate filter: refuel using only diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 500 ppm. Never refuel using:

R petrol R marine diesel R heating oil R pure bio-diesel fuel or vegetable oil R paraffin or kerosene If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:

# do not switch the ignition on.

# consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi cles with a petrol engine. If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:

R Do not switch on the ignition. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

# Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

* NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehi cles with a diesel engine. If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:

R Do not switch on the ignition. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

# Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

* NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks.

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

* NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle.

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Requirements:

R The vehicle is unlocked.

% Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. Observe the notes on operating fluids

( page 428). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Refuelling 1 Fuel filler flap 2 Bracket for the fuel filler cap 3 Tyre pressure table 4 QR code for rescue card 5 Fuel type

# Press fuel filler flap 1.

# Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it.

# Insert the fuel filler cap into bracket 2.

# Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

% Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel fill ing pumps.

% Vehicles with a diesel engine: when the fuel tank is completely empty, top up with at least 5 litres of diesel.

% Vehicles with a diesel engine: use a filler neck with a large diameter for vehicles with a diesel engine when topping up fuel from a fuel can. Otherwise, the filler neck cannot slide into the tank. Driving and parking 185 AdBlue (diesel engine vehicles only) Notes on refilling AdBlue

* NOTE When you open the AdBlue tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may escape.

# Only fill the AdBlue tank in well-venti lated areas.

# Do not let AdBlue come into contact with skin, eyes or clothes.

# Keep AdBlue away from children.

* NOTE Do not ingest AdBlue. If AdBlue is swallowed:

# Immediately rinse out your mouth thor oughly.

# Drink plenty of water.

# Seek medical attention immediately. Observe the notes on operating fluids

( page 428). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 186 Driving and parking AdBlue is a water-soluble fluid for the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. In order for the exhaust gas aftertreatment to func tion properly, only use AdBlue in accordance with ISO 22241. AdBlue is characterised by the following:

R non-toxic R colourless and odourless R non-flammable AdBlue is available here:

R AdBlue may be topped up by fast service at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. R AdBlue is available at many filling stations from AdBlue filling pumps. R Alternatively, AdBlue is available at qualified specialist workshops, e.g. Mercedes-Benz Service Centres, and at many filling stations in AdBlue refill canisters or AdBlue refill bottles.

% Ensure the connection between the refill container and vehicle filler neck does not drip. Topping up AdBlue

* NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue being in the fuel

# AdBlue must not be used to fill the fuel tank.

# Only use AdBlue to fill the AdBlue tank.

# Do not overfill the AdBlue tank.

* NOTE Contamination of the vehicle inte rior due to AdBlue leakage

# After topping up, carefully close the AdBlue refill container.

# Avoid carrying AdBlue refill containers permanently in the vehicle. Requirements:

R The vehicle is unlocked. The following messages appear in order in the multifunction display when the AdBlue tank requires refilling:

R Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual. The AdBlue tank is down to the reserve level. R Refill AdBlue No start in XXX km. You can only drive the vehicle over the distance shown. Refill AdBlue as soon as possible. R Refill AdBlue Start not possible. The vehicle can no longer be started. You can see the AdBlue range and level in the multifunction display ( page 264).

% The AdBlue range shown depends strongly on the driving style and operating condi tions. The actual range can therefore deviate from the calculated range. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Opening the AdBlue filler cap Preparing the AdBlue refill canister Topping up AdBlue Driving and parking 187

# Press fuel filler flap 1.

# Turn AdBlue filler cap 2 anti-clockwise and remove it.

# Screw on the fastener of AdBlue refill canis ter 2.

# Screw disposable hose 1 onto the opening of AdBlue refill canister 2 until hand-tight.

# Screw disposable hose 1 onto the filler neck of the vehicle until hand-tight.

# Lift up and tip AdBlue refill canister 2. The filling process stops when the AdBlue tank is completely full. AdBlue refill canister 2 can be removed when it has been only partially emptied.

# Unscrew and close disposable hose 1 and AdBlue refill canister 2 in reverse order.

# Switch on the ignition for at least 60 sec onds. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 188 Driving and parking

% If the vehicle could not be started as the AdBlue tank was empty, it can take up to 60 seconds for the refill to be detected.

# Start the vehicle.

% Avoid storing AdBlue refill containers per manently in the vehicle. Parking Parking the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow.

# Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components.

# In particular, do not park on dry grass land or harvested grain fields.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehi cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

R releasing the parking brake. R shifting the automatic transmission out of park position j or shifting manual trans mission into idle position. R starting the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip ment and become trapped.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away

# Always secure the vehicle against roll ing away. 1 Start/stop button

# Bring the vehicle to a standstill with the service brake. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the kerb if it starts moving.

# Apply the electric parking brake.

# Engage transmission position j in a station ary vehicle with the service brake applied

( page 180).

# Switch off the ignition.

# Release the service brake slowly.

# Lock the vehicle.

% When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately five minutes if the driver's door is closed.

% When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the sliding sunroof for approximately five minutes if the driver's door is closed. Garage door opener Programming buttons for the garage door opener Requirements:

R The vehicle is parked outside of the garage. R The engine is switched off. Driving and parking 189

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases causes poisoning.

# Never leave the engine running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of injury when opening or closing a door with the garage door opener When you operate or program the door with the integrated garage door opener, people in the range of movement of the door may become trapped or struck by the door.

# When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the door.

# Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow.

% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi cator lamp flashes yellow. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 190 Driving and parking

# Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow. R The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive.

# Point remote control 5 at a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm towards buttons 1, 2 or 3.

# Press and hold button 6 of remote control 5 until:

R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin uously. Programming is complete. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects, are located outside the range of movement of the door. R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro gramming was successful. Additionally, synchronisation of the rolling code with the door system must also be carried out.

# If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure.

# Release all of the buttons.

% The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener. Synchronising the rolling code Requirements:

R The door system uses a rolling code.

# Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.

# Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly, until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com pleted.

% Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive. Troubleshooting when programming the remote control Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Driving and parking 191 R On the Internet at http://

www.homelink.com. Opening or closing the door Requirements:

R The corresponding button is programmed to operate the door.

# Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the door opens or closes.

# If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes. Clearing the garage door opener memory

# Check if the transmitter frequency of remote control 5 is supported.

# Replace the batteries in remote control 5.

# Hold remote control 5 at various angles at a distance between 1 cm to 8 cm front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

# Hold remote control 5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rear view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

# Note that some remote controls transmit only for a limited period, press button 6 on remote control 5 again before transmission ends.

# Align the aerial line of the door opener unit with the remote control.

% Support and additional information on pro gramming:

R On the HomeLink Hotline on (0) 08000 466 354 65 or +49 (0) 6838 907-277. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 192 Driving and parking

# Press and hold buttons 1 and 3. Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.

# If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release buttons 1 and 3. Radio equipment approval numbers for the garage door opener Radio equipment approval numbers Brazil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito proteo contra interfer ncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Para maiores informaes acessar www.anatel.gov.br Country Radio equipment approval number Egypt TAC.2511151293.WIR Andorra CE Australia R-NZ Barbados MED1578 Chile 2488/DFRS20576/F-74 European Union Gibraltar Iceland Jordan Canada Kuwait CE CE CE TRC/LPD/2015/299 IC: 4112A-MUAHL5 CE Country Liechten stein Mexico Monaco New Zea land Norway Russian Federa tion Saudi Ara bia Switzer land Radio equipment approval number CE RCPGEMU15-0448 CE R-NZ CE Not required TA 10525 CE Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Country Radio equipment approval number South Africa TA-2015/1386 Turkey Not required United Arab Emi rates United States ER41849/15 Dealer No: DA35176/14 FCC ID: NZLMUAHL5 Further information on the declaration of con formity for wireless vehicle components

( page 22). Electric parking brake Electric parking brake function (applying automatically)

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehi cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

R releasing the parking brake. R shifting the automatic transmission out of park position j or shifting manual trans mission into idle position. R starting the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip ment and become trapped.

# Never leave children and animals unat tended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the digital vehicle Driving and parking 193 key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. The electric parking brake is applied if the trans mission is in position j and one of the follow ing conditions is fulfilled:

R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.

% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake. In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied:

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill. R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta tionary. R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 194 Driving and parking In addition, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:

R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient. R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red ! indicator lamp appears in the instru ment cluster. The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Electric parking brake function (releasing automatically) The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled:

R The engine is running. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat. R The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position j to h or k. R If the transmission is in position k, the boot lid must be closed. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, the follow ing conditions must be fulfilled:

R The driver's door is closed. R You move the transmission out of transmis sion position j or you have previously driven faster than 3 km/h. R If the transmission is in position k, the boot lid must be closed. When the electric parking brake is released, the red ! indicator lamp in the instrument clus ter goes out. Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually Applying

# Push handle 1. The red ! indicator lamp appears in the instrument cluster. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only% The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu ously. Releasing

# Switch the ignition on.

# Pull handle 1. The red ! indicator lamp in the instru ment cluster goes out. Emergency braking

# Press and hold handle 1. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red ! indicator lamp appears in the instrument cluster. Information on detecting damage on a parked vehicle

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating integrated communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. If a collision is detected when the tow-away pro tection is activated on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch on the ignition. Driving and parking 195 You will receive information about the following points:

R The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged. R The force of the impact. The following situations can lead to inadvertent activation:

R The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a two-

storey garage.

% Deactivate tow-away protection in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti vate tow-away protection, damage detection will also be deactivated. System limitations Detection may be restricted in the following sit uations:

R The vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g. if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key. R Impact occurs at low speed. R The electric parking brake is not applied. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 196 Driving and parking Notes on parking up the vehicle If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than four weeks, the disconnected battery may be damaged by deep discharge. If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may suffer disuse damage.

% Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Standby mode (extension of the starter bat tery's period out of use) Standby mode function

% This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, the vehicle can be parked for an extended period of time without losing power. Standby mode is characterised by the following:

R the starter battery is preserved. R the maximum non-operational time out of use is displayed in the multimedia system display. R functions such as interior protection or tow-

away protection are not available. R the connection to online services is interrup ted. If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system:

R the engine is switched off. R the ignition is switched on. Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera tional time may cause inconvenience, i.e. it can not be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the engine. The starter battery must be charged first in the following situations:

R the vehicle's non-operational time must be extended. R the Battery charge insufficient for standby mode message appears in the multimedia system display.

% Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on. Activating/deactivating standby mode Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Vehicle set-

tings . Standby mode

% This function is not available for all models.

# Activate O or deactivate the function. When you activate the function, a prompt appears.

# Select Yes. Standby mode is activated. Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and manoeu vring the vehicle. The driving systems are tools and do not relieve you of your responsibility. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these sys tems. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Function of the radar sensors Some driving and driving safety systems use radar sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle (depending on the vehicle's equipment). Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or behind the radiator grille. Keep these parts free of dirt, ice and slush. ( page 376) The sensors must not be covered, for example by bicycle racks, overhanging loads or radar-

reflecting stickers. Following an impact and in the event of associated damage, which may not be visible, to the bumpers or radiator grille, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The driver assis tance system may no longer work properly. Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving systems and driving safety systems:

R 360 Camera ( page 230) R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

( page 197) R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

( page 212) R Adaptive brake lights ( page 208) R AIR BODY CONTROL ( page 221) R Active Brake Assist ( page 203) R Active Lane Keeping Assist ( page 249) R ATTENTION ASSIST ( page 245) R BAS (Brake Assist System) ( page 198) R Hill Start Assist ( page 219) R DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL R EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)

( page 202) Driving and parking 197 R ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

( page 198) R HOLD function ( page 219) R STEER CONTROL ( page 203) R Active Steering Assist ( page 215) R Limiter ( page 209) R Active Parking Assist ( page 234) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 224) R Reversing camera ( page 227)

( page 233) R Cruise control ( page 208) R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist

( page 247) ( page 247) Function of ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ABS regulates the brake pressure in critical driv ing situations:

R During braking, e.g. at full brake application or insufficient tyre traction, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 198 Driving and parking If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving. System limitations R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 8 km/h. R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yel low ! ABS warning lamp lights up contin uously in the instrument cluster after the engine is started. Function of BAS (Brake Assist System)

& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys tem) If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased.

# Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. BAS supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated:

R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres sure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Function of ESP (Electronic Stability Pro gram)

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP checked at a qualified spe cialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is deactivated If you deactivate ESP, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation.

# ESP should only be deactivated in the following situations. MercedesAMG vehicles: always observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Driving and parking 199 ESP can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations, within physical limits:

R When pulling away on wet or slippery carria geways. R When braking. R Vehicles with trailer hitch: in trailer opera tion from speeds of 65 km/h, if the vehicle/

trailer combination begins to sway from side to side. R In strong side winds when you are driving faster than 80 km/h. If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP can stabilise the vehicle by intervening in the following ways:

R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to the situation. ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF warn ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster:

R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R Vehicles with trailer hitch: stabilisation of the vehicle/trailer combination is no longer active. R Crosswind Assist is no longer active. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.

% When ESP is deactivated, you are still assis ted by ESP when braking. ESP is intervening if the ESP warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster:

R Do not deactivate ESP. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. R Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions. Deactivate ESP in the following situations to improve traction:

R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel.

% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action which provides better grip. If the ESP warning lamp lights up continu ously, ESP is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information:

R Warning and indicator lamps ( page 501) R Display messages ( page 442) ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery carriageway. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways:

R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Influence of drive programs on ESP The drive programs enable ESP to adapt to dif ferent weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. You can Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 200 Driving and parking select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch ( page 177). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only ESP characteristics per drive program Drive program A (Comfort)

; (Eco) ESP mode ESP Comfort C (Sport) ESP Sport B (Sport Plus) ESP Sport Plus Driving and parking 201 Characteristics These drive programs provide the ideal balance between traction and stability. Select drive program ; or A in difficult road conditions, such as snow or ice, or when the road is wet from rain. This drive program continues to offer stability but with a sporty setup which allows the enthu siastic driver a more active driving style. Select drive program C in good road condi tions, for example on dry roads and clear stretches of road. The vehicle's own understeering and oversteer ing characteristics are accentuated. This allows a more active driving style to be adopted. Select drive program B in good road condi tions, for example on dry roads and clear stretches of road. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 202 Driving and parking Activating/deactivating ESP (Electronic Sta bility Program) Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . k Assistance . ESP MercedesAMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec ognise dangers.

# Activate O or deactivate the function. ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF warn ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. Function of ESP Crosswind Assist ESP Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi cle in the lane:

R ESP Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between 80 km/h and 200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilised by means of individ ual brake application on one side. Function of ESP trailer stabilisation

& WARNING Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high centre of gravity may tip over before ESP detects this.

# Always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather condi tions. When driving with a trailer, ESP can stabilise your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from side to side:

R ESP trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of 65 km/h. R Slight swerving is reduced by means of a tar geted, individual brake application on one side. R In the event of severe swerving, the engine output is also reduced and all wheels are braked. ESP trailer stabilisation may be impaired or may not function if:

R The trailer is not connected correctly or is not detected properly by the vehicle. Function of EBD (Electronic Brake force Dis tribution) EBD is characterised by the following:

R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Function of STEER CONTROL STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation. This steering recommendation is given particu larly in the following situations:

R both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake R the vehicle starts to skid System limitations STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R ESP is deactivated R ESP is malfunctioning R The steering is malfunctioning If ESP is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering. Driving and parking 203 Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following sub functions:

R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack age: Evasive Steering Assist Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with vehicles or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli sion, a warning tone sounds and the dis tance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking applica tion. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max imum full-stop braking if necessary. If the autonomous braking function or the situa tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE) may also be initiated, if the vehicle is equipped with these.

& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa tions. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:

R Give a warning or brake without reason R Not give a warning or not brake

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 204 Driving and parking an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec essary. Also observe the system limitations of Active Brake Assist. The individual subfunctions are available in the following speed ranges:

Distance warning function The distance warning function issues a warning at speeds:

R From approximately 30 km/h, if over several seconds the distance maintained to the vehi cle travelling in front is insufficient for the driving speed. The distance warning lamp then lights up in the instrument cluster. R From approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle or pedestrian. An intermittent warning tone sounds and the distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this. The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:

Vehicles travelling in front Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Moving pedestrians Stationary pedes trians Vehicles without Driv ing Assistance pack age up to approx. 250 km/h Vehicles with Driving Assistance package up to approx. 250 km/h up to approx. 80 km/h no reaction up to approx. 80 km/h no reaction up to approx. 100 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 80 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Driving and parking 205 Autonomous braking function The autonomous braking function may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:

Vehicles travelling in front Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Moving pedestrians Stationary pedes trians Vehicles without Driv ing Assistance pack age up to approx. 200 km/h Vehicles with Driving Assistance package up to approx. 250 km/h up to approx. 50 km/h no reaction up to approx. 60 km/h no reaction up to approx. 100 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h Situation-dependent braking assistance Situation-dependent braking assistance may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:

Vehicles travelling in front Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Moving pedestrians Stationary pedes trians Vehicles without Driv ing Assistance pack age up to approx. 250 km/h Vehicles with Driving Assistance package up to approx. 250 km/h up to approx. 80 km/h no reaction up to approx. 60 km/h no reaction up to approx. 100 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 206 Driving and parking Cancelling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by:

R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown. R Vehicles without Driving Assistance pack age: releasing the brake pedal. Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli cation when one of the following conditions is fulfilled:

R You manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle. R There is no longer a risk of collision. R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle. Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac teristics:

R It can detect stationary or crossing pedes trians. R It can assist the driver with additional steer ing assistance if it detects a swerving manoeuvre. R It can be activated by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving manoeuvre. R It can assist during swerving and straighten ing of the vehicle. R It can react from a speed of approximately 20 km/h up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h. You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering.

& WARNING Risk of an accident despite Evasive Steering Assist Evasive Steering Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa tions. In addition, the steering support of Evasive Steering Assist is generally not sufficient to avoid a collision. In such cases Evasive Steering Assist can:

R give an unnecessary warning or provide assistance R not give a warning or not provide assis tance

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.

# Be ready to brake and take evasive action, if necessary.

# Prevent the assistance by actively steer ing in non-critical driving situations.

# Drive at an appropriate speed if pedes trians are close to the path of your vehi cle. Also observe the system limitations of Evasive Steering Assist. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only System limitations The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions. R If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged or covered. R If the sensors malfunction due to other radar source interference, for example strong radar reflections in multi-storey car parks. R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed. R Full system performance is not available for a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after driving off. The system may not react correctly:

R In complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly identified. R To pedestrians or vehicles if they move quickly into the sensor detection range. R To pedestrians who are hidden by other objects. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be distinguished from the background. R If a pedestrian is not recognised as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects. R On bends with a tight radius. Setting Active Brake Assist Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . k Assistance . Active Brake Assist Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack age: the settings can be made after starting the vehicle. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:

the settings can be made when the ignition is switched on. The following settings are available:

R Early R Medium Driving and parking 207 R Late

# Select a setting.

% Your selection is retained when the vehicle is next started. Deactivating Active Brake Assist

% It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated.

# Select Off. The distance warning function and the auton omous braking function are deactivated. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack age: when the vehicle is next started, the medium setting is automatically selected. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack age: Evasive Steering Assist is not available. When the ignition is next started, the middle setting is selected automatically and Evasive Steering Assist is available.

% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the symbol appears in the status bar of the multifunction display. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 208 Driving and parking Function of Adaptive Brake Lights Adaptive Brake Lights warn following traffic in an emergency braking situation with the following actions:

R By flashing brake lamps R By activating the hazard warning lights If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above 50 km/h, the brake lamps flash rapidly. This provides traffic travelling behind you with an even more noticeable warning. If the vehicle is travelling at speeds of more than 70 km/h at the beginning of the brake applica tion, the hazard warning lights switch on once the vehicle is stationary. When pulling away again, the hazard warning lights switch off auto matically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lights using the hazard warning button. Cruise control and limiter Function of cruise control Cruise control accelerates and brakes the vehi cle automatically in order to maintain a previ ously stored speed. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. Cruise control is operated using the correspond ing steering wheel buttons. You can store any road speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum road speed or to the set winter tyre limit. If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay ing in lane. Displays in the multifunction display The status of cruise control and the stored speed are shown in the multifunction display. 1 Cruise control is selected 2 Speed is saved, cruise control is deactivated 3 Speed is saved, cruise control is activated

% The segments extending from the current stored speed to the end of the scale, or to the set winter tyre limit, light up in the speedometer. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only System limitations Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheat ing and wearing too quickly. Do not use cruise control in the following situa tions:

R In traffic situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads. R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. R If you are driving when visibility is poor. Function of the limiter The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To reduce the speed swiftly to the set speed, the limiter applies the brakes automatically. You can limit the speed as follows:

R Variable: for speed limits, e.g. in built-up areas. R Permanent: for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. when driving in winter tyre mode. The variable limiter is operated using the corre sponding steering wheel buttons. You can store any road speed above 20 km/h up to the maxi mum road speed or to the set winter tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has been started. If you fail to adapt your driving style, the limiter can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. The limiter is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Displays in the Instrument Display The status of the limiter and the stored speed are shown in the multifunction display. Driving and parking 209 1 Limiter is selected 2 Speed is stored, limiter is deactivated 3 Speed is stored, limiter is activated

% The segments in the speedometer light up, up to the currently stored speed.

% When the driving speed is greater than the stored speed, display 3 flashes. Kickdown If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter switches to passive mode. The Limiter passive message appears in the multifunction display. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 210 Driving and parking After completion of kickdown, the variable lim iter is activated again in the following situations:

R If the driven speed drops below the stored speed. R If the stored speed is called up. R If you store a new speed. Operating cruise control or the variable lim iter

& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates.

# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. Requirements:

Cruise control R Cruise control is selected. R ESP must be activated, but not intervening. R The driving speed is at least 20 km/h. R The transmission is in position h. Variable limiter:

R The vehicle has been started. R The variable limiter is selected. Switching between cruise control and the variable limiter

# To select cruise control: press rocker switch 1 up.

# To select the variable limiter: press rocker switch 1 down.

% Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the variable limiter is selected by a different button ( page 213). Activating cruise control or the variable lim iter

# Press rocker switch 2 up (SET/+) or down

(SET/-).

# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current driven speed is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (limiter). Increasing/decreasing speed

# Press rocker switch 2 up/down to the pres sure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 1 km/h. or Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Press and hold rocker switch 2 up/down to the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced in increments of 1 km/h. or

# Press rocker switch 2 beyond the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 10 km/h. or

# Push rocker switch 2 beyond the pressure point and hold. The stored speed is increased or reduced in increments of 10 km/h. or

# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

# Push rocker switch 2 up. Adopting the detected speed If cruise control/variable limiter is activated and Traffic Sign Assist has detected a speed restric tion sign with a maximum permissible speed and this is displayed in the instrument cluster:

# Press rocker switch 3 up. The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed. Deactivating cruise control or the variable limiter

# Press rocker switch 3 (CNCL) down. When cruise control or the variable limiter is deactivated:

R Rocker switch 2 (SET/+) or (SET/-) saves the currently driven speed and the vehicle maintains this speed. R Rocker switch 3 (RES) calls up the speed last stored and the vehicle maintains this speed.

% If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated. When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is cleared.

% When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is cleared. Driving and parking 211 Permanent limiter If the vehicle should never exceed a specific speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you can set this speed with the permanent limiter. You do this by limiting the speed to a value between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multi media system ( page 211). Shortly before the set speed is reached, it appears in the multifunction display. When you confirm the message with %, display mes sages no longer appear until you switch off the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again once the vehicle has been restarted. The permanent limiter does not switch to pas sive mode even during kickdown and the driven speed remains below the set speed. Setting the speed limitation for winter tyres Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . Vehicle settings . Win-

ter tyres limit

# Select a speed or deactivate the function. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 212 Driving and parking Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles ahead are detected, the set distance is main tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved on the steering wheel on vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package, in the range between 20 km/h and 200 km/h and, on vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, in the range between 20 km/h and 210 km/h. Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:

R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfort able or dynamic) ( page 177). R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack age: reacts to stationary vehicles (except bicycles and motorcycles) in urban speed ranges if conditions are sufficient to enable detection. It also does not detect pedes trians. R Initiates rapid acceleration to the stored speed, if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane. R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack age: takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on motorways or on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe dis tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. System limitations The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances, for example:

R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions. R The windscreen in the area of the camera is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. R On slippery roads, braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. R In multi-storey car parks or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only& WARNING Risk of accident from acceler ation or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf ficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel erate or brake in the following cases, for example:

R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.

# Always carefully observe the traffic con ditions and be ready to brake at all times.

# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50 % of the maximum possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning.

# In these cases, adjust your speed and keep a sufficient distance.

# Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.

& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or only partially reacts:

R when driving on a different line to the vehicle ahead or when changing lanes Driving and parking 213 R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to traffic and the surroundings R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can nei ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit uations.

# Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly. Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Requirements:

R The vehicle has been started. R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP is activated and is not intervening. R The transmission is in position h. R All doors and the bonnet are closed. R Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed (vehicle travelling faster than 20 km/h). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 214 Driving and parking R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being used to park the vehicle or to exit from a parking space. R The vehicle must not be skidding. Switching between Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the limiter

# Press button 1. Activating the variable limiter or Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC

# To activate without a stored speed: press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down (SET-), or press rocker switch 4 up. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal (Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC). The current driven speed is stored and main tained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or limited (variable limiter) by the vehicle. or

# To activate with a stored speed: press rocker switch 4 up. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC). Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

# Remove your foot from the brake pedal.

# Press rocker switch 4 (RES) up. or

# Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and dis tinctly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out. Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC still being activated when you leave the driver's seat If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.

# Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi cle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.

# Press rocker switch 4 (CNCL) down. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Increasing or reducing the speed

# Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down

(SET-) to the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 1 km/h. or

# Press and hold rocker switch 3 up/down to the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced in increments of 1 km/h. or

# Press rocker switch 3 beyond the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 10 km/h. or

# Press rocker switch 3 beyond the pressure point and hold. The stored speed is increased or reduced in increments of 10 km/h. Reducing or increasing the specified dis tance from the vehicle in front

# To increase the specified distance: press rocker switch 2 down.

# To reduce the specified distance: press rocker switch 2 up. Active Steering Assist Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist assists the driver at speeds up to 210 km/h and helps the driver to stay in the centre of the lane by means of mod erate steering interventions. The system orients Driving and parking 215 itself using detected lane markings. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead as a reference. If the detec tion of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to pas sive mode. The system does not provide support in the form of steering interventions. R The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. R The status of Active Steering Assist is dis played in the status bar of the multifunction display. Steering and contact detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and to be able to intervene at any time. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 216 Driving and parking If the system reaches a system limitation or the driver has not steered the vehicle for a consider able period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, the system will, depending on the situation, first alert the driver with a visual warning. Display 1 appears in the multifunction display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or has still not taken hold of the steering wheel, a repeated warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning mes sage to remind the driver to take control of the vehicle. The warning message does not appear or disap pears if one of the following conditions are met:

R The driver steers the vehicle. R The driver presses a steering wheel button or operates Touch Control. Active Steering Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Before changing lanes, the driver must make sure that the neighbouring lane is free (glance over the shoulder). System limitations Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive past exits. Active Steering Assist cannot provide the driver with steering assistance at roundabouts, T-junctions, junctions, toll stations or turns, for example. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances:

R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, direct sunlight, greatly varying light conditions, reflections or strong shadows on the carriageway. R Insufficient road illumination. R The windscreen in the area of the camera is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered. R Absence of lane markings, or several unclear lane markings, or if the markings change rap idly. R The distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. R The road is narrow and winding. R Obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane. The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions:

R On tight bends, roundabouts and when turn ing. R When towing a trailer. R When actively changing lane without switch ing on the turn signal. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func tioning If the system limitations of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane.

# Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the traffic carefully.

# Always steer the vehicle paying atten tion to traffic conditions.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes A malfunction in the detection of lane mark ings and objects can occur. This could cause unexpected steering inter vention.

# Steer according to traffic conditions. Activating Active Steering Assist Requirements:

R ESP must be activated, but not intervening. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa ted. Driving and parking 217 Overview of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays in the instrument clus ter The assistance graphic and the status display show the status of the following functions in the instrument cluster:

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Route-based speed adaptation R Active Steering Assist

# If indicator lamp 1 is off: press button 2. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 218 Driving and parking Assistant display Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC status dis play and route-based speed adaptation 1 Route-based speed adaptation (type of route event) 2 Vehicle ahead 3 Distance indicator 4 Set specified distance 5 Own vehicle 1 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected, set specified distance 2 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC deactiva ted, speed stored 3 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speed stored, no vehicle detected (bright vehicle symbol) 4 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speed stored, vehicle detected (green vehi cle symbol) 5 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and route-

based speed adaptation active, speed stored

% On motorways or high-speed major roads, the green vehicle symbol is displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull away. Speedometer The stored speed is highlighted on the speedom eter. If the speed of the vehicle ahead or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up. Activation or deactiva tion of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as alterations in the stored speed and the distance to be maintained, are displayed in the individual control feedback of the multifunction display. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Active Steering Assist status display 1 Grey steering wheel: Active Steering Assist switched on and passive 2 Green steering wheel: Active Steering Assist switched on and active 3 Yellow steering wheel flashing: transition from active to passive status (system limita tion detected or prompt to the driver to actively confirm) During the transition from the active to passive status, symbol 3 is shown as enlarged and flashes yellow. Once the system is passive, sym bol 1 is shown as grey in the multifunction dis play. Information on Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the fol lowing conditions:

R The transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by the vehicle rolling away After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle and it can roll away.

# Therefore, swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never attempt to leave the vehi cle if it is being held by Hill Start Assist. Driving and parking 219 HOLD function HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic. System limitations The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%. Activating/deactivating the HOLD function

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being activated when you leave the vehicle If you leave the vehicle while only the HOLD function is braking the vehicle, the vehicle can roll away in the following situations:

R If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 220 Driving and parking R If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. R If the electrics in the engine compart ment, the battery or the fuses are tam pered with or if the battery is disconnec ted.

# Always deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away before leaving the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking When Active Brake Assist, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the HOLD function are activated, the vehicle brakes autonomously in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit uations:

# During towing

# In a car wash Requirements:

R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fastened. R The engine is running or has been automati cally switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The electric parking brake is released. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is not acti vated. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission is in position h, k or i. Activating the HOLD function

# Depress the brake pedal and after a short time depress further until the display appears in the multifunction display.

# Release the brake pedal. Deactivating the HOLD function

# Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or

# Depress the brake pedal until the dis play disappears from the multifunction dis play. The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow ing situations:

R When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

when transmission position j is selected. R When the vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake. In the following situations, the vehicle is held by the transmission position j or by the electric parking brake:

R When the seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened. R When the engine is switched off. R When there is a malfunction in the system or if the power supply is insufficient. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only AIR BODY CONTROL AIR BODY CONTROL function AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving com fort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered Available suspension settings Driving and parking 221 automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. The option of manually adjusting the vehicle level is also available. AIR BODY CONTROL comprises:

R Air suspension with variable spring rate R Automatic level control system R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption R Manually selectable high-level setting for greater ground clearance R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant damping force adjustment) R DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button Drive program A (Comfort)

; (Eco) Characteristics R The suspension tuning is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R When driving at speeds above 125 km/h the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below 80 km/h the vehicle is raised again. R The suspension tuning is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the low level. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 222 Driving and parking Drive program C (Sport) B (Sport Plus) Characteristics R The suspension tuning is firmer. R The vehicle is set to the low level. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds. R The suspension tuning is even firmer. R The vehicle is set to the low level. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds. Setting the vehicle level

& WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high If you drive at a higher vehicle level, the driv ing characteristics may be impaired due to the higher vehicle centre of gravity. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering.

# Always choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi cle lowering When lowering the vehicle, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

# Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when you lower the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi cle lowering Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or level control system: When you unload lug gage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Raising the vehicle

# When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody. Requirements:

R The vehicle has been started. R The vehicle must not be moving faster than 60 km/h.

# Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 lights up. The vehicle is set to the high level. Your selection is saved. Driving and parking 223 The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit uations:

R When driving faster than 80 km/h. R When driving between 60 km/h and 80 km/h for approximately three minutes. R After selecting a drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active drive program. Lowering the vehicle

# Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive pro gram. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 224 Driving and parking Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors 1 in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur roundings. The responsibility for safe manoeu vring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exiting parking spaces. In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.3 m to an obstacle. A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.2 m. You can set the warning tone in the multimedia system so that it will sound earlier at a greater distance of approximately 1.0 m ( page 227). If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Active Parking Assist is unavailable. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system If Active Parking Assist is not activated and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 appears in the multimedia system at speeds up to approximately 10 km/h. Vehicles with Active Parking Assist without a 360 Camera Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and a 360 Camera Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only System limitations Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa rily take into account the following obstacles:

R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries. The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. Function of the passive side impact protec tion Passive side impact protection is an additional Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which warns the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles are detected between the front and rear detec tion range. In order for an object to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must detect the object while you are driving past it. During the parking procedure or manoeuvring, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected obsta cle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. The lateral segments light up orange or red, depending on the distance to the obstacle. Segment colour depending on distance Colour Lateral distance in cm Red Orange Approx. < 30 Approx 30 - 60 In order for lateral front or rear segments to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the vehicle has travelled the length of the vehicle, all of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis played. Driving and parking 225 Vehicles without 360 Camera 1 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only opera tional in the front and rear 2 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and can also warn the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle 3 Obstacle detected at the front right (orange) and rear (red) Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 226 Driving and parking Vehicles with 360 Camera 1 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only opera tional in the front and rear 2 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and can also warn the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle 3 Obstacle detected at the front right (orange) and rear (red) Saved obstacles are deleted in the following sit uations, for example:

R You switch off the vehicle R You open the doors After the engine is restarted, obstacles must be detected again, before a new warning can be issued. System limitations The system limitations for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC apply for passive side impact pro tection. The following objects are not detected, for exam ple:

R Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from the side R Objects placed next to the vehicle Deactivating/activating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range.

# When parking or manoeuvring the vehi cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flowerpots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth erwise be damaged. If indicator lamp 1 is not lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit or the symbol appears in the multifunction display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active.

# Press button 2. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the button may also be located in the centre console.

% Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started. Adjusting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . k Assistance . Camera

& Park. Assist . Set warning tone Adjusting the volume of the warning tones

# Select Warning tone volume.

# Set a value. Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones

# Select Warning tone pitch. Set a value. Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obsta cle. Driving and parking 227 Reversing camera Function of the reversing camera

# Select Warn early.

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Activating/deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC gives an audible warning.

# Select Audio fadeout during warning tones.

# Switch the function on O or off . If you have activated the function in the multime dia system, the image from reversing camera 1 is shown in the multimedia system display when reverse gear is selected. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position. This helps Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 228 Driving and parking you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when reversing. The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and park ing. You can select from the following views:

R Normal view R Wide-angle view R Trailer view The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror. Vehicles without Active Parking Assist The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Normal view Wide-angle view 1 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 2 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle

(dynamic) 3 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx imately 1.0 m from the rear area 4 Bumper 5 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area View of trailer (if trailer hitch is fitted) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Driving and parking 229 If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the warning display fades out. Wide-angle view 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch Vehicles with Active Parking Assist The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Normal view 1 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle

(dynamic) 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area 4 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are at a distance of between approximately 0.6 m and 1.0 m 5 Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close

(approximately 0.3 m or less) 6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis tance away (between approximately 0.3 m and 0.6 m)

% If the entire system fails, the inner segments of the warning display are shown in red. The indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up and the symbol appears in the multifunction display. If the system fails at the rear, the rear seg ments are shown in red when reversing and the rear segments are hidden when driving forwards. When Active Parking Assist is active, the lanes are displayed in green. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 230 Driving and parking View of trailer (if trailer hitch is fitted) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch System limitations The reversing camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:

R The boot lid is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or mis ted up. Observe the notes on cleaning the reversing camera ( page 376). R The camera or rear of your vehicle is dam aged. In this case, have the camera and its position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The field of vision and other functions of the reversing camera may be restricted due to addi tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. licence plate bracket or bicycle rack).

% The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. 360 Camera Function of the 360 camera The 360 camera is a system that consists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you, e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibil ity. The 360 camera is only an aid. It is not a sub stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and park ing. The system evaluates images from the following cameras:

R Reversing camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors Views of the 360 camera You can select from different views:

Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Driving and parking 231 When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in grey.

% If the entire system fails, the segments of the warning display are shown in red. The indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up and the symbol appears in the multifunction display. If the system fails at the rear, the display of the segments changes as follows:

R The rear segments are shown in red when reversing. R The rear segments are hidden when driv ing forwards. If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the warning display fades out. Top view 1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position 2 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of approximately 1.0 m or less 3 Your vehicle from above If the distance to the object lessens, the colour of the warning display changes 2. From a dis tance of approximately 0.6 m the warning dis play is shown in orange. From a distance of approximately 0.3 m the warning display is shown in red. 1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors 4 Wide-angle view, rear 5 Top view with image from the reversing cam era 6 Top view with trailer view (if trailer hitch is fitted) Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 232 Driving and parking Guide lines The guide lines in the multimedia system dis play show the distances to your vehicle. The distances only apply to road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch. Trailer view (if trailer hitch is fitted) If you select trailer view and no trailer is connec ted to the vehicle, the following display appears:

1 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle

(dynamic) 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area 4 Mark at a distance of approx. 1.0 m

% When Active Parking Assist is active, the lanes are displayed in green. 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m to the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch When the electrical connection is established between the vehicle and the trailer, the display changes to side camera view 1. This view supports manoeuvring procedures with a trailer. Side view of the mirror cameras The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 1 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions with outside mirrors folded out 2 Marker of the wheel contact points System failure If there is no operational readiness, the following message appears in the multimedia system:

System limitations The 360 camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:

R The doors are open. R The side mirrors are folded in. R The boot lid is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or mis ted up. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are fitted, are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and Driving and parking 233 their setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not use the 360 camera under such circum stances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking or manoeu vring the vehicle. On vehicles with height-adjustable suspension or if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, leaving the standard height can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images, depending on technical conditions. The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to addi tional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. licence plate bracket, bicycle rack). See the notes on cleaning the 360 camera

( page 376). Selecting a view for the 360 camera Requirements:

R The Auto reversing camera function is selec ted in the multimedia system.

# Engage reverse gear. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 234 Driving and parking

# In the multimedia system, select the desired view. Switching reversing camera automatic mode on/off The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Pay attention to your sur roundings and be ready to brake at all times. Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . k Assistance . Camera

& Park. Assist . Auto reversing camera

# Switch the function on O or off . Opening the camera cover of the reversing camera Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . k Assistance . Camera

& Park. Assist

# Select Open camera cover.

% The camera cover closes automatically after some time or after an ignition cycle. Setting the camera as a favourite You can call up the camera view directly in the multimedia system by setting it as a favourite.

# Press the button on the control ele ment. The main functions are displayed.

# Navigate downwards twice. The Favourites menu appears.

# Select New favourite.

# Select Vehicle.

# Select Camera. Active Parking Assist Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system which uses ultrasound and is automatically activated during forward travel. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. When all the conditions are fulfilled, the c symbol appears in the multifunction display and the system automati cally searches for and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle parallel and perpen dicular to the direction of travel. If Active Parking Assist is activated, suitable parking spaces are displayed in the multimedia system. The symbol appears in the multifunction display. The arrows show on which side of the carriageway free parking spaces are located. The parking space and, if necessary, the parking direction can be selected as desired. Active Parking Assist calculates a suitable vehicle path and assists you in parking and exiting the park ing space. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Active Parking Assist changes gear, accelerates, brakes and steers the vehicle. Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Active Parking Assist is cancelled if, among other things, one of the following actions is car ried out:

R You deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. R You deactivate Active Parking Assist. R You begin steering. R You apply the parking brake. R You engage j. R ESP intervenes. R You open the tailgate. System limitations of Active Parking Assist Objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist are not detected when the parking space is being measured. These are also not taken into account when the parking manoeuvre is calculated, e.g. overhang ing loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries or the boundaries of parking spaces. In some cir cumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space prematurely.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:

R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R Vehicles with automatic transmis sion: The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. This could cause a collision.

# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground. Driving and parking 235 Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations:

R If you are driving in extreme weather condi tions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain. R If you are transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient. R If you have installed snow chains. Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, e.g.:

R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces. Active Parking Assist will not assist you with parking spaces at right angles to the direction of travel in the following situations:

R If two parking spaces are located immedi ately next to each other. R If the parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a kerb. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 236 Driving and parking Active Parking Assist will not assist you with parking spaces parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel in the following situations:

R If the parking space is on a kerb. R If the parking space is bordered by an obsta cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer. Parking with Active Parking Assist

% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the button may also be located at a different position in the centre console.

# Press button 1. The Active Parking Assist view appears on the multimedia system display. Area 2 displays detected parking spaces 4 and vehicle path 3.

% Vehicle path 3 shown on the multimedia system display may differ from the actual vehicle path.

# If you have driven past a suitable parking space: bring the vehicle to a standstill.

# Select desired parking space 4. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Driving and parking 237 Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist Requirements:

R The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist. Please note that you are responsible for the vehi cle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure.

# Start the vehicle.

# Where necessary, select the parking direc tion: forwards or reverse. Vehicle path 3 is shown, depending on selected parking space 4 and parking direc tion.

# Confirm selected parking space 4.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

# Pay attention to objects and other road users.

# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

# If, for example, the Please engage reverse gear message appears in the multimedia sys tem display: select the corresponding trans mission position. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the vehicle drives into the selected parking space. On completion of the parking procedure, the Active Parking Assist finished, take control of the vehicle. display message appears. Further manoeuvring may still be necessary.

# After completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.

% Vehicles with automatic transmission:

you can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. The parking procedure can then be continued. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission position will be changed again. If the vehicle has not yet reached the parking space, the parking pro cedure will be cancelled, should a gear be changed. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 238 Driving and parking

# Press button 1. The Active Parking Assist view appears on the multimedia system display.

# If the vehicle has been parked at right angles to the direction of travel: in area 2, select direction of travel 3.

% The vehicle path shown on the multimedia system display may differ from the actual vehicle path.

# Confirm direction of exit 3 to drive out of the parking space.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

# Pay attention to objects and other road users.

# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

# If, for example, the Please engage forward gear message appears in the multimedia sys tem display: select the corresponding trans mission position. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Driving and parking 239 Remote Parking Assist supports the manoeu vring or parking procedure while you are outside your vehicle. Once you have selected a suitable parking space, you then exit the vehicle and guide it into the parking space using a suitable mobile phone. Remote Parking Assist changes gear, accelerates, brakes and steers the vehicle. While Remote Parking Assist is active, the vehi cle is locked. You can interrupt the parking proc ess at any time with the mobile phone or the vehicle key and then take over the vehicle your self. You can also use your mobile phone to move your vehicle backwards and forwards in the straight-ahead position (exploration mode). This is useful, for example, if a garage is so narrow that it is difficult or impossible to get in or out of the vehicle after it has been parked. Remote Parking Assist automatically performs any minor steering corrections that are required. Remote Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Interrupt or terminate the parking procedure if necessary. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. For the Remote Parking Assist function, you require a mobile phone and the current Remote Parking Assist app. The following operating systems are supported:

R Android R Apple iOS If the connection between the vehicle and the mobile phone is interrupted while a parking manoeuvre is being performed, the manoeuvre can be continued if the connection is re-estab lished within about two minutes. The following scenarios are supported:

R Parking in a parking space parallel to the direction of travel. R Parking in a parking space at right angles to the direction of travel. R Exiting a parking space at right angles to the direction of travel (exploration mode). R Parking in a straight-ahead position, e.g. into a garage or carport (exploration mode). Example: vehicles with 360 camera After the exiting procedure has been completed, the Active Parking Assist finished, take control of the vehicle. message appears in the display of the multimedia system. A warning tone and dis play 4 in the display of the multimedia system prompt you to take over control of the vehicle. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again. Function of Remote Parking Assist

% Remote Parking Assist is an additional func tion of Active Parking Assist. Comply with local traffic laws and regulations when using Remote Parking Assist on public roads. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 240 Driving and parking R Exiting a parking space in a straight-ahead position, e.g. from a garage or carport (explo ration mode).

% You can find further information in the oper ating instructions for the Remote Parking Assist app http://www.mercedes.me. If a malfunction or a system limitation is detec ted during parking or manoeuvring (e.g. the per mitted downhill gradient is exceeded), the fol lowing actions are performed automatically:

R The parking manoeuvre is cancelled. R The vehicle is brought to a standstill. R Transmission position j is engaged. R The vehicle is switched off. R The vehicle remains locked. If the parking manoeuvre is cancelled, a corre sponding message is displayed on the mobile phone. You can then take over and manoeuvre the vehicle into the parking space yourself. Alter natively, you can move the vehicle back to its original position, if necessary. You can interrupt the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist in order to take control of the vehicle with Remote Parking Assist and manoeuvre it into its final position. System limitations Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately or, in certain cases, to connection problems with the mobile phone. Parking spaces that are partially occu pied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Remote Parking Assist on a level, high-grip sur face. The parking space must be at least 0.60 m wider than the vehicle without the outside mir rors. Do not use Remote Parking Assist in the follow ing situations:

R The weather conditions are extreme, e.g. there is ice or packed snow or heavy rain. R If you are transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. R If you have installed snow chains. R If the parking space is on a downhill or uphill incline. Remote Parking Assist is cancelled if, among other things, one of the following actions is car ried out:

R You deactivate Active Parking Assist. R You press a button on the key. R ESP intervenes. During the parking procedure, you should not stand more than approx. 3.0 m away from the vehicle. At greater distances, the procedure will be interrupted and a corresponding message will be displayed on the mobile phone. If you move closer to the vehicle, you will be able to continue the procedure. Further information on cancelling the function can be found in the operating instructions for the Remote Parking Assist app. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Operating Remote Parking Assist

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:

R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R Vehicles with automatic transmis sion: The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. This could cause a collision.

# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. Objects located above or below the detection range of the Parking Assist are not detected when the parking space is being measured. These are also not taken into account when the parking manoeuvre is calculated, e.g. overhang ing loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries or the boundaries of parking spaces. In some cir cumstances, Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space prematurely.

& WARNING Danger due to insufficient view of the vehicle surroundings When using the Remote Parking Assist, the view of the vehicle's surroundings may be limited.

# When you manoeuvre, park or exit a parking space with the vehicle using Remote Parking Assist, observe the fol lowing points:

R Make sure that you have the best view possible of the vehicle and the vehicle's surroundings. R Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the path of your vehicle. R Make sure that you maintain a suita ble distance to the vehicle and that neither you nor other road users could be endangered. Driving and parking 241 R Be aware of the vehicle's surround ings at all times and identify possi ble dangers. R If necessary, cancel the parking pro cedure. Keep in mind that the system limitations must be observed at all times. If necessary, cancel the parking procedure. Please note that you can only use Remote Park ing Assist if you have a valid driving licence and are in a fit state to drive. During the parking procedure, no persons or pets are allowed in the vehicle. Always make sure that other road users can access their vehicles.

% Keep the key with you during the parking procedure. You can cancel the parking pro cedure and bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing a button on the key.

% On completion of the parking procedure, the vehicle is locked. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 242 Driving and parking Requirements:

R The mobile phone and Remote Parking Assist are connected ( page 244) Parking plays detected parking spaces 4 and vehi cle path 3.

# Ensure that all vehicle doors, windows and the boot lid are closed.

% Vehicle path 3 shown on the multimedia system display may differ from the actual vehicle path.

# Start the Remote Parking Assist App.

# Observe the instructions of the Remote Park ing Assist App accordingly and park the vehi cle into the parking space.

# After completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb. Taking over a parking procedure from Park ing Assist

# Park the vehicle with Active Parking Assist

( page 236).

# When the vehicle is in the desired position, select transmission position j. Active Parking Assist is ended and Remote Parking Assist is activated.

# Exit the vehicle.

# Ensure that all vehicle doors, windows and the boot lid are closed.

# Start the Remote Parking Assist App.

# Press button 1. The Active Parking Assist view appears on the multimedia system display. Area 2 dis

# If you have driven past a suitable parking space: bring the vehicle to a standstill. Area 2 is activated.

# Select transmission position j.

# Select the desired parking space in area 2 and confirm.

# Exit the vehicle. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Observe the instructions of the Remote Park ing Assist App accordingly and park the vehi cle into the parking space.

# After completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb. Parking with exploration mode

# Bring the vehicle to a standstill.

# Press button 1. The Parking Assist view appears on the multi media system display. Area 2 is activated.

# To activate Remote Parking Assist, select transmission position j.

# Select your own vehicle 3 and confirm.

# Exit the vehicle.

# Ensure that all vehicle doors, windows and the boot lid are closed.

# Start the Remote Parking Assist App.

# Observe the instructions of the Remote Park ing Assist App accordingly and drive the vehi cle forwards or backwards into the desired position.

# After completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb. Alternatively, you can proceed as follows:

# Bring the vehicle to a standstill.

# Engage transmission position j and switch off the vehicle.

# Exit the vehicle.

# Start the Remote Parking Assist App. Driving and parking 243

# Observe the instructions of the Remote Park ing Assist App accordingly and drive the vehi cle forwards or backwards into the desired position.

# After completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb. The parking procedure requires a minimum park ing space size. If clearances get smaller during the parking procedure, e.g. if the vehicle is being driven into a garage, a message appears on the mobile phone. You will need to confirm the reduced clearances. Exiting a parking space with exploration mode

# Unlock the vehicle.

# Start the Remote Parking Assist App within one minute.

# Observe the instructions of the Remote Park ing Assist App accordingly and drive the vehi cle forwards or backwards into the desired position. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 244 Driving and parking

% The outside mirrors are not automatically fol ded out after exiting a parking space. Authorising and de-authorising a mobile phone for Remote Parking Assist Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . k Assistance . Camera

& Park. Assist . Remote Parking Assist Authorising a new mobile phone In order to be able to use the Remote Parking Assist function, you must authorise your mobile phone. You can authorise up to six mobile phones.

# Select Connect new device. Remote Parking Assist is ready to connect.

# Start the Remote Parking Assist app and additionally start the authorisation process. A connection prompt is displayed.

# Enter the PIN. De-authorising a mobile phone

# Select the mobile phone.

# Select Options.

# Select Deauthorise.

# Select Yes. The mobile phone is deleted from the device list. Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approx. 2 km/h. If a critical situation is detected, the symbol appears on the camera image of the multimedia system.

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden tify objects and traffic situations. In such cases, Drive Away Assist might:

R Warn you without reason and limit the vehicle speed. R Not warn you or not limit the vehicle speed.

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva sive action. Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit uations, for example:

R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and brake pedals. R If the wrong gear is selected. The Drive Away Assist function is active under the following conditions:

R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R Every time the gear is changed to k or h when the vehicle is at a standstill. R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 1.0 m away. R If the manoeuvring assistance function is activated in the multimedia system. System limitations Drive Away Assist is not available on inclines and when driving with a trailer. Function of Cross Traffic Alert

% Also read the instructions on Blind Spot Assist ( page 247) ( page 247). Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: drivers can also be warned of any crossing traffic when reversing out of a parking space. If a critical sit uation is detected, the L symbol appears in the multimedia system display. If the driver does not respond to the warning, the vehicle's brakes can be applied automatically. To do this, the function uses the radar sensors in the bumper. The area adjacent to the vehicle is continually monitored. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. The Cross Traffic Alert function is active under the following conditions:

R If Blind Spot Assist is activated. R If the vehicle is reversing at walking pace. R If the manoeuvring assistance function is activated in the multimedia system. System limitations The Cross Traffic Alert function is not available on inclines and when driving with a trailer. Deactivating/activating manoeuvring assis tance Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . k Assistance . Camera

& Park. Assist . Manoeuvring assist.

# Activate O or deactivate the function.

% Manoeuvring assistance must be active for the function of Drive Away Assist

( page 244) and Cross Traffic Alert

( page 245). Driving and parking 245 ATTENTION ASSIST Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto nous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-

rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. You can choose between two settings. R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap ted accordingly. If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 246 Driving and parking play. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes. You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer:

R The length of the journey since the last break. R The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST. If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System suspended message appears. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display when the engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically when the engine is re-started. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored. System limitations ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all in the following situations:

R If you have been driving for less than 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor nering speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC is active. R If the time has been set incorrectly. R In active driving situations, if you change lanes and vary your speed frequently. The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness or alertness assessment is deleted and restarted when con tinuing the journey in the following situations:

R If you switch off the engine. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. changing drivers or taking a break). Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . k Assistance . ATTEN-

TION ASSIST Setting options

# Select Standard, Sensitive or Off. Suggesting a rest area

# Select Suggest rest area. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Activate O or deactivate the function . If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity.

# Select a suggested rest area: you are gui ded to the selected rest area. warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains on, all other detec ted vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist uses two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area up to 40 m behind your vehicle and 3 m directly next to your vehicle. If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx imately 12 km/h and this vehicle subsequently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red. If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle in the lateral monitoring range and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a warning tone sounds once. The red

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed. As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation.

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation and maintain a safe dis tance at the side of the vehicle. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are only aids. They may fail to detect some vehi cles and are no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles. Driving and parking 247 System limitations The system may be limited in the following situa tions:

R the sensors are dirty or covered R poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, snow or spray R narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles, are within the monitoring range Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor ders. Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist) If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor recting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 248 Driving and parking The course-correcting brake application is availa ble in the speed range between approximately 30 km/h and 200 km/h.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision.

# Always steer, brake or accelerate your self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-

correcting brake application.

# Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the following:

R if vehicles overtake too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area R vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit uations.

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation and maintain a safe dis tance at the side of the vehicle. If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, dis play 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro priate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. System limitations Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations:

R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate significantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP or Active Brake Assist. R ESP is deactivated. R A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected. R You are driving with a trailer and the electri cal connection to the trailer hitch has been correctly established. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system:

, Vehicle . k Assistance . Blind Spot Assist

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Active Lane Keeping Assist Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera 1. It serves to protect you against unin tentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by means of a vibration in the steering wheel Driving and parking 249 and a course-correcting brake application guides you back into your lane. You are warned by vibration pulses in the steer ing wheel in the following circumstances:

R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings. R A front wheel passes over the lane markings. You will also be guided back into your lane by means of a course-correcting brake application if the following conditions are met:

R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings. R A front wheel drives over a solid lane mark ing. Whether a warning is issued and when this occurs also depends on the selected sensitivity setting (standard or adaptive). If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It can not take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 250 Driving and parking vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Vehicles with Lane Tracking package: if the lane markings are solid lines and you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting brake application can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. Vehicles with Driving Assistance package or Driving Assistance Plus package: if you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting brake application can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. In the case of a broken lane mark ing being detected, a brake application will only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, overtaking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can be detected. The brake application is available in the speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel eration. R When ESP is deactivated. R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con nection to the trailer has been correctly established. R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, or due to rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections. R If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicin ity of the multifunction camera or the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured. R If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings for one lane, e.g. around construction sites. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis play 1 appears in the multifunction display. System limitations No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations:

R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel erate. R You have switched on the turn signal indica tor. R A driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov ered. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R If the carriageway is very narrow and wind ing. Vehicles with Driving Assistance package or Driving Assistance Plus package: Active Lane Keeping Assist uses radar sensors to monitor several areas around the vehicle. If the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered with snow, the system may be impaired or may not function. If an obstacle in the lane in which you are driving has been detected, no lane-cor recting brake application occurs. Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Lane Keeping Assist warning A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the origi nal lane.

# Always steer, brake or accelerate your self, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-cor recting brake application.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite inter vention of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic conditions or road users. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropri ate brake application, e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lane marking. The brake application can be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Driving and parking 251

# Always make sure that there is suffi cient distance to the side for other traf fic or obstacles.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:

R give an unnecessary warning R not give a warning

# Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Observe the system limitations of Active Lane Keeping Assist. Requirements:

The driving speed is at least 60 km/h. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 252 Driving and parking

# Press button 2. If indicator lamp 1 lights up, Lane Keeping Assist is activated. When lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphic are shown in white. Trailer hitch Trailer operation notes Observe the following notes on the tongue weight:

R use a tongue weight as close as possible to the maximum tongue weight R do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or falls below the permissible tongue weight Do not exceed the following values:

R the permissible towing capacity R the permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle R the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle R the permissible gross mass of the trailer R the maximum permissible speed of the trailer Make sure of the following before starting a jour ney:

R the tyre pressure on the rear axle of the tow ing vehicle is set for a maximum load R the lighting of the connected trailer is opera tional R vehicles without LED headlamps or MUL TIBEAM LED headlamps: the headlamps have been set correctly. In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/

trailer combination may not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for car/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. Extending/retracting the ball neck fully elec trically

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.

# Make sure that the ball neck securely engages and locks into place. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only* NOTE Damage to the fully-electric trailer hitch The fully-electric trailer hitch could be mechanically damaged by applying additional pressure when the ball neck is being exten ded or retracted.

# Do not make the ball neck extend/

retract faster by applying additional pressure. Requirements:

Make sure of the following before extending/

retracting the ball neck fully electrically:

R Shift the transmission to position j or i. R The range of movement is clear. R Only when retracting: remove the trailer cables or adapter plugs. Extending/retracting the ball neck fully elec trically Driving and parking 253

# Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. The ball neck is securely locked in place when indicator lamp 1 lights up continu ously. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp 1 flashes and the Check trailer hitch lock display message appears on the multifunction display.

# Pull switch 2. Indicator lamp 1 flashes and the Trailer coupling extendingdisplay message appears on the multifunction display. The ball neck extends fully electrically. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 254 Driving and parking

# Pull switch 2. Indicator lamp 1 flashes and the Trailer coupling extendingdisplay message appears on the multifunction display. The ball neck retracts fully electrically.

# Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. The ball neck is securely locked into place once indicator lamp 1 goes out. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp 1 flashes and the Check trailer hitch lock display message appears on the multifunction display. Observe the information on the displays on the instrument cluster:

R Warning and indicator lamps ( page 501) R Display messages ( page 442) Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer

& WARNING Risk of injury from the vehicle level being changed Vehicles with level control system: the vehicle level may be changed unintentionally, e.g. by other persons. You may become trap ped if you couple up or uncouple a trailer while the vehicle level is changing. In addi tion, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle. When coupling up or uncoupling a trailer, make sure that:

# The doors or tailgate are not opened or closed.

# Do not initiate the level control system and do not operate the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.

# The vehicle is not locked or unlocked. Requirements:

R the ball neck must be extended fully electri cally and engaged in the securely locked position. Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected to the vehicle with the following adapters:

R adapter plug R adapter cable The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehi cle only if the following conditions are met:

R the trailer is connected correctly R the trailer lighting system is in working order The operation of the following systems depends on the trailer being connected correctly:

R Active Lane Keeping Assist R ESP R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC R Active Parking Assist R Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Coupling up a trailer

* NOTE Damage to the battery due to full discharge Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can damage the battery.

# Do not use the power supply to charge the trailer battery.

# Remove the cover from the ball head and store it in a safe place ( page 114).

# Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle.

# Open the socket cover.

# Insert the plug connector with lug 1 into groove 3 on the socket.

# Turn bayonet coupling 2 clockwise to the stop.

# Let the cover engage.

# Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties

(if you are using an adapter cable).

# Make sure that cable is always slack for ease of movement during cornering.

# Push the combination switch upwards and downwards and check whether the corre sponding turn signal light on the trailer is flashing. A display message may appear on the multifunc tion display even if the trailer has been connec ted correctly:

R LEDs have been installed on the trailer light ing system R the current has fallen below the trailer light ing system's minimum current (50 mA) Driving and parking 255

% Accessories can be connected to the perma nent power supply up to 180 W, and to the power supply that is switched on via the igni tion lock. Uncoupling a trailer

& WARNING Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a trailer When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.

# Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when disconnecting the trailer cable Vehicles with level control system: the vehicle lowers when the trailer cable is dis connected. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 256 Driving and parking This could result in you or other people becoming trapped if your or their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

# Make sure nobody is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when you disconnect the trailer cable.

* NOTE Damage to the rear bumper from installing adapter cables or adapter plugs The following parts could be damaged when retracting the ball neck fully electrically:

R bumper R adapter cable R adapter plug

# Always remove the adapter cable or adapter plug before retracting the ball neck fully electrically.

# Safeguard the trailer against rolling away.

# Disconnect the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer.

# Uncouple the trailer.

# Place the cover on the ball head. Bicycle rack

& WARNING Risk of an accident when using the bicycle rack incorrectly The bicycle rack may become detached from the vehicle in the following cases:

R the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch is exceeded. R the bicycle rack is used incorrectly. R the bicycle rack is secured to the ball neck beneath the ball head. Observe the following for your own safety and that of other road users:

R always adhere to the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch. R only use the bicycle rack to transport bicycles. R always mount the bicycle rack properly by attaching to the ball head and the ball neck guide pin, if possible. R when transporting four bicycles, always use bicycle racks which have additional support on the ball neck guide pin. R only use bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz. R always observe the bicycle rack operating instructions.

* NOTE Damage to, or cracks on, the trailer hitch due to unsuitable bicycle racks or bicycle racks being used incor rectly

# use only bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R when mounted on ball head 1 and guide pin 2, the maximum load capacity is 100 kg. Up to four bicycles can be transported. The load capacity is calculated from the weight of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack load. For bicycles weighing a total of between 75 kg and 100 kg only use bicycle racks with addi tional support on guide pin 2. The vehicle's driving characteristics change when a bicycle rack is fitted. The vehicle:

R is heavier R is restricted in its acceleration and slope climbing ability R has an increased braking distance This can impair the vehicle's driving characteris tics. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Drive carefully and maintain a safe distance. When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure for maximum load on the rear axle of the vehicle. Further information on the tyre pressure can be found in the tyre pressure table ( page 406). Driving and parking 257 Notes on loading The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head, the greater the load on the trailer hitch. Observe the following notes:

R mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle as possible. R always distribute the load on the bicycle rack as evenly as possible across the vehicle's longitudinal axis. Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detachable parts from bicycles, e.g. baskets, child seats or rechargeable batteries, before loading them onto the bicycle rack. This improves the wind resistance and centre of grav ity of the bicycle rack. Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from moving around and check they are secured at regular intervals. Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driv ing characteristics and rear view may be impaired. In addition, the wind resistance and load on the trailer hitch increase. Trailer hitch (example with additional guide pins) Depending on the design, up to four bicycles can be transported on the bicycle rack:

R when mounted by attaching to ball head 1, the maximum load capacity is 75 kg. Up to three bicycles can be transported. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 258 Driving and parking Observe the following information when loading the bicycle rack:

Number of bicy cles Max. dis tance 1 Max. dis tance 2 Total weight of bicy cle rack and load Distribution of the load on the bicycle rack 1 Vertical distance between centre of gravity and ball head 2 Horizontal distance between centre of grav ity and ball head 3 The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's cen tral axis 3 41 41 Up to 75 kg Up to 90 kg1 Up to 100 kg1 420 mm 300 mm 420 mm 400 mm 420 mm 400 mm 1 When transporting four bicycles or with a total weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, always use bicycle racks with additional sup port on the trailer hitch guide pin. Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for attaching tow-bar systems, which are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow-bar systems can lead to damage on the vehicle. When towing a vehicle with tow-bar systems, safe, dynamic driving behaviour of the towing vehicle and the vehicle being towed is not guar anteed. The vehicle-trailer combination can swerve from side to side. Comply with the per mitted towing methods ( page 395) and the instructions for towing with both axles on the ground ( page 396). 1 When transporting four bicycles or with a total weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, always use bicycle racks with additional support on the trailer hitch guide pin. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Instrument display overview Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe the information in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to an instrument display malfunction If the Instrument Display has failed or mal functioned, you may not recognise function restrictions applying to safety relevant sys tems. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle safely as soon as pos sible. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Instrument display (standard) Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit Instrument Display and on-board computer 259 1 Speedometer 2 Multifunction display 3 Rev counter 4 Coolant temperature display 5 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica tor 1 Speedometer 2 Multifunction display 3 Example: area for additional values 4 Coolant temperature display 5 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica tor

% Further display content can be shown in dis play 3 for additional values ( page 262). The segments in speedometer 1 indicate the system status for the following:

R Cruise control ( page 208) Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 260 Instrument Display and on-board computer R Limiter ( page 209) R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

( page 212)

* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range.

# Do not drive with the engine in the over revving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red mark on the rev counter 3

(overrevving range) is reached. During normal operating conditions, coolant temperature display 4 may rise to 120 C.

& WARNING Danger of burns when open ing the bonnet If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine com partment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service. Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys tem (EQ Boost technology) shows the drive system's operational read iness . Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel R POWER 1 shows the electrical drive sup port as a percentage. R CHARGE 2 shows the electric motor's recu peration performance as a percentage. 1 Back/Home button, on-board com puter 2 Touch Control, on-board computer 3 Control panel for cruise control/limiter or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 4 Control panel for multimedia system:

LINGUATRONIC or voice control sys tem Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Displays favourites VOL: control knob, adjusts the volume or switches the sound off 8 6 Makes/accepts a call

~ Rejects/ends a call 5 Calls up the home screen 6 Touch Control multimedia system 7 % Back button and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.

% The on-board computer displays appear on the multifunction display ( page 263). Operating the on-board computer

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road Instrument Display and on-board computer 261 The on-board computer can be operated using the left-hand Touch Control 2 and left-hand back/home button 1. Different acoustic signals provide feedback when you operate the on-board computer, e.g.:

R reaching the end of a list R scrolling through a list The following menus are available:

R Service R Assistance R Trip R Navigation R Radio R Media R Telephone R HUD R Vehicles with an instrument display in the widescreen cockpit: Design The menus can be called up from the menu bar on the multifunction display. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 262 Instrument Display and on-board computer

# To call up the menu bar: press the back button on the left 1 repeatedly or just once.

% Vehicles without Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer.

# To call up a submenu or confirm the selection: press the left-hand Touch Control 2.

# To exit a submenu: press the back button on the left 1. Setting the additional value range

# To scroll in the menu bar: swipe left or right on the left-hand Touch Control 2.

# To call up a menu or confirm the selec tion: press the left-hand Touch Control 2.

# To scroll through displays or lists on the menu: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control 2. Example: G-meter 1 Additional value range 2 Index points

# To select display content: swipe to the right on the left-hand Touch Control.

# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-

hand Touch Control to select display content. When display content is selected, the addi tional value range 1 is briefly highlighted. The index points 2 display the selected list item. The following display content can be selected in the Classic and Sport designs:

R Rev counter R Navigation R ECO display R Consumption R G-meter The following content can be selected in the Pro-

gressive design:

R Date R Navigation R ECO display R Consumption R G-meter Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Overview of displays on the multifunction display 1 Outside temperature 2 Drive program 3 Transmission position 4 Time 5 Display section

% Vehicles with the instrument display in the widescreen cockpit: the positions of the displays deviate from those displayed here. Further displays on the multifunction display:

Z Active Parking Assist activated Gearshift recommendation ( page 181)

( page 236) Instrument Display and on-board computer 263 Adjusting the instrument lighting Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated

( page 226) Cruise control ( page 208) Limiter ( page 209) Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

( page 212) Active Steering Assist ( page 215) ECO start/stop function ( page 173) HOLD function ( page 219) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist ( page 140)

( page 139) Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

( page 141) Maximum permissible speed exceeded

(for certain countries only)

# Turn brightness control 1 up or down. The lighting of the instrument display and in the control elements of the vehicle interior is adjusted. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 264 Instrument Display and on-board computer Menus and submenus Functions on the Service menu of the on-

board computer On-board computer:

, Service

# To select the function: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control. Functions on the Service menu:

R Message memory ( page 442) R AdBlue: Adblue range and fill level R Tyres:

-

-

-

Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system ( page 412) Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring system

( page 407) Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system ( page 408) R ASSYST PLUS: calling up the service due date ( page 362) R Engine oil level: engine oil level Calling up the assistant display On-board computer:

, Assistance

% Vehicles with the instrument display in the widescreen cockpit: when you have the design set to Progressive, you can view the assistance graphic in the left-hand area of the instrument display. The following displays are available on the assis tant display menu:

R Assistant display R Attention level ( page 245)

# To switch between the displays: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. Status displays on the assistant display:

R : ATTENTION ASSIST deactivated R : Active Brake Assist deactivated R Light lane markings: Active Lane Keeping Assist enabled. R Green lane markings: Active Lane Keeping Assist active. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Instrument Display and on-board computer 265 When gliding mode is active, Gliding mode is displayed instead of the current fuel con sumption ( page 181). A recuperation display is also available for certain engines. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the dis play shows a vehicle being refuelled instead of the range. R ECO display( page 175) R Trip computer From start and From reset R Digital speedometer

% Vehicles with an instrument display in the widescreen cockpit: the digital speed ometer appears only in the Classic and Sport designs. Example: standard display 1 Trip distance 2 Total distance R Grey radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot Assist activated R Green radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot Assist active R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays

( page 212) R Displays the Active Lane Change Assist Calling up displays on the Trip menu On-board computer:

, Trip

% Vehicles with an instrument display in the widescreen cockpit: when you have the design set to Progressive, you can view information about the journey in the left-

hand area of the instrument display.

# To select a display: swipe upwards or down wards on the left-hand Touch Control. Displays on the Trip menu:

R Standard display R Range and current fuel consumption Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 266 Instrument Display and on-board computer Example: trip computer 1 Total distance 2 Driving time 3 Average speed 4 Average fuel consumption

% Vehicles with certain engines: the emis sion-free trip distance and driving time are also displayed. Resetting values on the Trip menu of the on-

board computer On-board computer:

, Trip

% The spelling on the main menu displayed may differ. Therefore, observe the menu overview for the instrument display

( page 261). You can reset the values of the following func tions:

R Trip distance R Trip computer From start and From reset R ECO display ( page 175)

# To select the function to be reset: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

# Select Yes .

# Press the left-hand Touch Control. If you press and hold the left-hand touch control, the function will be reset immediately. Calling up navigation instructions on the on-

board computer On-board computer:

, Navigation Example: no change of direction announced 1 Distance to the next destination 2 Estimated arrival time 3 Distance to the next change of direction 4 Current road Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R New route... or Calculating route: a new route is being calculated. R Road not mapped: the road is unknown, e.g. for newly built roads. R No route: no route could be calculated to the selected destination. R Off map: the map for the current location is not available. R Area of destination reached: you have reached the area of destination. R O: you have reached the destination or an intermediate destination.

# To exit the menu: press the back button on the left. Instrument Display and on-board computer 267 Selecting radio stations using the on-board computer On-board computer:

, Radio 1 Frequency range 2 Station 3 Name of track 4 Name of artist When you select a station from the station pre sets, the preset appears next to the station name. When you select a saved station in the frequency range, an asterisk appears next to the station name. Example: change of direction announced 1 Road to which the change of direction leads 2 Distance to the change of direction 3 Change-of-direction symbol 4 Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction (white) 5 Possible lane 6 Lane not recommended (dark grey) Further possible displays on the Navigation menu:

R Direction of travel: display of direction of travel and road currently being travelled on. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 268 Instrument Display and on-board computer

# To select a radio station: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. Selecting the frequency range or station pre set

# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

# To select the frequency range/station preset: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control. Media playback using the on-board computer On-board computer:

, Media 1 Media source 2 Current track and track number 3 Name of artist (example) 4 Name of album The folder name also appears on the display.

# To change tracks on an active media source: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. Changing a media source

# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

# To select a media source: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Con trol.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control. Dialling telephone numbers using the on-

board computer

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. Requirements R The mobile phone is connected to the multi media system. On-board computer:

, Telephone Vehicles with the Audio 20 multimedia sys tem: the most recently dialled telephone num bers are displayed on the Telephone menu.

# To select an entry: swipe upwards or down wards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control. If there is only one telephone number saved to an entry: the telephone number is selected.

# If there are multiple telephone numbers saved to an entry: swipe upwards or down wards on the left-hand touch control to select the desired telephone number.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control. The telephone number will be dialled. The following displays may appear instead of the telephone numbers dialled:

R Please wait...: the application is starting. If a Bluetooth connection to the mobile phone is not established, the menu for authorising and connecting a mobile phone will be dis played on the multimedia system

( page 319). R Updating data...: the call list is being upda ted. R Importing contacts...: contacts are being imported from the mobile phone or a storage medium. Accepting/rejecting a call When you receive a call, the Incoming call mes sage will appear on the head-up display.

# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-

hand Touch Control and select 6 (Accept) or ~ (Reject). Instrument Display and on-board computer 269

# Press the left-hand Touch Control. You may accept/reject the call using button 6 or ~ on the steering wheel. Adjusting the head-up display settings on the on-board computer On-board computer:

, HUD The following head-up display settings can be adjusted:

R Position R Brightness R Display content

# To select a setting: swipe upwards or down wards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

# To adjust a value: swipe upwards or down wards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 270 Instrument Display and on-board computer 1 Setting currently selected 2 Digital speedometer 3 Traffic Sign Assist 4 Navigation displays The head-up display projects into the driver's field of vision:

R Information from the navigation system R Information from the driver assistance sys tems R Some warning messages Display elements Setting the design On-board computer:

, Design

% This function is only available for vehicles with a widescreen cockpit. The following designs can be selected:

R Sport R Classic R Progressive

# To select a design: swipe upwards or down wards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control. The instrument display is shown in the selec ted design. Head-up Display Function of the head-up display Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe the information in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers. 1 Navigation messages 2 Current speed 3 Detected instructions and traffic signs 4 Set speed in the driver assistance system

(e.g. cruise control) Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only When you receive a call, the 6 Incoming call message appears on the head-up display. In audio mode, the station name or track is tem porarily shown when the audio source is being actively operated. System limits The visibility is influenced by the following condi tions:

R seat position R the positioning of the display image R light conditions R wet road surfaces R objects on the display cover R polarisation in sunglasses

% In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by switching the head-up display off and on again. Switching the head-up display on/off Instrument Display and on-board computer 271

# Press button 1. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 272 Multimedia system Overview and operation Overview of the multimedia system

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Switches the mute function on/off

( page 278) 6 button Switches multimedia system on/off 7 Controller Notes on the multimedia system display

* NOTE Scratches on the display The display has a highly sensitive, high-gloss surface. There is a risk of it becoming scratched.

# Avoid touching the display.

# Observe the notes on cleaning. Observe the notes on caring for the interior

( page 378). Automatic temperature-controlled switch-

off feature: if the temperature is too high, the brightness is initially reduced automatically. The display may then switch off completely for a while. 1 Touch Control Multimedia system button group on the steering wheel ( page 260) 2 Multimedia system display 3 Main function button group ( page 276) 4 Touchpad 5 Control knob Adjusts the volume ( page 278) Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only% If you are wearing polarised sunglasses, it may be difficult to read the display. Touch Control Operating Touch Control Central control elements overview 1 Touch Control 2 Controller 3 Touchpad

# To call up main functions: press button 1. or

# Press and hold button 3.

# To call up favourites: press button 1.

# Swipe down on Touch Control 2. Multimedia system 273

# To open a list: press Touch Control 2.

# To close a list: press button 3. or

# Swipe right on Touch Control 2.

# To select a menu item: swipe up, down, left or right on Touch Control 2.

# Press Touch Control 2.

# To move the digital map: swipe in any direction. Setting the sensitivity for Touch Control Multimedia system:

, System . w Input . Touch Control sensitivity

# Select Fast, Medium or Slow. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 274 Multimedia system Operating the controller 1 % button Press briefly: returns to the previous display Press and hold: calls up main functions 2 button Calls up main functions and favourites 3 Controller Controller operating options:

# Turn 3 anti-clockwise or clockwise.

# Slide 1 left or right.

# Slide 4 up or down.

# Slide 2 diagonally.

# Press 7 briefly or press and hold. Touchpad Activating/deactivating the touchpad Multimedia system:

, System . w Input

# Activate O or deactivate the Touchpad. Operating the touchpad Requirements:

R The touchpad is switched on ( page 274). 1 Touchpad 2 button Calls up main functions and favourites 3 D button Calls up the control menu of the last active audio source 4 % button Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Press briefly: returns to the previous display Press and hold: calls up main functions You can navigate in menus and lists via touch-

sensitive surface 1 by using a single-finger swipe.

# To open or close lists: swipe left or right.

# To select the menu item: swipe up, down, left or right.

# Press touchpad 1.

# To move the digital map: swipe in any direction. Use the following functions with a two-finger swipe:

# To call up main functions and favourites:

swipe down with two fingers. The swipe must start in the upper area of the touchpad.

# To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.

# To call up the control menu of the last active audio source: swipe up with two fin gers. The swipe must start in the lower area of the touchpad. Setting the sensitivity for the touchpad Multimedia system:

, System . w Input

# Select Touchpad sensitivity.

# Select Fast, Medium or Slow.

# To set the pressure sensitivity: switch Touchpad tap on O or off . If the function is switched on O, a tap on the touchpad is enough to select a menu item. Handwriting recognition: switching the read-

aloud function on/off Multimedia system:

, System . Audio . System feed-

back

# Switch Read out handwriting recognition on O or off . Multimedia system 275 Activating/deactivating haptic feedback for operation on the touchpad Multimedia system:

, System . w Input The function supports you when making entries on the touchpad and when selecting menus.

# Switch Haptic operating feedback on or off. When the function is activated, a tactile feed back in the form of a vibration is effected when the touchpad is operated. Selecting a station and track using the touchpad

# Press the D button on the touchpad. or

# Swipe up with two fingers. The swipe must start in the lower area of the touchpad. The control menu appears for the audio source that was last selected.

# Use one finger to swipe up or down. Radio: the previous or the next station is set. Media source: the previous or the next music track is selected. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 276 Multimedia system

# To hide the control menu: swipe down with two fingers. The swipe must start in the upper area of the touchpad. Calls up the telephone 5 button Sets vehicle functions Main functions Calling up the main functions

# Alternatively: press the button on the controller, the touchpad or the Touch Con trol. The main functions are displayed.

# Select the main function. Favourites Overview of favourites Favourites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. It is possible to create 20 favourites in total. The following functions are available:

R add pre-defined favourites from the follow ing categories ( page 277):

- Navigation

-

Entertainment Telephone

-

- Connect 1 button Calls up navigation 2 $ button Calls up the radio 3 button Calls up media 4 % button

-

-

Vehicle System settings R add your own favourites ( page 277) R rename favourites ( page 277). R move favourites ( page 277). R delete favourites ( page 277). R reset all favourites ( page 277) Calling up favourites

# Press the button. The main functions are displayed.

# Navigate downwards once. Navigating means:

R Swiping on the Touch Control or the touchpad R Sliding the controller Leaving the favourites menu

# Press the button. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Adding favourites Adding predefined favourites

# Press the button. The main functions are displayed.

# Navigate downwards twice. The Favourites menu appears.

# Select New favourite. The categories are displayed.

# Select a category. The favourites are displayed.

# Select a favourite.

# Store the favourite at the desired position. If a favourite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. Example: adding your own favourites

# Select Vehicle.

# Select Full screen: Consumption.

# Press and hold the button until the favourites are displayed. If No function available for saving is shown, the selected function cannot be added. Renaming favourites

# Press the button. The main functions are displayed.

# Navigate downwards once.

# Select a favourite.

# Navigate downwards once. The Favourites menu appears.

# Select Rename.

# Enter the characters.

# To confirm the entry: select . Moving favourites

# Press the button. The main functions are displayed.

# Navigate downwards once.

# Select a favourite.

# Navigate downwards once. The Favourites menu appears.

# Store the favourite at the desired position.

# Select Move. Multimedia system 277

# Move the favourite to the desired position. If a favourite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. Deleting favourites

# Press the button. The main functions are displayed.

# Navigate downwards once.

# Select a favourite.

# Navigate downwards once. The Favourites menu appears.

# To delete: select Delete.

# Select Yes.

# To restore all favourites: select Reset all. A prompt appears.

# Select Yes. The favourites are reset to the factory set tings. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 278 Multimedia system Switching the sound on/off

# To switch on: change the media source or turn volume control 1. Adjusting the volume On the multifunction steering wheel On the multimedia system

# To mute: press volume control 1. The 8 symbol appears in the status line of the display. You will also hear traffic announcements and navigation announcements even when the sound is muted. On the multifunction steering wheel Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only The volume of the navigation announce ment changes in accordance with the vol ume of the current media source. R during a telephone call R when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist or

# Select System in the multimedia system.

# Select Audio.

# Select a volume setting.

# Set the volume. Entering characters Using the character input function

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the Multimedia system 279 traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Use the character input function in the following situations, for example:

R Renaming a favourite R Entering a POI or address R Making a phone call The following functions are available:

R Selecting a character in the character bar R Writing a character on the touchpad Character input can be started with a control element and resumed with another. On the multimedia system

# Turn volume control 1. The volume of the current radio or media source is set. The volume of other audio sources can be adjusted separately. Adjust this in the following situations:

R during a traffic announcement R during a navigation announcement Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 280 Multimedia system

# On the Touch Control and controller:

select the characters in the character bar. Depending on the target entry, the following characters are available:

R The full set of characters is shown R Only those characters which are useful for the current input string are shown Other characters are greyed out.

# On the touchpad: select the characters in the character bar. Entering characters using the controller Example: renaming favourites or

# Write the characters on the touch-sensitive surface of the touchpad. Handwriting recognition supports you by means of character suggestions and a read-

aloud function. Examples of character entry:

R Renaming a favourite R Entering a POI or an address using free or step-by-step search R Entering a web address

# Call up the "Renaming favourites" function

( page 277).

# To enter a character: turn 3, slide 4 and press the controller. The character is entered in the input line. Use the following entry functions:

% To delete a character: press the control ler. To delete an entry: press and hold the controller until the entire entry is deleted. To switch to special characters and sym bols. X To switch to upper-case or lower-case let ters. B To switch the language. v To switch to character entry on the touch pad.

% The available editing functions depend on the editing task, the language set and the character level.

# To confirm the entry: select . Example: entering a destination (navigation)

# Enter the POI or address ( page 293). Entering characters on the touchpad Requirements:

R The touchpad is switched on ( page 274). R The entered or selected character should be read out: the handwriting recognition read-

aloud function is switched on ( page 275). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Example: renaming favourites

# Call up the "Renaming favourites" function

( page 277).

# To enter a character: use your finger to write characters on the touchpad. The character is entered in the input line. If different interpretations are possible, charac ter suggestions are displayed.

# To select a character suggestion: swipe up or down on the touchpad.

# Resume character input.

# To enter a space: swipe right when the cur sor is located in the input line.

# To delete a character: swipe left when the cursor is located in the input line.

# To confirm the entry: press the touchpad.

# To finish character entry: swipe upwards. or

# Press the % button. Example: entering a destination (navigation)

# Enter the POI or address ( page 293). System settings Display Configuring display settings Multimedia system:

, System . G Display and styles Designs

% Depending on the vehicle equipment this setting may not be available.

# Select Design.

# Select Sport, Classic or Progressive. Multimedia system 281 Adapting the ambient lighting for the style

# Select Adjust ambient light.. Activate O or deactivate the function. This function adjusts the ambient lighting for the selected display style. Setting the display brightness

# Select Display brightness.

# Select a brightness value. Switching the display off/on

# Off: select Display off.

# On: press a button, %, for example. Display design

# Select Day/night design.

# Select Automatic, Day design or Night design. Additional display area

% Depending on the vehicle equipment this setting may not be available. Depending on the vehicle, various items of addi tional information can be shown. The additional Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 282 Multimedia system display area comprises the left-hand or right-

hand third of the display.

# Select Additional display area. The following display content can be selected:

R Dynamic R Navigation map R Consumption R Time and date Time and date Setting the time and date automatically Multimedia system:

, System . & Time and date

# Deactivate Manual time adjustment. The time and date are set automatically for the selected time zone and summer time option.

% The correct time is required for the following functions:

R Route guidance with time-dependent traffic guidance. R Calculation of expected time of arrival. Setting the time zone Multimedia system:

, System . & Time and date . Time zone:

The list of countries is displayed.

# Select a country #. Depending on the country, time zones are displayed.

# Select a time zone. The time zone set is displayed after Time zone:. Setting summer time The Automatic Summer Time and Summer Time options cannot be selected in all countries. Multimedia system:

, System . & Time and date Automatically

# Switch Automatic Summer Time on O or off

. Manually

# Switch Automatic Summer Time off .

# Select Summer Time.

# Select On or Off. Setting the time and date format Multimedia system:

, System . & Time and date . Set format

# Set the date and time format #. Setting the time manually Requirements:

R The Manual time adjustment function is switched on. Multimedia system:

, System . & Time and date . Set time

# Set the hours.

# Navigate to the right to set the minutes.

# Set the minutes.

# Confirm changes when exiting the menu. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only The date is set automatically via GPS. Connectivity Setting up a hotspot via business telephony Multimedia system:

, System . Connectivity . Set up hotspot

# Select Select the vehicle's mobile hotspot.

# Select Business phone. The hotspot is active. External devices (e.g. tablets) can be connec ted to the multimedia system via business telephony.

% Information about setting up a hotspot

( page 340). Switching transmission of the vehicle posi tion on/off Multimedia system:

, System . Connectivity

# Select Transmit vehicle pos..

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Bluetooth Information about Bluetooth Bluetooth technology is a standard for short-

range wireless data transfer up to approximately 10 m. You can use Bluetooth to connect your mobile phone to the multimedia system and use the following functions, for example:

R Hands-free system with access to the follow ing options:

-

contacts ( page 326) call lists ( page 328)

-

R Internet connection R listening to music via Bluetooth audio

( page 352) R transferring business cards (vCards) into the vehicle Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.

% Internet connection via Bluetooth is not available in all countries. Multimedia system 283 Activating/deactivating Bluetooth Requirements:

R Apple CarPlay is not active. Multimedia system:

, System . Connectivity

# Activate O or deactivate Bluetooth. If Android Auto is active, a prompt appears ask ing whether Bluetooth should be deactivated.

# Select Yes. Android Auto is closed and Bluetooth is deactivated. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi connection overview You can use Wi-Fi to establish a connection with a Wi-Fi network and to access the Internet or other network devices. The following connection options are available:

R Wi-Fi connection Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 284 Multimedia system The Wi-Fi connection to a Wi-Fi-capable device, e.g. the customer's mobile phone or a tablet PC is established. R Multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot Using this function, a tablet PC or notebook can be connected, for example. To establish a connection, you can use the fol lowing methods:

R WPS PIN The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is made via a PIN. R WPS PBC The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is made by pressing a button (push button). R Security key The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is made via a security key. Setting up Wi-Fi Requirements:

R The device to be connected supports one of the three means of connection described

( page 283). Multimedia system:

, System . Connectivity Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi

# Switch Wi-Fi on O or off . If Wi-Fi is deactivated , communication via Wi-Fi to all devices is interrupted. This also means that a connection to the HERMES communication module cannot be estab lished. Then functions such as dynamic route guidance with Live Traffic Information are not available. Connecting the multimedia system with a device via Wi-Fi This function is available if a HERMES communi cation module is not installed. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.

% The connection procedure may differ depending on the device. Follow the instruc tions that are shown in the display. Further information (see the manufacturer's operat ing instructions).

# Select Internet settings.

# Select Search for Wi-Fi networks. Using a WPS PIN

# Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list.

# Select Connect using WPS PIN input. The multimedia system generates an eight-

digit PIN.

# Enter this PIN on the device to be connected.

# Confirm the entry. Using a button Requirements:

R This function is only available in a Wi-Fi fre quency of 2.4 GHz. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list.

# Select Connect via WPS PBC.

# Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options on the device to be connected.

# Press the WPS button on the device to be connected.

# Select Continue in the multimedia system. Using a security key

# Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list.

# Select Connect using security key.

# Have the security key displayed on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

# Enter this security key on the multimedia sys tem.

# Confirm the entry with .

% All devices support a security key as a means of connection. Device has already been connected:

# To automatically connect: highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list.

# Activate Connect automatically O.

# To connect: highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list.

# Select Connect. The connection is established again. These functions are possible when the device has already been connected to the Wi-Fi network. Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot Requirement:

R The vehicle is equipped for business teleph ony Multimedia system:

, System . Connectivity Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi-

Fi hotspot The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connec tion established must be selected on the multi media system and on the device to be connec ted. Multimedia system 285

# Select Set up hotspot.

# Highlight Connect device to vehicle hotspot.

# To generate a WPS PIN: select Con-

nect using WPS PIN generation.

# Enter the PIN shown in the multimedia sys tem display on the device to be connected and confirm.

# Connect via WPS PIN: select Con-

nect using WPS PIN input.

# Select Enter WPS PIN.

# Enter the PIN that is shown on the external device's display on the multimedia system.

# Select Continue.

# To connect by pressing a button: select Connect via WPS PBC.

# Press the push button on the device to be connected.

# Select Continue.

# To connect via a security key: select Con-

nect device to vehicle hotspot. A security key is displayed. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 286 Multimedia system

# Select the vehicle from the device to be con nected. The vehicle is displayed with the SSID MB Hotspot XXXXX.

# Enter the security key which is shown in the multimedia system display on the device to be connected.

# Confirm the entry.

# To connect via NFC: select Establish a con-

nection via NFC.

# Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

# Bring the mobile device into the NFC area of the vehicle ( page 323).

# Select Done. The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC. Generating a new security key:

# Select Set up hotspot.

# Select Generate security key. A connection will be established with the newly created security key.

# To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab lished, the new security key must be entered. System language Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the lan guage for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all lan guages. If a language is not available, the naviga tion announcements will be in English. Setting the system language Multimedia system:

, System . Language

# Set the language.

% If you are using Arabic map data, the text information can also be shown in Arabic on the navigation map. To do so, select as the language from the language list. Naviga tion announcements are then also made in Arabic. Setting the distance unit Multimedia system:

, System . % Units

# Select km or mi.

# In the multifunction display of the Instrument Display, switch the Additional speedometer display on O. Data import and export Data import/export function The following functions are possible:

R Transferring data from one system or vehicle to another system or vehicle. R Creating a backup copy of your personal data and loading it again. R Protecting your personal data against unwan ted export with PIN protection. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only% Please note that the NTFS file system is not supported. The FAT32 file system is recom mended. Importing/exporting data

* NOTE Loss of data due to premature removal

# Do not remove the data storage medium when data is being exported. Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data. Requirements:

R The vehicle is stationary. R The ignition is switched on or the vehicle has been started. R The SD card is inserted ( page 348) or the USB device is connected ( page 350). Multimedia system:

, System . System backup

# Select Import data or Export data. Importing

# Select a data storage medium. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to overwrite the current data. If data originates from another vehicle, this is recog nised during data reading. The multimedia system is restarted once the data has been imported.

% Current vehicle settings can be edited after the import. Exporting If PIN protection is activated, your PIN is reques ted.

# Enter the four-digit PIN.

# Select a data storage medium. The data is exported. The data export may take several minutes. Multimedia system 287 Activating/deactivating PIN protection Multimedia system:

, System . PIN protection Setting the PIN

# Select Set PIN.

# Enter a four-digit PIN.

# Enter the four-digit PIN again. If both PINs match, PIN protection is active. Changing the PIN Requirements:

R A current PIN must be set.

# Select Change settings.

# Enter the current PIN.

# Select Change PIN.

# Set a new PIN. Activating PIN protection for data export

# Select Change settings. Confirm with the PIN. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 288 Multimedia system

# Select Protect data export. Activate O or deactivate the function. Unblocking the PIN Requirements:

R There is an Internet connection. R A Mercedes me account exists at http://

www.mercedes.me. R The Personalisation service is active

( page 288). If the PIN has been entered incorrectly three times, the PIN will be blocked. You can have a single-use password sent to you via the Mercedes me connect online portal to reset the PIN protection.

# Select Unblock PIN.

# Enter the single-use password. PIN protection is reset, and you can set a new PIN.

% Alternatively, you can have PIN protection reset at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. User profile Setting a user profile Multimedia system:

, System . g Personalisation Displaying a user profile when starting If this function is active, a prompt appears when starting the system asking which user profile to use.

# Select Display profile list after start.

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Selecting a user profile

# Select Guest or individual profile #.

% Some settings from the user profile are only loaded when the vehicle is stationary or when the ignition is switched on. Automatic synchronisation Each time the ignition is switched off or on, the individual user profiles are synchronised on the multimedia system and on the server. This ensures that the latest user profiles are always available.

# Select Automatic synchronisation.

# Activate O or deactivate the function.

% For more information about importing/

exporting user profiles ( page 289). Creating a user profile Multimedia system:

, System . g Personalisation . Cre-

ate profile

# Enter a name.

# Select a. The following information is saved in the user profile, for example:

R System settings R Settings in the TV tuner's channel list R Navigation and traffic information The settings differ depending on the vehicle equipment. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Importing/exporting user profiles Requirements:

R There is an Internet connection

( page 340). R A Mercedes me account exists at http://

www.mercedes.me. R The Personalisation service is active. Multimedia system:

, System . g Personalisation . Man-

ual export/import This function is not available in all countries. Only individual profiles can be imported or exported. The individual profiles are always collectively imported or exported.

# Import: select Import profiles from the server. The The profile import overwrites the exist-

ing profiles. Do you want to continue? mes sage appears.

# Select Yes. User profiles are imported.

# Export: select Export profiles to the server. User profiles are exported.

% Certain settings, such as address book entries or previous destinations from the navigation system, are not exported. Setting user profile options Multimedia system:

, System . g Personalisation

# Highlight a profile.

# Select options. The following options are available:

R Rename R Delete R Reset

% The guest profile cannot be deleted or renamed. Software update Information on software updates The multimedia system provides a message when an update is available. Multimedia system 289 Depending on the source, you can perform vari ous updates:

Software update Source of the update Update type Updates via mobile phone Updates via an exter nal storage medium, e.g. a USB flash drive Navigation map, sys tem updates, Digital Owner's Manual Navigation maps

% Updates via mobile phone require an active Internet connection for the vehicle. This is not available in all countries. For further information on connecting to the Internet, see ( page 339). Advantages of updating software Software updates ensure your vehicle's technol ogy is always up-to-date. In order to constantly improve the quality of our services you will receive future updates for your Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 290 Multimedia system multimedia system, the Mercedes me connect services and your vehicle's communication mod ule. These will conveniently be sent to you via the mobile phone connection in your vehicle and, in many cases, installed automatically. You can monitor the status of your updates at any time on the Mercedes me portal and find infor mation about potential innovations. Your advantages at a glance:

R conveniently receive software updates via the mobile phone network R the long-term quality and availability of Mercedes me connect is guaranteed R keep your multimedia system and communi cation module up-to-date Further information about software updates can be found at http://me.mercedes-benz.com Performing a software update Requirements:

R There is an Internet connection

( page 339). R For automatic updates: your vehicle has a permanently installed communication mod ule.

% If automatic software updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded auto matically ( page 290). Multimedia system:

, System . Software update Automatic update

# Activate O Automatic online updates. Updates are performed. The current status of the updates is dis played. Manual update

# Deactivate Automatic online updates.

# Select an update from the list and start the update. Activating the software update

# Restart the system. Function of important system updates Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Please install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. As soon as an update is available for download, a corresponding message appears on the multi media system display. You have the following selection options:

R Download The update will be downloaded in the back ground. R Details Information about the pending system update is displayed. R Later The update can be downloaded manually at a later time ( page 290). If the download is completed and the update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this after the next ignition cycle, for example.

% Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location before starting the installation. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Requirements for the installation:

R The ignition is switched on. R The engine is not running. R Notes and warnings have been read and accepted. R The parking brake is applied. If all requirements are met, the update will be installed. The multimedia system cannot be operated while the update is being installed and vehicle functions are restricted. If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the centre console display. Please consult a qualified specialist workshop to resolve the problem. Reset function Multimedia system:

, System . Reset Personal data is deleted, for example:

R Station presets R Connected mobile phones

# Select Yes. If PIN protection is activated, a prompt appears asking if you also wish to restore this to the fac tory settings during a reset.

# Select Yes.

# Enter the current PIN. The PIN is reset. or

# Select No. The current PIN stays the same after reset ting.

% If you have forgotten your PIN, a Mercedes-

Benz service centre can deactivate the PIN protection for you. Multimedia system 291 A prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset.

# Select Yes. The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. Navigation Inserting/removing an SD card with digital map data

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury from swal lowing SD cards SD cards are small parts. They could be swallowed and lead to chok ing.

# Keep SD cards out of the reach of chil dren.

# Seek medical attention immediately if an SD card has been swallowed.

* NOTE Damage from manual changes Manual changes can damage the SD card. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 292 Multimedia system

# Do not change or manipulate the con tents of the SD card manually. This excludes map updates.

% If a fault message is displayed during the installation saying that the SD card is locked, the SD card may be damaged. Consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Switching navigation on Multimedia system:

, Navigation Removing

# Press the SD card.

# Remove the SD card.

* NOTE Damage due to high temperatures High temperatures may damage the SD card.

# Remove the SD card after use and take it out of the vehicle. Inserting The multimedia connection unit is located in the stowage compartment under the armrest.

# Insert the SD card with the digital map data in the SD card slot until it engages. The side with the contacts must face downwards. When inserting an SD card into the SD card slot for the first time, you will see a message on the display of the multimedia system. Subsequently, the SD card will be made avail able exclusively to your vehicle. It is then no longer possible to use it in another vehicle.

# Confirm the message. The navigation system is activated.

# Alternatively: press the button. The map appears and shows current vehicle position 1.

% If a climate control setting is changed, a cli mate bar appears briefly. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Showing/hiding the navigation menu Requirements:

R The map displays the current vehicle posi tion.

, Navigation

# To show: swipe left on the touchpad or the Touch Control. or

# Slide the controller to the left.

# To hide: swipe right on the touchpad or the Touch Control. or

# Slide the controller to the right.

% To show or hide lower menu levels, swipe or slide to the left or right as many times as necessary. Destination entry Entering a POI or address

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Multimedia system 293

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Requirements:

R For the online search: Mercedes me con nect is available. R You have a user account for the Mercedes me portal. R The service has been activated at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Further information can be found at: http://

www.mercedes.me Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 294 Multimedia system Multimedia system:

, Navigation

# Show the navigation menu.

# Select Enter destination . The country in which the vehicle is located is set 1. There are two available methods of destina tion entry:

R Free search 2 R Search step-by-step 3 Method 1: free search

# Enter the POI or address in 2. The entries can be made in any order. During destination entry, suggestions are made by the multimedia system. A selection of destinations appears in a list. Enter these address elements, for example:

R City, street, house number R Street, city R Postcode R POI name R POI category, e.g. Petrol station R City, POI name Examples of destination entry:

R If you are searching for Knigsstrae in Stuttgart, for example, you can enter STUT and KN. R If you are searching for a POI in the Uni ted Kingdom, for example, you can enter THE SHARD. To try both examples, the country setting must also be changed (method 2).

# To switch to handwriting recognition:

select v 5.

# Write the character on the touchpad.

# To switch to character selection: press the

% button. or

# Press the touchpad.

# To delete an entry: select % 4 (if avail able). R Press briefly: deletes the last character entered or the last suggestion adopted. R Press and hold: deletes the entire entry.

# To set the language: select 8.

# Select the language.

% This function is useful for countries in which several character sets are supported. An example is Russia, which uses Cyrillic and Latin characters. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# To call up the online search function:

select 6 Online search. Once an Internet connection is established, a list appears. It shows online destinations related to the previous entry. Online destinations are provided by the Inter net service provider.

# Select the online destination. or

# Enter an online destination in the input line.

% Online search is not available in all coun tries.

# To call up the list: press the % button. or

# If the top line of the character bar is highligh ted, navigate upwards.

# Select the destination in the list.

# To adopt a destination: select Select desti-

nation 7. If there are several listings for a destination, a list appears.

# Select the destination. The destination address is shown. Method 2: search step-by-step

# Press the % button. or

# If the top line of the character bar is highligh ted, navigate upwards. The character bar is hidden. City or postcode is highlighted. Additional entry fields, e.g. for POI, are available.

# Select City or postcode. The character bar appears.

# Enter the city or the postcode. During destination entry, suggestions are made by the multimedia system. A selection of destinations appears in a list. The address entries can be made in any order, for example:

R City or postcode, Street, House no. Enter an intersecting street, if available. R Street, City or postcode R POI, e.g. Petrol station, City or postcode Multimedia system 295

% During destination entry, use the following functions:

R switching to handwriting recognition R switching to character selection R deleting an entry An entry, e.g. POI, can be deleted with in a step-by-step search. Navigate to the left to do so. R call up online search function (if availa ble) R calls up a list The functions are described in the free search.

# To change the country: select the country.

# Enter the country. You only need to enter the first character.

# Select the country on the list.

# To adopt a destination: select Select desti-

nation. If there are several listings for a destination, a distance-orientated list appears. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 296 Multimedia system

# Select the destination. The destination address is shown. Selecting previous destinations Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Previous and other destinations

# Select Previous destinations.

# Select the destination. The destination address is shown. or

# If a favourite has been saved ( page 308), select From global favourites.

# Select the favourite. The destination address is shown. Selecting a POI Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Previous and other destinations . POIs

# Select the category. or

# Select All categories and the category. If route guidance is not active: the search begins in the vicinity of the current vehicle position. The list is sorted by distance in ascending order. The POIs show the following information:

R name of POI R linear distance to the POI R the direction of the linear distance to the POI (arrow) is displayed when searching for the vehicle's current position

# Select the POI.

# Route guidance is active: select the search position prior to choosing a POI.

# If intermediate destinations are set, these can also be selected as the search position after selecting Near destination. Alternatively filtering the display by POI

# Enter the search term in Search:. The results list shows relevant POIs. Entering Italy shows the following results, for example:

R POIs which contain Italy in the name. R POIs which belong to the category Italian cuisine.

# Select . The first POI in the list is highlighted.

# Select the POI. Example: setting the search position for the parking category during active route guid ance

# Select In the vicinity, Near destination or Along the route. The list shows the located POIs or opens an overview of the route destination after selecting Near destination.

# Select the POI.

# Select Near destination: select the intermedi ate destination or the destination. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Starting an automatic filling station search Requirements:

R The automatic filling station search is activa ted O ( page 302). Driving situation Route guidance is active. The fuel level in the fuel tank reaches the reserve fuel level. The Fuel tank reserve level Do you want to start the search for filling stations? message is shown.

# Select Yes. The automatic filling station search begins. The available filling stations along the route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current posi tion are displayed.

# Select the filling station. The address of the filling station is displayed.

# If route guidance is not active, select Start route guidance. The selected filling station is set as the desti nation. Route guidance begins. or Multimedia system 297

# If route guidance is active, select Start new route guidance or Set as next intermediate destination. Start new route guidance: the selected filling station is set as a new destination. The previ ous destinations and intermediate destina tions are deleted. Route guidance to the fill ing station begins. Set as next intermediate destination: the selected filling station is set as the next inter mediate destination. Route guidance begins.

# If there are already four intermediate des tinations: select Yes in the prompt. The selected filling station is entered into position 1 of the intermediate destinations menu. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins. Entering an intermediate destination Requirements:

R A destination is entered. Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Intermediate destinations and info

# Select Search for an intermediate destina-

tion.

# Enter the intermediate destination as a POI or address ( page 293).

# Select the intermediate destination.

# Select Set as destination. or

# Select an intermediate destination using Enter destination during route guid ance.

# Select Set as next intermediate destination after entering the destination. Editing intermediate destinations Requirements:

R A destination is entered. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 298 Multimedia system Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Intermediate destinations and info

# To change the order of destinations: high light the destination or the intermediate des tination.

# Select Move.

# Move the intermediate destination to the desired position.

# Press the Touch Control, the controller or the touchpad.

# To call up the map: highlight the destination or the intermediate destination.

# Select Map .

# To delete a destination: highlight the desti nation or the intermediate destination.

# Select Delete . Calculating a route with intermediate desti nations Requirements:

R The destination and at least one intermediate destination have been entered. Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Intermediate destinations and info

# Select Start new route guidance. The route is calculated with the set inter mediate destinations. Selecting a contact for destination entry Requirements:

R a mobile phone is connected to the multime dia system ( page 319). Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Previous and other destinations . Contacts

# Select the contact. The contact details are displayed.

# Select the address.

# Alternatively, to filter the display by con tacts: enter the names or telephone num bers into the search field.

# Select . The first contact in the list is highlighted.

# Select the contact.

# Select the address.

% Route guidance to a contact address is relia ble in the following cases:

R the contact address is complete. R the contact data matches the map data in the digital map. Entering geo-coordinates Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Previous and other destinations . Geo-coordinates

# Enter geo-coordinates as latitude and longi tude coordinates in degrees, minutes and seconds. The map shows the position.

# Confirm the entry. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# To calculate a route: select Start route guidance.

# If a route has already been created, select Start new route guidance or Set as inter-

mediate destination. Selecting a destination on the map Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Z Options

# Select Map menu. or

# If the map is displayed in full screen mode, press the central control element. The map menu appears.

# Select "move map" in map menu 2

( page 311).

# Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control or touchpad. or

# Slide the controller in any direction. The map moves in the corresponding direc tion under the crosshair. The more you move your finger away from the starting position on the touchpad, the faster the map moves.

# Press the Touch Control, the controller or the touchpad. If several destinations are located around the crosshair, a list shows the available POIs and roads. If a destination is located exactly on the crosshair, the destination address is dis played.

# Select the destination in the list. The destination address is shown. Setting the map orientation to 2D or 3D

# Highlight Map orientation: 2D/3D.

# Press the Touch Control, the touchpad or the controller. The map will be displayed in the selected map orientation. Showing traffic messages in the vicinity of the map

# Select Traffic messages for the vicinity. The map appears.

# Swipe left or right on the touchpad. or Multimedia system 299

# Slide the controller to the left or right. The previous or next traffic incident is high lighted on the map. Information on the traffic incident is displayed. Showing POIs in the vicinity of the map

# Select Surrounding POIs.

# Swipe left or right on the touchpad. or

# Slide the controller to the left or right. The previous or next POI is highlighted on the map. The name or the address is shown.

# Alternatively, to filter the display by POI category: swipe down on the Touch Control or the touchpad. or

# Slide the controller down.

# Select the POI category.

% User defined allows personal POI symbols to be selected ( page 313). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 300 Multimedia system Route Calculating a route Requirements:

R The destination has been entered. R The destination address is shown.

# If route guidance is not active, select Start route guidance. The route to the destination is calculated. The map shows the route. Route guidance then begins. or

# If route guidance is active, select Start new route guidance or Set as next intermediate destination. Start new route guidance: the selected desti nation address is set as a new destination. The previous destinations and intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins. Set as next intermediate destination: the selected destination address is set as the next intermediate destination. Route guid ance begins. Taking alternative routes into consideration

# Select an alternative route ( page 302). Other menu functions

# To save the destination: select Store in "Previous destinations".

# To display on the map: select Map.

# To call a telephone number: select Call.

# To call up an Internet address: select www (if available). Selecting a route type Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Route and position

# Select Route settings.

# Select the route type. A route has already been created: the route is calculated on the basis of the new route type. A route has not been created: the next route is calculated on the basis of the new route type. You can choose from the following route types:

R Eco route An economical route is calculated. The jour ney time may be somewhat longer than for quicker routes. The symbol for the current vehicle position is displayed in green. R Fast route A route with a quick journey time is calcula ted. R Short route A route with a short driving distance is calcu lated. Avoid traffic jam automatically can be switched on O or off for these route types. If Avoid traffic jam automatically is switched on, Ask before changing route to avoid traffic jam can be selected. The Avoid traffic jam automatically and Ask before changing route to avoid traffic jam set tings are not available in every country. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only The settings enable the following:

R Avoid traffic jam automatically The route is calculated with the currently set route type. Traffic messages via Live Traffic Information or FM RDS-TMC are taken into account. Live Traffic Information and FM RDS-TMC are not available in all countries. R Ask before changing route to avoid traffic jam A prompt appears when a new route is detec ted with a shorter journey time based on traf fic reports. You can continue to use the cur rent route or use the dynamic route instead. Selecting route options Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Route and posi-

tion . Avoid options Avoiding areas

# Select Areas ( page 314). Avoiding motorways, ferries, motorail trains, tunnels, unpaved roads

# Select O or deselect avoid option. Using routes requiring a special toll sticker

# Select Use vignette roads.

# Select O or deselect All or countries. The route takes into account roads in the selected countries which require you to pay a time-based fee (vignette). A vignette allows for the use of a route network for a limited time period. Using toll roads

# Select Use toll roads.

# Select Payment in cash or Electronic billing or Off. The route takes into account roads that require the payment of a usage fee (toll). If Off is selected, toll roads are not taken into account. These route options are not available in every country. Multimedia system 301 The selected route options cannot always be implemented. Therefore, a route may include a ferry, for instance, even though the avoid Ferries option is enabled. A message appears and you will hear a corresponding message. Selecting notifications Multimedia system:

, Naviga-

tion . Z Options . Announcements

# Switch an announcement on O or off . You can choose from the following announce ments:

R Announce traffic warnings This function is not available in all countries. R Driving safety voice announcements If the function is switched on, an announce ment is given before sections of road which have a maximum permissible speed. R Announce street names The multimedia system announces the names of the roads that will follow the upcoming change of direction. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 302 Multimedia system This function is not available in all countries and languages. Displaying destination information Requirements:

R A destination is entered. Multimedia system:

, Navigation

# Select Intermediate destinations and info. The following information is displayed:

R Intermediate destinations and destination The route can also include up to four intermediate destinations. R Name, address R Remaining driving distance R Time of arrival Selecting an alternative route Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Route and position

# Select Alternative route. The routes are displayed in accordance with the setting made in the route settings. The currently selected route is shown with a dark blue line.

# Select the alternative route. Activating a commuter route Requirements:

R Your home and work addresses are saved as destinations in the favourites ( page 308). Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Route and position

# Select Activate commuter route O. Navigation automatically recognises that the vehicle is located on the route between

"home" and "work" or vice versa. It automati cally starts a route guidance without voice output. If the destinations for home and work have not yet been created, a prompt appears. For the daily commuter route, traffic inci dents on the route are also reported when driving without route guidance. Switching the automatic filling station search on/off Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Z Options

# Switch Reserve fuel level on O or off . Switched on O: when the fuel reserve level is reached, a prompt appears asking whether you want to start searching for filling sta tions. Starting the automatic service station search Requirements:

R ATTENTION ASSIST and the Suggest rest area function are activated ( page 246). Driving situation The ATTENTION ASSIST Do you want to start the rest area search? message is shown. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Select Yes. The service station search starts. The availa ble service stations along the route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position are displayed.

# Select the service station. The service station address is displayed.

# If route guidance is not active, select Start route guidance. The selected service station is set as a desti nation. Route guidance begins. or

# If route guidance is active, select Start new route guidance or Set as next intermediate destination. Start new route guidance: the selected service station is set as a new destination. The previous destination and all intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the service station begins. Set as next intermediate destination: the selected service station is set as the next intermediate destination. Route guidance begins. Route guidance Notes on route guidance

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating integrated communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Route guidance begins once a route has been calculated. Multimedia system 303 The road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving instructions. Driving instructions are:

R Navigation announcements R Route guidance displays R Lane recommendations If you do not follow the driving instructions or if you leave the calculated route, a new route is calculated automatically. Driving instructions may differ from the actual road and traffic conditions if:

R The route is diverted R The direction of a one-way street has been changed For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. The route may differ from the ideal route due to the following:

R Roadworks Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only% Changes of direction are also shown in the Instrument Display. Lane recommendations overview This display appears for multi-lane roads. If the digital map contains the relevant data, the multimedia system can display lane recommen dations for the next two changes of direction. 304 Multimedia system R Incomplete digital map data Changing direction overview There are three phases when changing direction:

R Preparation phase If there is enough time between the changes of direction, the multimedia system prepares you for the upcoming change of direction. A navigation announcement is issued, e.g.

"Prepare to turn right". The map appears in full-screen mode. R Announcement phase The multimedia system announces the upcoming change of direction, e.g. by announcing "Turn right in 100 m". The display is split into two parts. The map is displayed on the left; on the right, there is a detailed image of the junction or a 3D image of the upcoming change of direction. R Change-of-direction phase The multimedia system announces the immi nent change of direction, e.g. by announcing

"Now turn right". The display is split into two parts. The vehicle has successfully changed direc tion when the light-coloured bar on the right drops down to 0 m and the current vehicle position symbol has reached the highlighted change-of-direction point. When the change of direction is complete, the map appears in full-screen mode. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R Possible lane 2 In this lane, you will only be able to complete the next change of direction. R Lane not recommended 3 In this lane, you will not be able to complete the next change of direction without chang ing lane. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added.

% Lane recommendations can also be dis played in the Instrument Display and in the Head-up Display. Overview of destination reached Once the destination is reached, you will see the chequered flag. Route guidance is finished. When an intermediate destination has been reached, you will see the intermediate destina tion flag with the number of your inter mediate destination. After this, route guidance is continued. 1 Recommended lane 2 Possible lane 3 Lanes not recommended The following lanes are displayed:

R Recommended lane 1 In this lane, you will be able to complete both the next change of direction and the one after that. Multimedia system 305 Switching navigation announcements on/off Requirements:

R a route has already been created. R route guidance is active.

# To switch off: press the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel during a navigation announcement ( page 278). or

# Press the volume control on the centre con sole during a navigation announcement

( page 278). The Spoken driving recommendations have been deactivated. message appears. or

# Show the navigation menu ( page 293).

# Select ! Driving recommendation. The symbol changes to #.

# To switch on: select # Driving recom-

mendation. The current navigation announcement is played. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 306 Multimedia system

% In the following situations, navigation announcements are switched on automati cally:

R A new route guidance is started. R The route is recalculated.

% You can access and add this function as a favourite under Spoken driving recommenda-

tions on/off. Switching navigation announcements on/off during a phone call

# Select System.

# Select Audio.

# Select Navigation and traffic announce-

ments.

# Switch Driving recommendations during phone call on O or off . Adjusting the volume of navigation announcements Requirements:

R a route has already been created. R route guidance is active. On the multifunction steering wheel or on the multimedia system

# Turn the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel during a navigation announce ment. or

# Turn the volume control on the center con sole during a navigation announcement

( page 278).

% In the following situations, the volume is raised to the minimum volume or lowered to the maximum volume:

R A new route guidance is started. R The route is recalculated.

% The minimum volume can be individually set at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Via system settings

# Select System.

# Select Audio .

# Select Navigation and traffic announce-

ments.

# Select Driving recommendation volume.

# Set the volume. Switching audio fadeout on/off during navi gation announcements

# Select System.

# Select Audio .

# Select Navigation and traffic announce-

ments.

# Switch Audio fadeout during driving recom-

mendation on O or off . Repeating navigation announcements Requirements:

R a route has already been created. R route guidance is active. Multimedia system:

, Navigation

# Select ! Driving recommendation.

# Select # Driving recommendation. The current navigation announcement is repeated. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only% You can add and call up this function as a favourite under Repeat spoken driving rec-

ommendation. Cancelling route guidance Requirements:

R a route has already been created. R route guidance is active. Multimedia system:

, Navigation

# Select X Cancel route guidance. Route guidance to an off-road destination Off-road destination: the destination is within the digital map. However, the map contains no roads that lead to the destination. You can enter off-road destinations on the map. Route guidance guides you for as long as possi ble with navigation announcements and displays on roads that are known to the multimedia sys tem. Shortly before you reach the last known position on the map, you will hear the "Please follow the direction arrow" announcement, for example. The display shows a direction arrow and the lin ear distance to the destination. Overview of route guidance from an off-road location to a destination Off-road position: the current vehicle position is located within the digital map on roads that are not available. When route guidance begins the following dis plays appear:

R The Road not mapped message is shown. R A direction arrow showing the linear direc tion to the POI. When the vehicle is back on a road known to the multimedia system, route guidance continues as normal. Overview of off-road status during route guidance Due to roadworks, for example, there may be dif ferences between the data on the digital map and the actual course of the road. In such cases, the multimedia system will temporarily be unable to locate the vehicle's current position on the digital map. The vehicle is off-road. Multimedia system 307 When the vehicle is off-road, the following dis plays are shown:

R the Road not mapped message R a direction arrow showing the linear direction to the POI When the vehicle is back on a road known to the multimedia system, route guidance continues as normal. Destination Saving the current vehicle position Multimedia system:

, Navigation

# If the map is displayed in full screen mode, press the central control element. The map menu appears.

# Select 1 on the map menu ( page 311). The current vehicle position is saved to the

"Previous destinations" memory. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 308 Multimedia system Storing a map position Multimedia system:

, Navigation The map is in full-screen mode.

# Press the Touch Control, the controller or the touchpad.

# Select "move map" in map menu 2

( page 311).

# Select a position on the map. If multiple entries are available for a map position, a list appears.

# Highlight an entry.

# Select Store in "Previous destina-

tions" . The map position is saved to the "Previous destinations" memory. Editing the previous destinations Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Previous and other destinations . Previous destinations

# Highlight one of the previous destinations.

# To save as a favourite: select Save as global favourite. The favourites are displayed.

# Move the favourite to the desired position. If a favourite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten.

# To save as "Home" address: select Save as "Home" address.

# To save as "Work" address: select Save as "Work" address.

# To delete a single or all destinations:

select Delete or Delete all. A prompt appears.

# Select Yes.

# To display destination information: select Details. Using external destinations External destinations can be received from the following sources:

R Mercedes-Benz Apps R door-to-door navigation A prompt appears on the multimedia display. Received destinations are saved in the previous destinations.

# If a destination is received: select Yes and continue with method 1 or 2. or

# If a destination was received with photo information, select Start route guidance. Route guidance starts.

# Method 1: if route guidance is not activated, select Start route guidance. The route to the destination is calculated. The map shows the route. Route guidance then begins.

# Method 2: if route guidance is active, select Start new route guidance or Set as next intermediate destination. Start new route guidance: the received desti nation address is set as a new destination. The previous destinations and intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Set as next intermediate destination: the received destination address is set as the next new destination. Route guidance begins. Route guidance with current traffic reports Traffic information overview The services are not available in every country. Traffic reports can be received with the following services:

R Live Traffic Information R FM RDS-TMC It is not possible to use both services simultane ously. Live Traffic Information or FM RDS-TMC is dis played with a symbol.

% Hazard warnings can be received using the Car-to-X service. There may be differences between the traffic reports received and the actual road and traffic conditions. Important information on Live Traffic Informa tion:

R Current traffic reports are received via the Internet connection or via data roaming (for selected countries). R The traffic situation is updated at short, regu lar intervals. R In selected countries, the subscription service is available free of charge for a period of three years from the manufacturing date. The subscription information shows the sta tus ( page 309). Information on the vehicle's position is regularly sent to Daimler AG. The data is immediately ren dered anonymous by Daimler AG and forwarded to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traf fic reports relevant to the vehicle's position are sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor for the flow of traffic and helps to improve the quality of the traffic reports. Multimedia system 309 If you do not want to transmit the vehicle posi tion, you have the following options:

R You switch off the transmission of the vehicle position ( page 283). R You have the service deactivated at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Useful information on FM RDS-TMC:

R A FM RDS-TMC radio station broadcasts traf fic reports alongside the radio programme. R FM RDS-TMC is not available in all countries. Displaying subscription information Requirements:

R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information. Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Z Options The subscription expiry date is automatically dis played:

R one month before the expiry date. R one week before the expiry date. R on the expiry date. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 310 Multimedia system

# To display manually: select Live Traffic Sub-

scription Info. Depending on the status, one of the following messages appears:

R the period of validity for the subscription is displayed. R the subscription has expired. Displaying the traffic map Requirements:

R For Live Traffic Information: the vehicle is equipped with a communication module fea turing an activated, integrated SIM card. R When the vehicle is started, the communica tion module automatically establishes an Internet connection. Traffic information is made available shortly afterwards. Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Z Options . Map menu

# Alternatively: if the map is displayed in full screen mode, press the Touch Control, the controller or the touchpad. The map menu appears.

# Activate O. The traffic map shows the following information, for example:

R traffic incidents, for example:

-

roadworks road blocks

-

- warning messages The symbols for traffic incidents are dis played in colour (on the route) or grey (off the route).

-

R traffic flow information:

traffic jam (red line) slow-moving traffic (orange line) heavy traffic (yellow line)

-

-

-

free-flowing traffic (green line) R display for traffic delays on the route lasting at least one minute R warning message symbols:

- d symbol

-

additional road safety notes when approaching a traffic incident, e.g. the end of a traffic jam If the vehicle approaches a danger area on the route, a warning message is dis played on the map. A warning message may also be issued ( page 311). Displaying traffic incidents Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Z Options . Map con-

tent

# Activate O Traffic incidents. Roadworks, road blocks, local area reports

(e.g. fog) and warning messages are dis played. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R Reason for the traffic report, e.g. traffic congestion R Warning message (highlighted in red)

# To select a traffic report symbol: select Next or Previous.

# Press on the central control element. The traffic report details are displayed. Issuing hazard warnings Multimedia system:

, Naviga-

tion . Z Options . Announcements

# Activate O Announce traffic warnings. Warning messages are issued and tailbacks which pose a risk are announced. Activating free flow and traffic display

# Activate O Free-flowing traffic and Traffic delays.

% The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration. Displaying details

# Displaying the traffic map ( page 310).

# Moving the map ( page 313).

# When a traffic report symbol is under the crosshair, press on the central control ele ment. The traffic report details are displayed. or

# Press on the central control element.

# Select Information on traffic reports. The map shows the traffic report symbols in the vicinity. Traffic report information is displayed in the status line:

R Traffic report symbol Multimedia system 311 Map and compass Map and compass overview 1 Saves the current vehicle position 2 Moves the map 3 Selects the map orientation and map view 4 Selects the function depending on the equip ment:

Sends a hazard warning via Car-to-X. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 312 Multimedia system Filters the display of POIs in the vicinity according to POI category 5 Switches the display of personal POI sym bols on the map on or off 6 Switches one of the following displays on or off depending on the equipment:

Weather information Traffic incidents 7 Switches the traffic map display on or off The map and satellite images are shown in globe projection. This allows for a realistic map display in all map scales. The map uses elevation model ling. Depending on the map data, important buildings in many cities are depicted realistically on the map in small map scales (e.g. 20 m, 50 m). Other buildings are shown as models.

% You can set the unit of measurement of the map scale ( page 286). If online information is available, fuel prices and the availability of parking spaces in multi-storey car parks are displayed, for example.

% Requirements:

R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have a user account for the Mercedes me portal. R The service has been activated at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Further information can be found at: http://

www.mercedes.me

% The online information is not available in all countries. Depending on the map data, speed limits can be displayed on the map. The function for displaying speed limits is not available in all countries.

% Company logos displayed on the map are trademarks of the respective companies and used solely for the purpose of indicating the locations of these companies. The use of such logos on the map does not indicate approval of, support of or advertising by these companies for the navigation system itself. Setting the map scale Requirements:

R The map is shown. Multimedia system:

, Navigation

# To zoom in: swipe down on the Touch Con trol. or

# Turn the controller anti-clockwise. or

# Move two fingers apart on the touchpad.

# To zoom out: swipe up on the Touch Control. or

# Turn the controller clockwise. or

# Move two fingers together on the touchpad.

% You can set the unit of measurement of the map scale ( page 286). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Moving the map Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Z Options . Map menu

# Alternatively, if the map is displayed in full screen mode, press the central control ele ment. The map menu appears. Selecting the map orientation Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Z Options . Map menu

# Alternatively, if the map is displayed in full screen mode, press the central control ele ment. The map menu appears.

# Select "Move map" in map menu 2

# Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control

( page 311). or touchpad.

# In map menu 3 , select N, 2D or 3D( page 311). R N: the 2D map view is displayed so that north is always at the top. or

# Slide the controller in any direction. The map moves in the corresponding direc tion under the crosshair. The further you move your finger away from the starting posi tion on the touchpad, the faster the map moves. R 2D: the 2D map view is aligned to the direction of travel. R 3D: the 3D map view is aligned to the direction of travel. Selecting POI symbols Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Z Options . Map con-

tent POIs include filling stations and hotels which can be displayed as symbols on the map, for exam ple. Not all POIs are available everywhere. Multimedia system 313

# Select POI symbols. The # dot indicates the current setting. Standard displays symbols of predefined cat egories on the map. User defined allows you to personally select the symbols for the available categories. None switches the display off.

# Select a setting.

# User defined: select categories. The POI symbols of the selected categories are displayed O or not displayed . Selecting the display of text information in the map Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Z Options . Text information

# Select text information. Current street shows the street you are cur rently driving on at the bottom of the display. When the map is moved, the following infor mation appears under the crosshair:

R street name Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 314 Multimedia system R POI name R area name Geo-coordinates displays the following infor mation:

R longitude and latitude R elevation The elevation shown may deviate from the actual elevation. R number of satellites from which a signal can be received When the map is moved, this information does not appear. Climate control displays the current climate control settings. None switches the display off. Displaying the next intersecting street Requirements:

R Route guidance is not active. Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Z Options

# Activate O Next intersecting street. The name of the next intersecting street will be displayed at the upper edge of the display. Displaying the map version Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Z Options

# Select Map version.

# Select Details.

% Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Overview of avoiding an area You can define areas that you would like to avoid. Avoiding a new area Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Route and posi-

tion . Avoid options . Areas

# Select Avoid new area.

# To search for an area via the map: select Using map.

# Move the map or

# To search for an area using an address:

select Address entry.

# Enter the address.

# Select Select destination. The map appears.

# To display an area: press the Touch Control, the touchpad or the controller. A red rectangle appears. This designates the area that should be avoided.

# To change the size of the area: swipe up or down on the Touch Control or the touchpad. or

# Slide the controller up or down. The map scale is enlarged or reduced and changes the size of the area.

# To set the area: press the Touch Control, the touchpad or the controller. The area is entered into the list. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Changing an area Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Route and posi-

tion . Avoid options . Areas

# Highlight an area in the list.

# Select Edit. Moving the area on the map

# Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control or touchpad. or

# Slide the controller in any direction. Changing the size of the area

# To start: press the Touch Control, the touch pad or the controller.

# To change: swipe up or down on the Touch Control or the touchpad. or

# Slide the controller up or down.

# To stop: press the Touch Control, the touch pad or the controller. Taking the area for the route into account

# Avoid O an area in the list. If route guidance is active, a new route is cal culated. If there is no route yet, the setting is carried over to the next route guidance. The route can include an area that is to be avoided in the following cases:

R the destination is located in an area that is to be avoided R there is no sensible alternative route Deleting one or all areas Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Route and posi-

tion . Avoid options . Areas

# Highlight an area in the list.

# Select Delete or Delete all.

# Confirm the prompt with Yes. One or all areas are deleted. Map data update overview The digital maps generated by the map software become outdated in the same way as conven Multimedia system 315 tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can only be provided by the navigation system in conjunction with the most up-to-date map data. Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre. You can also obtain map and software updates there.

% The SD card can only be installed on a navi gation system. It is not possible to install the SD card on other navigation systems. Free map update after first installing the SD card In some countries map updates are available as a download via the "SD card navigation" down load manager. If there is a more recent map update, you can obtain this, under certain conditions, free of charge within 60 days of the SD card being first installed. You can download the map update via the Down load Manager on your PC. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 316 Multimedia system Overview of map data and map software Variant 1: an SD card for navigation is provided with the vehicle. The SD card contains map data and software for navigation. Once you insert the SD card into the SD card slot, the SD card is only made available to your vehicle. It is then no longer possible to use it in another vehicle. You will see a note on the dis play of the multimedia system. Variant 2: if no SD card for navigation is provi ded with the vehicle, navigation cannot be used. You can obtain an SD card from a Mercedes-

Benz service centre at a later date. Displaying the compass Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Route and position

# Select Compass. The compass display shows the following information:

R the current direction of travel with bear ing (360 format) and compass direction R longitude and latitude coordinates in degrees, minutes and seconds R height (rounded) R number of GPS satellites from which a signal can be received Displaying Qibla Requirements:

R The Qibla display is available in your country. Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Route and position

# Select Qibla. The arrow on the compass shows the direc tion of prayer to Mecca in relation to the cur rent direction of travel. The number of satellites received is shown. Setting the map scale automatically Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Z Options The map scale is set automatically depending on your driving speed.

# Switch Auto zoom on O or off .

% The automatically selected map scale can be changed manually for a short time. The set ting is reset automatically after a few sec onds. Displaying weather information Requirements:

R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have a user account for the Mercedes me portal. R The service is available. R The service has been activated at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Further information can be found at: http://

www.mercedes.me Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Z Options . Map con-

tent

# Activate Weather information O. or Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Telephone Telephony Telephone menu overview

# If weather information display 6 is available in the map menu, activate O( page 311) it. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover.

% Weather information is not available in all countries. Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual (navi gation) Calling up information on navigation Multimedia system:

, Navigation . Z Options . Informa-

tion on navigation

# Select the topic. Multimedia system 317 1 Bluetooth device name of the currently connected mobile phone 2 Signal strength of the mobile phone network for the currently connected and selected mobile phone 3 Battery status of the currently connected and selected mobile phone 4 (telephone ready) or w (call active) 5 Contacts ( page 326) Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 318 Multimedia system 6 Call list ( page 328) 7 Text message 8 Active call 9 Devices ( page 319) A Options Symbols 1 to 4 are not shown until after a mobile phone has been connected to the multi media system. The symbols depend on your mobile phone and your mobile phone network provider. Bluetooth profile overview Bluetooth profile of the mobile phone Function PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) MAP (Message Access Profile) Contacts are auto matically displayed in the multimedia sys tem Message functions can be used Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following tel ephony operating modes are available:

R A mobile phone is connected to the multime dia system via Bluetooth ( page 319). R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth (two phone mode) ( page 320). R A mobile phone is connected to the multime dia system as an SAP (Sim Access Profile) telephone ( page 321). R Only a SIM card is connected to the multime dia system ( page 321). A mobile phone is being used parallel to a SIM card ( page 321). Notes on telephony

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating integrated communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate mobile communication equip ment when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Further information can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: http://

www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. Information on telephony The following situations can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion:

R there is insufficient network coverage in the area R you move from one GSM or UMTS transmit ter/receiver area (cell) into another and no communication channels are free R the SIM card used is not compatible with the network available R a mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice for improved speech quality. A require ment for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate. Connecting a mobile phone (Bluetooth tel ephony) Requirements:

R Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone

(see the manufacturer's operating instruc tions). R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia system ( page 283). Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Devices Searching for a mobile phone

# Select Use Bluetooth telephony only.

# Select Connect new device.

# Select Start search on the system. The available mobile phones are displayed. If a new mobile phone is found, it is indicated by the # symbol. Multimedia system 319 Connecting a mobile phone (authorisation using Secure Simple Pairing)

# Select the mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If the codes match: confirm the code on the mobile phone. Connecting a mobile phone (authorisation by entering a passkey)

# Select the mobile phone.

# Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi nation as a passkey.

# On the multimedia system: enter the pass key and select a.

# On the mobile phone: enter the passkey again and confirm.

% Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorised on the multimedia system. Authorised mobile phones are reconnected automatically. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 320 Multimedia system Connecting a second mobile phone (two phone mode) Requirements:

R At least one mobile phone is already connec ted to the multimedia system via Bluetooth. Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Devices

# Select Connect new device.

# Select Start search on the system. The available mobile phones are displayed.

# Select the mobile phone.

# Answer the How would you like to connect the new device? prompt.

# To replace the currently connected mobile phone: select Phone 1. The currently connected mobile phone is replaced by the new mobile phone. or

# To connect the second mobile phone:

select Phone 2. The new mobile phone is connected as Phone 2. If two mobile phones have already Using a SIM card for business telephony been connected, the second telephone is replaced by the new mobile phone. or

# To use the mobile phone as an audio source: select Audio source ( page 352). If the mobile phone is connected as Audio source, then use for telephony is not possible in this case.

% It is possible at any future point to change the type of connection for the mobile phone already connected and to set this as Phone 1, Phone 2 or Audio source ( page 322). Functions of the mobile phone in two phone mode Functions overview Functions of the mobile phone in the foreground Functions of the mobile phone in the background Full range of func tions Incoming calls

# Lightly press cover 4 of the compartment for the SIM card reader in the glove box. The compartment opens.

# Insert SIM card 1 in card slot 2. Micro or nano cards can be used with adapters 3. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Multimedia system 321

# Select Yes, SIM card and <Mobile phone>

and, if necessary, enter the SIM card PIN. Access to the mobile phone data is available. Incoming and outgoing calls are available using the SIM card. Setting up business telephony Requirements:

R Using a mobile phone:

-

-

-

Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia system ( page 283). If the mobile phone supports the Blue tooth SAP profile (SIM Access Profile), the SIM card PIN must be entered and confirmed. R Using a SIM card:

-

-

A SIM card is inserted in the card slot in the telephone module ( page 320). The SIM card PIN is entered in the multi media system. Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Devices Connecting a mobile phone

# Select Activate Business telephony.

# Select Connect a new device.

# Select Start search on the system.

# Select a mobile phone.

# Connect the mobile phone with the multime dia system via Secure Simple Pairing or the passkey ( page 319).

# Enter the SIM card PIN and confirm. The reception and call quality are improved when the vehicle's exterior aerial is connec ted.

% If the mobile phone is connected as an SAP telephone, calls cannot be made on the mobile phone, since the SIM card is inserted in the vehicle. Connect the mobile phone to the vehicle hotspot for data reception

( page 283). Connecting the SIM card

# Select the SIM card.

# Enter the SIM card PIN and confirm.

# Parallel use with a mobile phone: select an authorised mobile phone. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 322 Multimedia system Overview of the symbols for business teleph ony 1 SIM card connected 2 Mobile phone connected 3 Mobile phone connected in the hands-free profile 4 Mobile phone authorised 5 SIM card inserted and activated Interchanging mobile phones (two phone mode) Requirements:

R The mobile phones are authorised

( page 319). Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Devices

# In the device overview, select a mobile phone which has already been authorised and set as Phone 1 or Phone 2. After interchanging the mobile phones, the mobile phone in the foreground is replaced by the mobile phone in the background. 6 SIM card inserted and available 7 Hands-free profile activated 8 SAP function available and activated 9 SAP function not available

% If the mobile phone is actively connected with the system, the corresponding symbol is highlighted in yellow. Calling up the business telephony settings Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Z Options . Business telephony

# Select the desired option. The following settings are available:

R Phone number blocking R Call waiting R Select network provider R Data usage, voice R Call forwarding Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only% If a new mobile phone is connected and defined as Phone 1, for example, this over writes the previously connected mobile phone in the foreground of the system. Disconnecting a mobile phone Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Devices

# Select the i symbol in the line of the mobile phone. The disconnection of the mobile phone takes place without a confirmation prompt. The mobile phone remains authorised in the sys tem. De-authorising a mobile phone Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Devices

# Select the % symbol in the line of the mobile phone.

# Answer the confirmation prompt with Yes. The mobile phone is deauthorised and deleted from the system. Multimedia system 323 Information on Near Field Communication

(NFC) NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer or (re)connection of a mobile phone with the multimedia system. The following functions are available without having authorised a mobile phone:

R Transferring a URL to be viewed in the multi media system (see the manufacturer's oper ating instructions). R Setting up the vehicle's Wi-Fi access data via the system settings ( page 285). Further information can be found at: http://

www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Using the mobile phone with Near Field Com munication (NFC) Requirements:

R NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions) R The mobile phone's screen is switched on and unlocked (see the manufacturer's oper ating instructions) 1 Bluetooth device name of the currently connected mobile phone 2 The mobile phone is connected as Phone 1 3 The mobile phone is connected as Phone 2 4 The mobile phone is connected as Audio source 5 To de-authorise the mobile phone

( page 323) Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 324 Multimedia system It is possible to use a mobile phone via NFC with Bluetooth telephony.

# To connect a mobile phone: open stowage compartment cover 1.

# Place the NFC area of the mobile phone (see manufacturer's operating instructions) on NFC logo 2 on the inside of the cover. The mobile phone is connected to the multi media system.

# To change mobile phones: place the NFC area of the mobile phone (see manufactur er's operating instructions) on NFC logo 2. If the mobile phone has already been author ised on the multimedia system, it is now con nected. If the mobile phone is authorised on the mul timedia system for the first time, it is connec ted after confirming the mobile phone instructions (see the manufacturer's operat ing instructions). Further information can be found at: http://

www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Setting the reception and transmission vol ume Requirements:

R A mobile phone is authorised ( page 319). Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Z Options . Tele-

phone This function ensures optimal language quality.

# Select Reception volume or Transmission volume.

# Set the volume. Further information on the recommended recep tion and transmission volume: http://

www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Adjusting the call and ringtone volume Multimedia system:

, System . Audio . Telephone

# Select Speech volume or Ringtone volume.

# Set the volume. Starting/stopping mobile phone voice recog nition Requirements:

R The mobile phone is connected to the multi media system ( page 319). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Starting mobile phone voice recognition

# Press and hold the button on the multi function steering wheel for more than one second. You can use mobile phone voice recognition. Stopping mobile phone voice recognition

# Press the 8 or ~ button on the multi function steering wheel. Calls Telephone operation Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Contacts Making a call

# Select Numerical keypad.

# Enter the number.

# Select w. The call is made. Accepting a call

# Select Accept. Rejecting a call

# Select Reject. Ending a call

# Select =. Activating functions during a call

# To show all functions, navigate down. The following functions are available during a call:

R End call R Make additional call R Keyboard (show to send DTMF tones) R Switch Mute mic on O or off . R Private mode (an active call in hands-free mode is transferred over to the telephone)

% Private mode is not available for business telephony. Conducting calls with several participants Requirements:

R There is an active call ( page 325). R Another call is being made. Multimedia system 325 Switching between calls

# Select call #. The selected call is active. The other call is on hold. Activating or ending a call on hold

# Select Continue call or End call. Conducting a conference call

# Select Create conference call in the tele phone menu. The new participant is included in the confer ence call. Ending an active call

# Select =.

% On some mobile phones, the call on hold is activated as soon as the active call is ended. Accepting/rejecting a waiting call Requirements:

R There is an active call ( page 325). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 326 Multimedia system If you receive a call while already in a call, a message is displayed. An acoustic signal also sounds.

# Select Accept. The incoming call is active. If only one mobile phone is connected with the multimedia system, the previous call will be put on hold. If during a call you accept a call with the other mobile phone when in two phone mode then the existing call is ended.

# Select Reject.

% This function and behaviour depends on your mobile phone network provider and the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper ating instructions). Contacts Information about the contacts menu The contacts menu contains all contacts from existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone or memory card. You can store up to 6,000 con tacts. Depending on the data source, you have the fol lowing number of contacts:

R Permanently saved contacts: 3,000 entries R Contacts loaded from the mobile phone:

3,000 entries From the contacts menu, you can perform the following actions:

R Telephone operation

- Calling a contact ( page 327)

- Calling a new number ( page 325) R Navigation ( page 298) If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system ( page 319) and automatic calling up

( page 326) is activated, the mobile phone's contacts are displayed in the address book. Downloading mobile phone contacts Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Z Options . Contacts Automatically

# Activate Synchronise contacts automatically O. Manually

# Deactivate Synchronise contacts auto-

matically.

# Select Synchronise contacts. Calling up contacts Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Contacts Depending on the character set, the following options can be used to search for contacts:

R searching by initials R searching by name R searching by phone number

# Enter characters into the search field. A selection of possible contacts appears. Entering more characters into the search field narrows down the number of possible selections.

# Select the contact. A contact can contain the following details:

R phone numbers R navigation addresses Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R geo-coordinates R Internet address Editing the format of a contact's name Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Z Options . Con-

tacts . Name format The following options are available:

R Surname, first name R Surname First name R First name Surname

# Select an option. Overview of importing contacts Contacts from various sources Source Requirements:

Memory card USB device The SD memory card is inserted. The USB device is inserted in the USB port. Source Requirements:

Bluetooth con nection Mobile phone If the sending of vCards via Bluetooth is supported, vCards can be received on mobile phones or net books, for example. Bluetooth is activa ted in the multimedia system and on the respective device

(see the manufactur er's operating instruc tions). The mobile phone is connected to the mul timedia system. Importing contacts into the contacts menu Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Z Options . Contacts

# Select Import.

# Select an option. Multimedia system 327 Saving a mobile phone contact Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Contacts

# Select the mobile phone contact .

# Select p.

# Select Save in vehicle. The contact saved in the multimedia system is identified by the f symbol. Calling a contact Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Contacts

# Enter characters into the search field.

# Select the contact.

# Select the telephone number. The number is dialled. Selecting further options in the contacts menu Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Contacts

# Select a contact.

# Select p. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 328 Multimedia system Depending on the stored data, the following options are available:

R Call R Show website (if an Internet address has been stored) R Navigate (if an address has been stored) R Save as global favourite R Send DTMF tones (for a number with DTMF tones)

# Select an option. Deleting a contact Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Contacts You can delete contacts stored in the vehicle.

# Search for the contact.

# Select the contact.

# Select p.

# Select Delete contact.

# Select Yes. Call list Call list overview Depending on whether your mobile phone sup ports the PBAP Bluetooth profile or not, this can have different effects on the presentation and functions of the call list. If the PBAP Bluetooth profile is supported, the effects are as follows:

R The call lists from the mobile phone are dis played in the multimedia system. R When connecting the mobile phone, you may have to confirm the connection for the PBAP Bluetooth profile. If the PBAP Bluetooth profile is not supported, the effects are as follows:

R The multimedia system generates its own call lists. R The call list is not synchronised with the call lists in the mobile phone. Making a call from the call list Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Call list

# Select a number. The call is made. Mercedes-Benz link Overview of Mercedes-Benz Link Using Mercedes-Benz Link, various functions and selected mobile phone apps can be transfer red to the multimedia system display. The Mercedes-Benz Link control box supplemen tary equipment is required for this. You can obtain this at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre from 2018.

% The Mercedes-Benz Link control box uses the Android operating system.

% The service provider is responsible for these apps and the services and content connec ted to it. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Ending Mercedes-Benz Link Multimedia system:

, Connect . Mercedes-Benz Link

# Select Disconnect. The connection is ended. The mobile phone continues to be supplied with electricity. or

# Disconnect the connecting cable between the Mercedes-Benz Link control box and the multimedia system.

% Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary. Connecting Mercedes-Benz Link with the multimedia system

# Connect the Mercedes-Benz Link control box with the USB port of the multimedia connection unit using a suitable connecting cable.

% A suitable connecting cable is available sep arately at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Using Mercedes-Benz Link Requirements:

R The Mercedes-Benz Link control box is con nected with the multimedia system using the USB port. Multimedia system:

, Connect

# Select Mercedes-Benz Link.

# Select MB Link. The mobile phone functions and apps are available and shown on the multimedia sys tem display. You can find more information in the Mercedes-

Benz Link control box operating instructions. Multimedia system 329 Apple CarPlay Overview of Apple CarPlay

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. iPhone functions can be used via the multime dia system using Apple CarPlay. They are oper ated using the central control element or the Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 330 Multimedia system Siri voice-operated control system. You can activate the voice-operated control system by pressing and holding the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec ted via Apple CarPlay to the multimedia sys tem. The availability of Apple CarPlay may vary according to the country. The service provider is responsible for this appli cation and the services and content connected to it. Information on Apple CarPlay While using Apple CarPlay various functions of the multimedia system, e.g. telephony or the media sources Bluetooth audio and iPod, are unavailable. Only one route guidance can be active at a time. If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys tem, it is closed when route guidance is started on the mobile phone. Connecting an iPhone via Apple CarPlay Requirements:

R Apple operating system version iOS 8.3 or above is installed on the iPhone. R There is an Internet connection for the full range of functions for Apple CarPlay. R The iPhone is connected to the multimedia system via the USB port using a suita ble cable ( page 350). Multimedia system:

, Connect . Apple CarPlay Setting automatic or manual start A message appears when connected for the first time.

# Automatic start: select Automatically. Start automatically is activated O. Apple CarPlay will now start immediately after the iPhone is connected to the multi media system using a USB cable.

# Manual start: select Manually.

# Select the iPhone in the device list. Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg ulations A message with the data protection regulations appears.

# Select Accept & Start. or

# Select Decline & End. If you selected automatic start, you will have to start Apple CarPlay manually the next time you want to use it. Exiting Apple CarPlay

# Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel, for example.

% If Apple CarPlay was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the appli cation starts in the background when recon nected. You can call up Apple CarPlay in the main menu. Calling up Apple CarPlay sound settings Multimedia system:

, Connect . Apple CarPlay . Sound

# Select the tone menu ( page 360). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Ending Apple CarPlay Multimedia system:

, Connect . Apple CarPlay

# Select Disconnect. The connection is ended. The mobile phone continues to be supplied with electricity. or

# Disconnect the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary. Android Auto Android Auto overview

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Mobile phone functions can be used with Android Auto using the Android operating sys tem on the multimedia system. It is operated using the central control element or the voice control. You can activate the voice-operated con trol system by pressing and holding the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec ted via Android Auto to the multimedia system. The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto Apps may vary according to the country. Multimedia system 331 The service provider is responsible for this appli cation and the services and content connected to it. Information on Android Auto While using Android Auto, various functions of the multimedia system, for example the media source Bluetooth audio, are not available. Only one route guidance can be active at a time. If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys tem, it is closed when route guidance is started on the mobile phone. Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto Requirements:

R The first activation of Android Auto on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary for safety reasons. R The mobile phone supports Android Auto from Android 5.0. R The Android Auto app is installed on the mobile phone. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 332 Multimedia system R In order to use the telephone functions, the mobile phone must be connected to the mul timedia system via Bluetooth ( page 319). If there was no prior Internet connection, this is established with the use of the mobile phone with Android Auto. R The mobile phone is connected to the multi media system via the USB port using a suitable cable ( page 350). R There is an Internet connection for the full range of functions for Android Auto. Multimedia system:

, Connect . Android Auto

# Select the mobile phone from the device list. Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg ulations A message with the data protection regulations appears.

# Select Accept & Start. or

# Select Decline & End. Activating automatic start

# Select Start automatically O. Starting manually

# Select the mobile phone from the device list. Exiting Android Auto

# Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel, for example.

% If Android Auto was not displayed in the fore ground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Android Auto in the main menu. Calling up the Android Auto sound settings Multimedia system:

, Connect . Android Auto . Sound

# Select the tone menu ( page 360). Ending Android Auto Multimedia system:

, Connect . Android Auto

# Select Disconnect. The connection is ended. The mobile phone continues to be supplied with electricity. or

# Disconnect the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary. Transferred vehicle data with Android Auto and Apple CarPlay Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Android Auto or Apple CarPlay, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted:

R Software release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymised) The transfer of this data is used to optimise communication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly generated. This has no connection to the vehicle identifica tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi media system is reset ( page 291). The following driving status data is transmitted:

R Transmission position engaged R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted:

R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction This data is only transferred while the navigation system is active in order to improve it (e.g. so it can continue functioning when in a tunnel). Mercedes me connect Information on Mercedes me connect Mercedes me connect provides the following services:

R Accident and breakdown management (me button) R Appointment requests or similar (me button) R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (SOS button) The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are availa ble for you around the clock. The me button and the emergency call system can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel ( page 334). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system

( page 333). Multimedia system 333 Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, always call the national emergency services first using the standard national emergency service phone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

( page 336). Further information on Mercedes me connect, the provided service scope and operation:

http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/

connectme/de_DE/index.html Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system Requirements:

R You have access to a GSM network. R The contract partner's GSM network cover age is available in the respective region. R The ignition is switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automatically. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 334 Multimedia system Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Contacts

# Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the multimedia system display. Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Further information on Mercedes me connect, the provided service scope and operation is available at: http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/

cars/connectme/de_DE/index.html Making a call via the overhead control panel Requirements:

R You have access to a GSM network. R The contract partner's GSM network cover age is available in the respective region. R The ignition is switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automatically. If a service call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls. Service calls are only possible if a mobile phone network is available. More information on Mercedes me connect and further services can be found at: http://

www.mercedes.me Information about the service call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the me button in the over head control panel or the multimedia system. In the event of a breakdown, you will get sup port:

R A qualified Mercedes-Benz technician carries out repairs on site and/or the vehicle will be towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre. You may be charged for these services. You can find information on the following topics:

R Activation of Mercedes me connect 1 Service call button (me button) 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button

# To make a service call: press button 1.

# To make an emergency call: press SOS button cover 2 briefly to open.

# Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one second. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R Operating the vehicle R Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre R Other products and services from Mercedes-

Benz Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre ( page 336). Information on Mercedes me connect acci dent management The Mercedes me connect accident manage ment is an extension of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( page 336). An emergency call is made to the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call centre after an accident:

R A voice connection is made to a contact per son at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. R If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre for wards the call to Mercedes me connect acci dent management. R If necessary, the vehicle will be towed to a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Arranging a service appointment via Mercedes me connect If you have activated the maintenance manage ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You will then receive individual recom mendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multi media system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment.

# To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your agreement the vehicle data is sent and a Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre employee deals with your appointment. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This service outlet will then contact you within 24 hours. Multimedia system 335

% If you select Call later after the service mes sage appears, the message is hidden and reappears after a certain period of time. Giving consent to data transfer for Mercedes me connect Requirements:

R A service call is active using the multimedia system ( page 333) or the overhead control panel ( page 334). If the breakdown and Mercedes me connect Concierge services are not activated on Mercedes me, the Do you want to transmit vehi-

cle data and the vehicle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre in order to improve the processing of your request? mes sage appears.

# Select Yes. The relevant vehicle data is sent automati cally. More information on Mercedes me: http://

www.mercedes.me Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 336 Multimedia system Transferred data during a service call When you make a service call via Mercedes me connect, various data will be transmitted. Depending on which service is activated, the fol lowing data is transmitted when a call is made:

R Vehicle identification number R Mercedes me customer identification num ber R Reason for the initiation of the call R Language set in the multimedia system R Confirmation of the data protection prompt R Current vehicle location R Service and workshop code R Selected data about the status of the vehicle The following data is transmitted if no service is activated and the data protection prompt has been confirmed:

R Vehicle identification number R Mercedes me customer identification num ber R Reason for the initiation of the call R Language set in the multimedia system R Confirmation of the data protection prompt The following data is transmitted if the data pro tection prompt has been rejected:

R Reason for initiating the call R Rejection of the data protection prompt Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call system The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the relevant contract partner. Insufficient network coverage from the relevant contract partner may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. The ignition must be switched on before an auto matic emergency call can be made.

% The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is activated at the factory. Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can help to decisively reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. The emergency call can be made automatically

( page 337) or manually ( page 337). Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situa tion. Messages in the multimedia system display:

SOS READY: emergency call available SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or there is a malfunction with the emergency call system. During an active emergency call, G appears in the display. You can find more information on the regional availability of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/

connect_ecall. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only% If an emergency call is unavailable, a mes sage to this effect also appears in the multi function display of the instrument cluster. Triggering an automatic emergency call Requirements:

R The ignition is switched on. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. If restraint systems such as airbags or seat belt tensioners have been activated after an acci dent, the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system may automatically initiate an emergency call. The emergency call has been made:

R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call centre. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the public emergency services call cen tres. R In certain situations data is also transmitted in the voice channel to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. This allows measures for rescue, recovery or towing to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to be initiated quickly. The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an auto matic emergency call. If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system cannot connect to the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call centre, the emergency call is automat ically sent to the public emergency services call centre. If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display.

# Dial the emergency call number 112 on your mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated:

R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice Multimedia system 337 connection is established with the emer gency call centre operator. R On the basis of the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu lance is sent to the vehicle immediately. Triggering a manual emergency call

# Press and hold the SOS button in the over head control panel for at least one second. The emergency call has been made:

R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call centre. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer gency call centre operator. R On the basis of the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 338 Multimedia system The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the public emergency services call cen tres. R In certain situations data is also transmitted in the voice channel to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. This allows measures for rescue, recovery or towing to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to be initiated quickly. If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system cannot connect to the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call centre, the emergency call is automat ically sent to the public emergency services call centre. If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display of the multimedia system.

# Dial the emergency call number 112 on your mobile phone. Ending an unintentional emergency call

# Select ~ on the multifunction steering wheel. Transmitted data with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system The following data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre:

R the vehicle's GPS position data R the last GPS position data on the route (a few hundred metres before the incident) R direction of travel R vehicle identification number R the vehicle drive type R the estimated number of people in the vehi cle R whether Mercedes me connect is available or not R whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R the time of the accident R the language setting on the multimedia sys tem For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated:

R the current vehicle position can be called up R a voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established

% For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving traffic information, cannot be used for up to two hours after sending an emergency call. Function of the emergency call system self-

diagnosis (Russia) Your car verifies the operability of the emer gency call system each time the ignition is ON. In case of system failure, you will be informed with text message on the instrument cluster and with red indicator SOS NOT READY on the multi media display. Please, make sure, that during 3-10 seconds after switching ignition ON the red indicator SOS NOT READY in the upper right corner of the multimedia display is switched OFF, this means the emergency call system passed diagnostics Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only successfully. If necessary, switch ON the multi media display, if it was switched OFF before. Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode

(Russia) Requirements:

R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. R The ignition is switched on. R The vehicle has been stationary for at least one minute.

# To start the test mode: press and hold the

~ button on the multifunction steering wheel for at least five seconds. The test mode is started and automatically ends after the language test has been per formed.

# To end the test mode manually: switch off the ignition. The test mode is ended. Multimedia system 339 Online and Internet functions Internet connection Information on connecting to the Internet

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate mobile communication equip ment when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, you can establish an Internet connection in the following ways:

R Vehicles with a communication module:

Internet use including Mercedes me connect services and data roaming ( page 340). R Vehicles without a communication mod ule:

Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 340 Multimedia system

-

-

-

via Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile phone ( page 340) via Bluetooth with a data-enabled mobile phone ( page 341) via business telephony ( page 340) The Internet functions can only be used to a limi ted degree whilst driving. Function of the communication module On vehicles with a built-in communication mod ule, the Internet connection is established via an integrated SIM card. To use Internet access via the communication module the following conditions must be met:

R The vehicle is equipped with a permanently installed communication module. R Mercedes me connect is active and ready for operation. R Mercedes me connect is activated for Inter net access. R Data volume via Mercedes me connect is available. If the data volume limit is reached, the availabil ity of Mercedes me connect services is limited. The data volume must be purchased via Mercedes me connect. Contact a Mercedes-

Benz service centre to find out whether it is pos sible to purchase data volume in your country. Setting up an Internet connection via Wi-Fi Requirements:

R the Wi-Fi function is activated on the multi media system ( page 284). R the Wi-Fi function is activated on the external device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). R Internet access via Wi-Fi is activated (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Internet connection via Wi-Fi is restricted or does not function if:

R the mobile phone is switched off R mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile phone R the Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the multi media system R the Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the exter nal device R Internet access via Wi-Fi is deactivated on the external device Multimedia system:

, System . Connectivity . Inter-

net settings . Search for Wi-Fi networks

# Select the network.

# Log in to the Wi-Fi network ( page 284). Setting up an Internet connection using busi ness telephony Requirements:

R For use with a mobile phone:

-

The mobile phone supports the Blue tooth SAP profile (SIM Access Profile)

(see manufacturer's operating instruc tions). R Using a SIM card:

-

A SIM card is inserted in the card slot in the telephone module ( page 320). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only-

The SIM card PIN is entered in the multi media system. The Internet connection using business teleph ony can be restricted or not function if:

R the mobile phone is switched off R the mobile phone is only connected in the Hands-Free Profile and not as an SAP tele phone Multimedia system:

, System . Connectivity . Inter-

net settings

# Select mobile phone or SIM card.

# To select the predefined access data of the mobile phone network provider: select Predefined settings. A list of countries appears.

# Select the country of your mobile phone net work provider. The list of available providers appears.

# Select your mobile phone network provider. When an overview of the provider settings appears, make the necessary settings.

# Select Confirm settings.

# To manually set the access data of the mobile phone network provider: select Manual settings. An overview of the provider settings appears.

# Set access data.

# Select Confirm settings.

% Set the access data in accordance with your data package. Otherwise, additional costs may be incurred. You can contact your mobile phone network provider to obtain the precise access data. Setting up an Internet connection via Blue tooth Requirements:

R A mobile phone is connected to the multime dia system via Bluetooth ( page 319). To connect via Bluetooth, the mobile phone supports one of the following Bluetooth pro files:

R DUN (Dial-Up Networking) Multimedia system 341 R PAN (Personal Area Network) The Internet connection via Bluetooth is restric ted or does not function if:

R the mobile phone is switched off R the mobile phone network coverage is insuf ficient R mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile phone R the Bluetooth function on the multimedia system is switched off and the mobile phone is to be connected via Bluetooth R the Bluetooth function is switched off on the mobile phone and the mobile phone is to be connected via Bluetooth R neither the mobile phone network nor the mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a telephone and an Internet connection R the mobile phone has not been enabled for Internet access via Bluetooth If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system for the first time via Bluetooth, you will Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 342 Multimedia system be assisted through the process of setting up an Internet connection. The Internet connection can also be configured manually. Further information can be obtained at http://

www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Multimedia system:

, System . Connectivity . Inter-

net settings Bluetooth connection via PAN

# Select the mobile phone. The Internet connection is established. Switching the Bluetooth profile Requirements:

R The mobile phone supports the DUN and PAN Bluetooth profiles. Multimedia system:

, System . Connectivity . Inter-

net settings

# To switch from DUN to PAN: select the mobile phone.

# Select .

# Select Change configuration.

# Activate O Automatic configuration. The Internet connection is automatically con figured using the PAN Bluetooth profile.

# To switch from PAN to DUN: select the mobile phone.

# Select .

# Select Change configuration.

# Deactivate Automatic configuration.

# Select Configure settings using COMAND.

# Configuring the Internet connection using preset or manual access data ( page 341).

% While using business telephony, it is not pos sible to switch Bluetooth profiles. Editing access data Requirements:

R The mobile phone supports the Bluetooth DUN profile. Multimedia system:

, System . Connectivity . Inter-

net settings

# Highlight the mobile phone.

# Select .

# Select Change configuration.

# For mobile phones with PAN and DUN:

select Configure settings using COMAND.

# Configure the Internet connection using pre set or manual access data ( page 341). Cancelling Internet access permission for a mobile phone Multimedia system:

, System . Connectivity . Inter-

net settings

# Highlight the mobile phone. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Select .

# Select Delete configuration.

# Select Yes. Displaying mobile phone details Multimedia system:

, System . Connectivity . Inter-

net settings

# Highlight the mobile phone.

# Select .

# Select Details. Establishing an Internet connection Multimedia system:

, Connect

# For example, select z Browser.

% The multimedia system usually establishes the Internet connection automatically. If the multimedia system is not connected to the Internet, the Internet connection is estab lished when an Internet application is used.

% The availability of web browsers is country-

dependent. Connection status Connection status overview 1 Display of existing connection and the recep tion field strength of the connected Blue tooth device Displaying the connection status Multimedia system:

, System . Connectivity

# Select Internet status.

% When connected via Wi-Fi or a Bluetooth device, the approximate data volume trans mitted is displayed. The exact values can be Multimedia system 343 requested from your mobile phone network provider.

% In the case of a connection via the communi cation module the following status informa tion is shown:

R Type of network R Status online/offline Web browser Calling up a web page

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 344 Multimedia system

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Multimedia system:

, Con-

nect . z Browser . z Enter URL

# Enter a web address.

% The function is country-dependent.

# To finish the entry and call up the web site: select . Showing/hiding the web browser menu If you call up a website by selecting a link, for example, the web browser menu is hidden.

# To show/hide: press the % button.

% Websites are not shown while the vehicle is in motion. Web browser overview 1 URL entry 2 Bookmarks 3 Web page, back 4 Web page, forwards 5 Options 6 Closes the browser Calling up web browser options Multimedia system:

, Con-

nect . z Browser . Z Options The following functions are available:

R Refresh page/Cancel R Zoom R Browser settings R Delete browser data

# Select an option.

# Make the desired changes to the settings. Calling up the web browser settings Multimedia system:

, Con-

nect . z Browser . Z Options . Bro wser settings The following functions are available:

R Block popups R Enable Javascript R Enable cookies Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Activate O or deactivate the function. Deleting browser data Multimedia system:

, Con-

nect . z Browser . Z Options . Del ete browser data The following options are available:

R All R Cache R Cookies R Entered URLs R Form data

# Select an option.

# Select Yes. Managing bookmarks Multimedia system:

, Con-

nect . z Browser . Bookmarks Selecting a bookmark

# Select an entry. Creating a bookmark

# Select Add new bookmark.

# Enter a URL and a name.

# Select . Editing a bookmark

# Highlight a bookmark.

# Select p.

# Select Edit.

# Enter a URL and a name.

# Select . Deleting a bookmark

# Highlight a bookmark.

# Select p.

# Select Delete.

# Select Yes. Closing the browser Multimedia system:

, Connect . z Browser

# Select Close browser. Multimedia system 345 Internet radio Calling up the Internet radio Requirements:

R There is an account on http://

www.mercedes.me. R The Internet radio service is activated. R The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. R A fast Internet connection for data transmis sion free of interference. The services are country-dependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-

Benz service centre. Multimedia system:

, Radio . Radio source

# Select TuneIn radio. The Internet radio display appears. The last station set starts playing.

% The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 346 Multimedia system Internet radio overview 1 Internet radio provider 2 Selected category 3 Display (if connected to private user account) 4 Data transfer rate 5 Current station is stored as a favourite 6 Additional information on the current station Selecting and connecting to Internet radio stations Multimedia system:

, Radio . Radio source . TuneIn radio . Search

# Select a category.

# Select a station. The connection is established automatically. or

# Select Enter address or POI.

# Enter a station name using the entry field.

% A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using Internet radio. Saving/deleting Internet radio stations as favourites Multimedia system:

, Radio . Radio source . TuneIn radio

# Select a station.

# Press and hold the central control element until an audible signal sounds. The symbol appears by the station name.

# Select Favourites. The list of saved favourite stations appears. or

# Create an account for the online provider

(TuneIn radio) and then log in on the multi media system. Your favourites are imported to the multime dia system. Deleting favourites

# Select Favourites.

# Select a station.

# Press and hold the central control element until an audible signal sounds. The symbol by the station name disap pears. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Setting the Internet radio options Multimedia system:

, Radio . Radio source . TuneIn radio . Z Options The following options are available:

R Select stream: select the stream quality. R Login to TuneIn account: log in to your TuneIn user account. R Log out of account: log out of your TuneIn user account.

# Select an option. Media Audio mode Information on the audio mode

& WARNING Risk of distraction when han dling data storage media If you handle a data storage medium while driving, your attention is diverted from the traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only handle a data storage medium when the vehicle is stationary. Permissible file systems:

R FAT32 R exFAT R NTFS Permissible data storage medium:

R SD card R USB storage device R iPod/iPhone R MTP devices R Bluetooth audio equipment

% Observe the following notes:

R The multimedia system supports a total of up to 50,000 files. R Data storage media up to 2 TB are sup ported (32bit address space). Multimedia system 347 Supported formats:

R MP3 R WMA R AAC R WAV R FLAC R ALAC

% Observe the following notes:

R Due to the large variety of available music files regarding encoders, sampling rates and data rates, playback cannot always be guaranteed. R Due to the wide range of USB devices available on the market, playback cannot be guaranteed for all USB devices. R Copy-protected music files or DRM encrypted files cannot be played back. R MP3 players must support Media Trans fer Protocol (MTP). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 348 Multimedia system Notes on copyright Audio files that you create or reproduce yourself for playback are generally subject to copyright protection. In many countries, reproductions, even for private use, are not permitted without the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make sure that you know about the applicable copy right regulations and that you comply with these. Switching on media mode Multimedia system:

, Media . Media sources

# Select a media source. Playable music files are played back. Inserting/removing an SD card

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury from swal lowing SD cards SD cards are small parts. They could be swallowed and lead to chok ing.

# Keep SD cards out of the reach of chil dren.

# Seek medical attention immediately if an SD card has been swallowed.

* NOTE Damage due to high temperatures High temperatures may damage the SD card.

# Remove the SD card after use and take it out of the vehicle. Multimedia system:

, Media . Media sources . Mem. card Inserting The multimedia connection unit is located in the stowage compartment under the armrest.

# Insert the SD memory card into the SD card slot until it engages. The side with the con tacts must face downwards. Playable music files are played back. Removing

# Press the SD card.

# Remove the SD card. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Overview of the audio mode Multimedia system 349 1 Active data storage medium 2 Album cover 3 Track, artist, album 4 Track number and number of tracks in the track list 5 Search 6 Playback control 7 Media sources 8 Sound 9 Options Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 350 Multimedia system Connecting USB devices

* NOTE Damage caused by high tempera tures High temperatures can damage USB devices.

# Remove the USB device after use and take it out of the vehicle. The multimedia connection unit is found in the stowage compartment under the armrest and has two USB ports. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, additional USB ports can be found in the stowage compartment of the centre console and in the rear passenger compartment.

# Connect the USB device to the USB port. Playable music files are played back only if the corresponding media display is activated.

% Depending on the vehicle equipment there is an additional USB port in the rear passenger compartment. Ports that are labelled with a battery symbol can only be used to charge USB devices. Selecting a track in the media playback Multimedia system:

, Media Selecting a track by skipping to a track

# To skip backwards or forwards to a track: navigate up or down. Selecting a track using the current track list

# Select .

# Select Current track list.

# Select a track. Selecting playback options Multimedia system:

, Media . Z Options Playback mode

# Select Random playback of the current track list. The current track list is played in random order.

# Select Random playback of the current medium. All tracks on the active data storage medium are played in random order.

# Select Normal track sequence. The current track list is played in the order it appears on the data storage medium. Controlling media playback Multimedia system:

, Media . Y Playback control A bar with playback controls is shown.

# To pause playback: press the touchpad. The symbol is displayed.

# To resume playback: press the touchpad again. The symbol is displayed. To fast forward/rewind

# To move on the timeline: swipe left or right on the touchpad. To hide the playback controls

# Press the % button. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Media search Starting the media search Multimedia system:

, Media . Search Depending on the connected media sources and files, the following categories are listed:

R Current track list R Keyword search R Playlists R Artists R Albums R Tracks R Folders R Music genres R Year R Composers R Podcasts (Apple devices) R Audiobooks (Apple devices)

# Select a category.

% The categories are available as soon as the entire media content has been read in and analysed. Media Interface Information about the Media Interface Media Interface is a universal interface for the connection of mobile audio equipment. The mul timedia system has two USB ports. The USB ports are located in the stowage compartment under the armrest. Supported devices The Media Interface allows you to connect the following data storage media:

R iPod Multimedia system 351 R iPhone R MP3 player R USB devices For details and a list of supported devices, visit our website at http://www.mercedes-

benz.com/connect. Follow the instructions in the "Media Interface" section. Switching to Media Interface Multimedia system:

, Media . Media sources

# Connect a data storage medium to the USB port ( page 350).

# Select a media device. Playable music files are played back. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 352 Multimedia system Overview of Media Interface 1 Active data storage medium 2 Album cover 3 Artist, track and album 4 Track number and number of tracks in the track list 5 Search 6 Playback control 7 Media sources 8 Sound Bluetooth audio Information about Bluetooth audio 9 Options Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Before using your Bluetooth audio equipment with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to authorise it ( page 354). Bluetooth audio overview Multimedia system 353 1 Active data storage medium 2 Album cover 3 Track, artist, album 4 Track number and number of tracks in the track list Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 354 Multimedia system 5 Search 6 Playback control Searching for and authorising a Bluetooth audio device Requirements:

R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia system and audio equipment ( page 283). R The audio equipment supports the Blue tooth audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP. R The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices. Multimedia system:

, Media . Media sour-

ces . Bluetooth audio Authorising a new Bluetooth audio device

# Select .

# Select Add new Bluetooth audio device.

# Select Start search on the system. Detected audio equipment is displayed in the device list. 7 Media sources 8 Sound 9 Options

# Select a Bluetooth audio device. Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment. The audio equipment is connected and play back starts. Selecting previously authorised Bluetooth audio equipment

# Select .

# Select a Bluetooth audio device. Establishing a connection from the Blue tooth audio equipment The Bluetooth device name of the multimedia system is MB BLUETOOTH XXXXX.

# Select Search from device.

# Start the authorisation on the audio equip ment (see manufacturer's operating instruc tions). A code is displayed on the multimedia sys tem and on the mobile phone.

# Confirm on both devices if the codes are identical. The audio equipment is connected and play back starts. With some audio equipment, playback must be initially started on the device itself so that the multimedia system can play the audio files.

% Device-specific information on authorising and connecting Bluetooth-capable mobile phones can be obtained at http://

www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Activating Bluetooth audio Multimedia system:

, Media . Media sources

# Select Bluetooth audio. The multimedia system activates the connec ted Bluetooth audio equipment. Selecting the music player on the Bluetooth audio device Multimedia system:

, Media . Media sour-

ces . Bluetooth audio

# Select a Bluetooth audio device. If multiple music players are present on the Bluetooth audio equipment a list appears.

# Select a music player. Playback starts. Searching for a music track on the Blue tooth audio device Multimedia system:

, Media . Media sour-

ces . Bluetooth audio

# Select .

# Select a category. A track list appears.

# Select a track.

% The function is only available when the mobile phone and the music player selected on the mobile phone support this function. Switching Bluetooth audio equipment via NFC Requirements:

R Observe the notes on using NFC

( page 323). R The Bluetooth audio overview is displayed

( page 353). Multimedia system 355

# Lightly press the NFC area on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). If the mobile phone has already been author ised on the multimedia system as Bluetooth audio equipment, it is now connected. If the mobile phone is authorised on the mul timedia system as Bluetooth audio equip ment for the first time, it is connected after confirming the instructions for the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Disconnecting Bluetooth audio equipment Multimedia system:

, Telephone . Media sources

# Select a Bluetooth audio device.

# Select Deauthorise.

# Select Yes. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 356 Multimedia system Radio Switching on the radio Multimedia system:

, Radio

# Alternatively: press the $ button. The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last frequency band selected. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Radio overview Multimedia system 357 1 Active frequency band 2 Station name or set frequency 3 Artist, title, album and radio text 4 Station list 5 Presets 6 Radio source 7 Sound 8 Tag this song 9 Options Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 358 Multimedia system Setting the frequency band Multimedia system:

, Radio . Radio source

# Select a frequency band. Selecting a radio station Multimedia system:

, Radio

# Navigate up or down. Calling up the radio station list Multimedia system:

, Radio .

# Select a station.

# Select Move highlighted station.

# Select a memory preset. Deleting stations:

# Highlight a preset entry and navigate to the left.

# Select Delete highlighted station.

# Select Yes. Calling up a slide show (FM/DAB radio mode) Multimedia system:

, Radio . Radio source . FM/

DAB radio stations Searching for radio stations using station names or direct frequency entry Multimedia system:

, Radio . .

# Enter a station name or frequency.

# Select a. The search results are displayed.

# Select a station. Storing radio stations Multimedia system:

, Radio . Presets

# Select Store current station in the presets. Editing radio station presets Multimedia system:

, Radio . Presets Moving stations:

# Highlight a preset entry and navigate to the left. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Slide show 1 displays additional information provided by the station as an image. This can include logos, album covers, music tracks, pro grammes, news or service information, for exam ple. The additional information is shown in full-

screen mode by selecting 2.

# To activate full-screen mode: select #

Full screen.

# To deactivate full-screen mode: select

%. Activating or deactivating the frequency fix function Multimedia system:

, Radio . Z Options . Frequency fix

# Activate O or deactivate the function. If the function is activated, the set frequency is kept even if the reception is poor. Tagging music tracks Multimedia system:

, Radio If radio stations provide the relevant information, this function allows you to transfer information on the music track currently playing to an Apple device. You can then purchase the audio file from the iTunes Store.

# Select Tag this song. The track information is saved. Switching traffic announcements on/off Multimedia system:

, System . Audio . Navigation and traffic announcements

# Activate O or deactivate the function. or

# Press and hold the 8 button on the multi function steering wheel. Multimedia system 359 Setting the traffic information service vol ume increase Multimedia system:

, System . Audio . Navigation and traffic announcements

# Select Traffic announcements volume increase.

# Select No increase or a value. Activating/deactivating radio text Multimedia system:

, Radio . Z Options . Display radio text information

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Sound Tone settings Information about the sound system The sound system has a total output of 100 W and is equipped with 7 speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 360 Multimedia system Calling up the sound menu Multimedia system:

, Media . Sound The following functions are available:

R Equaliser R Balance and Fader R Automatic volume adjustment R Other sound settings

# Select a sound menu. Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set tings Multimedia system:

, Media . Sound . Equaliser

# Select Treble, Mid or Bass.

# Change the settings. Activating/deactivating automatic volume adjustment Multimedia system:

, Media . Sound . Automatic vol-

ume adjustment Automatic volume adjustment compensates for differing volumes when changing between audio sources.

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Adjusting the balance/fader Multimedia system:

, Media . Sound . Balance and Fader

# Adjust the balance and fader.

# To exit the menu: press the % button. Burmester surround sound system Information about the Burmester surround sound system The Burmester surround sound system has a total output of 590 W and is equipped with 13 speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. Calling up the sound menu in the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system:

, Media . Sound The following functions are available:

R Equaliser R Balance and Fader R Automatic volume adjustment R Surround sound R Sound focus R Other sound settings

# Select a function. Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings on the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system:

, Media . Sound . Equaliser

# Select Treble, Mid or Bass.

# Set the desired values. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Multimedia system 361 Activating/deactivating volume adjustment in the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system:

, Media . Sound . Automatic vol-

ume adjustment Automatic volume adjustment compensates for differing volumes when changing between audio sources.

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Adjusting the balance/fader in the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system:

, Media . Sound . Balance and Fader

# Adjust the balance and fader.

# To exit the menu: press the % button. Switching surround sound on/off in the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system:

, Media . Sound . Surround sound

# Activate O or deactivate the function. Adjusting the sound focus in the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system:

, Media . Sound . Sound focus

# Adjust the sound focus. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 362 Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the instrument display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service message using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. You can obtain further information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Displaying the service due date On-board computer:

, Service . ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed.

# To exit the display: press the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Make sure to observe the following further rela ted subject:

R Operating the on-board computer

( page 261). Carrying out maintenance work at regular intervals

* NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates Service work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.

# Always observe the prescribed service intervals.

# Always have the prescribed service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on nor mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work will need to be performed more often if the vehi cle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions:

R regular city driving with frequent intermedi ate stops R mainly short-distance driving R frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces R when the engine is often left idling for long periods R operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur ther information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only The active bonnet is not available in all coun tries. Resetting the active bonnet

& WARNING Danger of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart ment Certain component parts in the engine com partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Let the engine cool down and only touch the component parts described below:

Battery disconnection periods The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can only calculate the service due date when the battery is connected.

# Note down the service due date displayed on the instrument display before disconnecting the battery ( page 362). Engine compartment Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Operation of the active bonnet (pedestrian protection) In certain accident situations, the risk of injury to pedestrians can be reduced by the actuation of the active bonnet. The rear area of the engine bonnet is raised by approximately 85 mm. For the drive to the workshop, reset the trig gered active bonnet yourself. After the active bonnet has been triggered, pedestrian protection may be limited. A qualified specialist workshop must re-instate the full functionality of the active bonnet. Maintenance and care 363

# With your hand flat, push down active bonnet 1 in the area around the hinges on both sides (arrows). The engine bonnet must engage in position.

# If the active bonnet can be raised slightly at the rear in the area of the hinges, repeat the step until it engages correctly. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 364 Maintenance and care Opening/closing the bonnet

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driv ing with the engine bonnet unlocked An unlocked engine bonnet may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view.

# Never unlock the engine bonnet when driving.

# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the engine bonnet When opening or closing the engine bonnet, it may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the engine bonnet's range of movement.

# Only open or close the engine bonnet when there are no persons in the engine bonnet's range of movement.

& WARNING Danger of burns when open ing the bonnet If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine com partment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts Certain components in the engine compart ment may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the cooler fan. Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment:

# Switch the ignition off.

# Never touch the danger zone surround ing moving component parts, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.

# Remove jewellery and watches.

# Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

& WARNING Risk of injury from touching component parts under voltage The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch component parts which are under voltage, you could receive an electric shock.

# Never touch components of the ignition system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.

& WARNING Danger of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart ment Certain component parts in the engine com partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Let the engine cool down and only touch the component parts described below:

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers while the engine bon net is open When the engine bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage.

# Always switch off the windscreen wip ers and ignition before opening the engine bonnet.

# To open: pull lever 1 to release the engine bonnet. Maintenance and care 365

# Push bonnet catch 1 upwards and lift the bonnet by approximately 40 cm.

# To close: lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm.

# If the bonnet can still be lifted slightly, open the bonnet again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 366 Maintenance and care Engine oil Checking the engine oil level using the oil dipstick The waiting time before checking the oil level when the engine is at normal operating tempera ture is five minutes.

& WARNING Danger of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart ment Certain component parts in the engine com partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Let the engine cool down and only touch the component parts described below:

Requirements:

the engine must have an oil dipstick. If not, the engine oil level can be checked only with the on-

board computer . Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed in the engine compartment in different locations.

# Park the vehicle on a level surface.

# Pull oil dipstick 1 out and wipe off.

# Slowly slide oil dipstick 1 into the guide tube to the stop, and pull it out again after approximately three seconds. R Oil level is correct: oil level is between 2 and 3. R Oil level too low: oil level is at 3 or below. R Oil level too high: oil level is above 2.

# If the oil level is too low, top up with 1 litre of engine oil.

# If the oil level is too high, drain off excess engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Checking the engine oil level with an on-

board computer Requirements:

the engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style. In order to receive a result as quickly as possi ble:

R warm up the engine. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R park the vehicle on a level surface. R leave the engine running at idle speed. On-board computer:

, Service . Engine oil level:

You will see one of the following messages in the multifunction display:

# Engine oil level Measuring now: measure ment of the oil level is not yet possible. Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving.

# Engine oil level OK and the bar display for indicating the oil level in the multifunction display is green and is between "min" and

"max": the oil level is correct.

# Engine oil level Add 1.0 l and the bar display for indicating the oil level in the multifunction display is orange and is below "min": top up with 1 l of engine oil.

# Reduce engine oil level and the bar display for indicating the oil level in the multifunction display is orange and is above "max": drain off the excess engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# For engine oil level turn on ignition: switch on the ignition to check the engine oil level.

# Engine oil level System inoperative: sensor faulty or not inserted. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Engine oil level System currently unavail.:

close the bonnet. Topping up engine oil

& WARNING Danger of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart ment Certain component parts in the engine com partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Let the engine cool down and only touch the component parts described below:

Maintenance and care 367

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart ment, it may ignite.

# Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the filler opening.

# Allow the engine to cool off and thor oughly clean the engine oil from compo nent parts before starting the vehicle.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi tives

# Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.

# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.

# Do not use additives. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 368 Maintenance and care

# Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change.

* NOTE Damage caused by topping up too much engine oil Topping up too much engine oil can cause damage to the engine or the catalytic con verter.

# Have excess engine oil removed at a qualified specialist workshop. Checking the coolant level

& WARNING Danger of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart ment Certain component parts in the engine com partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Let the engine cool down and only touch the component parts described below:

& WARNING Danger of burns when open ing the bonnet If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# Turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.

# Top up the engine oil.

# Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise as far as it will go.

# Check the oil level again ( page 366). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# In the event of a fire in the engine com partment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant The engine cooling system is pressurised, particularly when the engine is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out.

# Let the engine cool down before open ing the cap.

# When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses.

# Open the cap slowly to release pres sure. Maintenance and care 369

# Continue turning cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it. The coolant level is correct:

R if the engine is cold, up to marker bar 2 R if the engine is warm, up to 1.5 cm over marker bar 2

# If necessary, top up with coolant that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. R Further information on coolant

( page 436).

# Park the vehicle on a level surface.

# Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 70 C.

# Slowly turn cap 1 anti-clockwise to release overpressure. Topping up the windscreen washer system

& WARNING Danger of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart ment Certain component parts in the engine com partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 370 Maintenance and care

# Let the engine cool down and only touch the component parts described below:

# Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

& WARNING Danger of burns when open ing the bonnet If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine com partment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

# Remove cap 1 by the tab.

# Top up the washer fluid. Keeping the air inlet free

# Keep the air inlet between the bonnet and the windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves. Cleaning and care Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power after washing the vehicle Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle.

# After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored. To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand:

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the HOLD function are deactivated. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only R the 360 Camera or the reversing camera is switched off. R the side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed. R the blower for the ventilation/heating is switched off. R the windscreen wiper switch is in position g. R in car washes with a conveyor system: neu tral i is engaged. R the key is at a distance of at least 3 m away from the vehicle, otherwise the boot lid could open unintentionally.

% Vehicles with automatic transmission: if you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the key is located in the vehicle. The j gear is otherwise automatically engaged.

% If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise. Information on using a high-pressure cleaner

& WARNING Risk of an accident when using high-pressure cleaners with circu lar jet nozzles The water jet of a circular jet nozzle (dirt grinder) can cause externally invisible dam age to the tyres or chassis parts. Components damaged in this way may unex pectedly fail.

# Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle.

# Have damaged tyres or chassis parts replaced immediately. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol lowing when using a high-pressure cleaner:

R keep the key at least 3 m away from the vehi cle. Otherwise the boot lid could open unin tentionally. R maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the vehicle. Maintenance and care 371 R vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around whilst cleaning. the water tempera ture of the high-pressure cleaner must not exceed 60 C. R observe the information on the correct dis tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper ating instructions. R do not point the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner directly at sensitive parts such as tyres, slits, electrical components, batteries, light bulbs and ventilation slots. Washing the vehicle by hand Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays.

# Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 372 Maintenance and care

# Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.

# Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois. Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care Observe the following information:

Cleaning and care Paintwork R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gen tly with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. Maintenance and care 373 Avoiding paintwork damage R Do not attach stickers, films or similar. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 374 Maintenance and care Cleaning and care Avoiding paintwork damage Matt finish R Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels. R Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engi neering standards. R Do not use car wash programmes with a final hot wax treatment. R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax. R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on cleaning decorative foil Observe the notes on matt finish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matt finish paint work care" ( page 373). They also apply to matt decorative foils. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Observe the following information:

Cleaning R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved my Mercedes-Benz. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably. R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative foil is dull: use the paint cleaner recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash. Maintenance and care 375 Avoiding damage to the decorative foil R The service life and colouring of decorative foils are impaired by:

sunlight temperature, e.g. hot air blower

-

- weather conditions

-

stone chippings and dirt chemical cleaning agents oily products

-

-

-

R Do not use polish on matt decorative foil. Polishing will have the effect of shining the foil-wrapped surface. R Do not treat matt or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif ferences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil after removing a decorative foil.

% Have work or repairs to decorative foils car ried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. in a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 376 Maintenance and care Notes on care of car parts

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windscreen wipers are switched on while the windscreen is being cleaned If the windscreen wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. Observe the following information:

# Always switch off the windscreen wip ers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades.

& WARNING Risk of burns from tailpipes and tailpipe trim The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

# Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trim.

# Allow the vehicle parts to cool down before you touch them. Notes on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage Wheels/rims Use water and acid-free wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out. Windows Clean the windows on the inside and outside using a damp cloth and cleaning agents recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows. Wiper blades Fold out the wiper blades and clean them using a damp cloth. Do not clean the wiper blades too often. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Exterior lighting AIRPANEL Notes on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Maintenance and care 377 If the vehicle is very dusty or there are salt deposits in the AIRPANEL mechanics, the adjustment range of the shutters in the radiator trim may be restricted. R Switch on the ignition, and the shutters open automati cally after approximately 120 seconds. R Clean the bearing points of the shutters with a high-pres sure cleaner. When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum dis tance of 30 cm. Sensors Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumper and in the radiator grille with a soft cloth and car shampoo. When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum dis tance of 30 cm. Reversing camera and 360 Camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia system . R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens. Do not use a high-pressure cleaner. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 378 Maintenance and care Tailpipes Trailer hitch Notes on cleaning and care Clean with cleaning agents recommended by Mercedes-Benz, particularly in the winter and after washing the vehicle. R Remove traces of rust on the ball, e.g. with a wire brush. R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth. R After cleaning, oil or grease the ball head lightly. R Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch manufactur er's operating instructions. Avoiding vehicle damage Do not use acidic cleaning agents. Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pressure cleaner or sol vent. Notes on care of the interior

& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol vent-based care products Care and cleaning products containing sol vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away.

# Do not use any care or cleaning prod ucts containing solvents to clean the cockpit.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident.

# Never bleach or dye seat belts. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Observe the following information:

Notes on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage Seat belts Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry seat belts by heating them to over 80 C or exposing them to direct sunlight. Maintenance and care 379 Display Plastic trim Real wood/trim ele ments Roof lining Carpet Clean the surface carefully with a microfibre cloth and TFT/LCD display care product. R Switch off the display and let it cool down. R Do not use any other cleaning products. R Clean with a damp microfibre cloth. R For heavy soiling: use care product recommended by Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar. R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come in contact with the plastic trim. Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes. R Clean with a microfibre cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: use care product recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Clean with a brush or dry shampoo. Use carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 380 Maintenance and care Notes on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth. R Leather care: use leather care agents that have been rec ommended by Mercedes-Benz. Do not allow the leather to become too damp. Do not use a microfibre cloth. Clean with a damp cloth. DINAMICA seat cov ers Artificial leather seat covers Cloth seat covers EASY-PACK boot box Clean with a damp cloth. Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water and allow to dry. Do not use a microfibre cloth. Do not use a microfibre cloth. Do not use any alcohol-based thinners, petrol or abrasive cleaning agents. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Emergency Removing the safety vest The safety vests are located in the safety vest compartments in the driver's and front passenger door stowage compartments.

# Open safety vest bag 1 and pull out the safety vest.

% There are also safety vest compartments in the rear door stowage compartments in which safety vests can be stored. Breakdown assistance 381 The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed. The safety vest must be replaced in the following situations:

R the reflective strips are damaged or dirty R the maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded R the fluorescence has faded 1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature 3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron 5 Do not tumble dry 6 Do not dry clean 7 This is a class 2 vest

# To remove: pull out safety vest bag 1 by loop 2. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 382 Breakdown assistance Warning triangle Removing the warning triangle Setting up the warning triangle First-aid kit (soft-sided) overview

# Fold side reflectors 1 upwards to form a tri angle and attach at the top using upper press-stud 2.

# Fold legs 3 down and out to the side. First-aid kit (soft-sided) 1 is in the boot in the left-hand stowage net.

# Push both sides of warning triangle holder 1 in the direction of the arrow and open it.

# Remove warning triangle 2. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Removing the fire extinguisher

& WARNING Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured fire extinguisher in the driver's footwell A fire extinguisher in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. Moreover, the fire extinguisher can be flung around in the driver's footwell and injure the driver or other vehicle occupants. Always store and secure the fire extinguisher in the bracket during the journey. Do not remove the fire extinguisher while driving. Breakdown assistance 383 Tyres without run-flat characteristics:

# Do not drive on with a flat tyre.

# Change the flat tyre immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tyres with run-flat characteristics:

# Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres). In the event of a flat tyre, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equip ment:

R Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is pos sible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)

( page 384). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the tyre so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit ( page 385).

# Left-hand drive vehicle: pull tab 1 upwards.

# Remove fire extinguisher 2. Flat tyre Notes on flat tyres

& WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tyre A flat tyre severely affects the driving charac teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 384 Breakdown assistance R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown ( page 334). R All vehicles: change the wheel

( page 417).

% The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries. Notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)

& WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode When driving in emergency mode the han dling characteristics are impaired. e.g. when cornering, when accelerating strongly and when braking.

# Do not exceed the specified maximum speed.

# Avoid any abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres as well as driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle.

# Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice:

R banging noise R vehicle vibration R smoke which smells like rubber R continuous ESP intervention R cracks in tyre side walls

# After driving in emergency mode have the rims checked by a qualified special ist workshop with regard to their further use.

# The defective tyre must be replaced in every case. With MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. How ever, the tyre affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tyre. Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning sys tem: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring sys tem: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure mon itoring system. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display:

R Check the tyre for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Driving distance possible in limp-home mode after the pressure loss warning:

Load condition Driving distance pos sible in limp-home mode Partially laden Fully laden 80 km 30 km R The driving distance possible in limp-home mode may vary depending on the driving style. R Maximum permissible speed 80 km/h. If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, you can use a stand ard tyre as a temporary measure. TIREFIT kit storage location Plug-in hybrid: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec ognise dangers. The TIREFIT kit is located under the boot floor. 1 Tyre sealant bottle 2 Tyre inflation compressor

% You can find information on the power cate gory and/or electrical data on the back of the tyre inflation compressor. R LK2 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre inflation compressor and approximately 1.6 m above the ground, the following sound pressure levels apply:

R Emission sound pressure level LPA 83 dB (A) R Sound power level LWA 91 dB (A) Breakdown assistance 385 The tyre inflation compressor is mainte nance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Using the TIREFIT kit Requirements:

Required tools:

R tyre sealant bottle R TIREFIT sticker R tyre inflation compressor TIREFIT kit storage location: ( page 385) You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perfora tion damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -20 C.

& WARNING Risk of accident when using tyre sealant In the following situations, the tyre sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 386 Breakdown assistance tance, as it is unable to seal the tyre prop erly:

R there are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those previously mentioned. R the wheel rim is damaged. R you have driven at very low tyre pres sures or on a flat tyre.

# Do not drive on.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tyre sealant Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and cau ses irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep the tyre sealant away from children. Observe the following if you come into con tact with the tyre sealant:

# Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin using water immediately. Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a quali fied specialist workshop every five years.

# Do not remove any foreign objects which have entered the tyre.

# If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thor oughly rinse them using clean water immediately.

# If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thoroughly rinse out your mouth imme diately and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.

# Change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant immedi ately.

# If an allergic reaction occurs, seek med ical attention immediately.

* NOTE Overheating due to the tyre infla tion compressor running too long

# Do not run the tyre inflation compres sor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.

# Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.

# Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out of the tyre inflation compressor housing.

# Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of tyre sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages.

# Place tyre sealant bottle 1 head downwards into recess 2 of the tyre inflation compres sor.

# Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the faulty tyre.

# Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7.

# Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your vehicle.

# Switch the ignition on.

# Press on and off switch 3 on the tyre infla tion compressor. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pum ped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Breakdown assistance 387 Do not switch off the tyre inflation compres sor during this phase.

# Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/

29 psi). If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected areas as quickly as possible. It is pref erable to use clean water. If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy lene. If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been ach ieved:

# Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.

# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 388 Breakdown assistance

# Drive forwards or reverse very slowly for approximately 10 m.

# Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/

29 psi).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being ach ieved If the specified tyre pressure is not achieved after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair braking and handling characteristics.

# Do not drive on.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.

& WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tyres A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds.

# Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.

# Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tyre that has been sealed using tyre sealant.

# Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant 80 km/h.

# Affix the upper section of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster in a location where it will be easily seen by the driver. If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been achieved:

# Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.

* NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant After use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the filling hose.

# Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre sponsible disposal Tyre sealant contains pollutants.

# Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

# Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle.

# Pull away immediately.

# Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure using the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being ach ieved If the specified tyre pressure is not achieved after a brief drive, the tyre is too badly dam aged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair braking and handling characteristics.

# Do not drive on.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Countries that have Mercedes-Benz Service24h: you will find a sticker with the tele phone number, e.g. on the Bpillar on the driver's side.

# Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pres sure table on the fuel filler flap for values.

# To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor.

# To reduce the tyre pressure: press pres sure release button 1 next to manometer 2.

# When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tyre.

# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre.

# Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tyre sealant bot tle. Breakdown assistance 389

# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work shop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there. Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat tery Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can lead to function restrictions in safety-rel evant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS

(anti-lock braking system) or ESP (Elec tronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations:

R when braking R in the event of abrupt steering manoeu vres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 390 Breakdown assistance

# In the event of a short circuit or a simi lar incident, contact a qualified special ist workshop immediately.

# Do not continue driving.

# Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. R Further information on ABS ( page 197) R Further information on ESP( page 198) For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-

Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be dam aged in the event of an accident. All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-

ion battery

& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec trostatic charge Electrostatic charge can cause sparks which may ignite the highly flammable gas mixture in the battery.

# To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the bat tery. The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.

& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid Battery acid is caustic.

# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

# Do not lean over the battery.

# Do not inhale battery gases.

# Keep children away from the battery.

# Immediately rinse battery acid off thor oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately. All vehicles

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat teries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.

#

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. If you have to disconnect the 12 volt battery, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion. Wear safety glasses. Keep children away. Observe this Owner's Manual. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corro sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. If you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time:

R activate standby mode, or R connect the battery to a battery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz, or R consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery Breakdown assistance 391 Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec tion point in the engine compartment.

* NOTE Damage to the battery from over voltage When charging using a battery charger with out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged.

# Only use battery chargers with a maxi mum charging voltage of 14.4 V. All other vehicles When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec tion point in the engine compartment. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 392 Breakdown assistance

* NOTE Damaging the battery through overvoltage When using a battery charger without a maxi mum charging voltage, the battery or the vehicle electronics may be damaged.

# Only use battery chargers with a maxi mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro gen gas igniting A battery generates hydrogen gas during the charging process. If there is a short circuit or sparks start to form, there is a danger of the hydrogen gas igniting.

# Make sure that the positive terminal of the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.

# Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.

# When connecting and disconnecting the battery, you must observe the descri bed order for the battery clamps.

# When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect bat tery terminals with identical polarity.

# During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for con necting and disconnecting the jump lead.

# Do not connect or disconnect the bat tery clamps while the engine is running.

& WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explo sive gas mixture.

# Avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking.

# Make sure that there is sufficient venti lation during the charging process and during starting assistance.

# Do not lean over a battery. If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has fro zen.

& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro zen battery A discharged battery may freeze at tempera tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charg ing, battery gas may be released.

# Always thaw a frozen battery out first before charging it or performing start ing assistance. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. It is recommended that you have a thawed bat tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Breakdown assistance 393 Charging the 12 V battery Requirements:

R The vehicle is secured with the electric park ing brake. R Automatic transmission: the transmission is in position j. R The ignition and all electrical consumers are switched off. R The engine bonnet is open. All vehicles

* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel.

# Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine. Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery:

R Only use undamaged jump lead/charging cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump lead/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start connec tion point. R The jump lead/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running. R Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. R Keep away from fire and naked flames. R Do not lean over the battery. Observe the additional following points when charging the battery:

R Only use battery chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instruc tions before charging the battery. Observe the additional following points during starting assistance:

R Starting assistance may only be provided using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Petrol engine: only accept starting assis tance if the engine and exhaust system are cold. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 394 Breakdown assistance

# Slide cover 1 of positive clamp 2 on the jump-starting connection point in the direc tion of the arrow.

# Connect positive clamp 2 on your vehicle to the positive pole of the donor battery using the jump lead/charging cable. Always begin with positive clamp 2 on your own vehicle first.

# During the starting assistance proce dure: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed.

# Connect the negative pole of the donor bat tery and earth point 3 of your own vehicle by using the jump lead/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery first.

# During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle.

# During the charging process: start the charging process.

# During starting assistance: let the engines run for several minutes.

# During starting assistance: before discon necting the jump lead, switch on an electrical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting. When the starting assistance/charging process is complete:

# First, remove the jump lead/charging cable from earth point 3 and negative pole of the donor battery, then from positive clamp 2 and positive pole of the donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle first.

# After removing the jump lead/charging cable, close cover 1 of positive clamp 2. Further information can be obtained at a quali fied specialist workshop. Replacing the 12 V battery

# Observe the notes on the 12 V battery

( page 389). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself:

R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery which meets the specific vehicle require ments. The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lith ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lith ium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow fittings or terminal covers from the battery being replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always con nected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Fit any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. R Make sure that detachable parts are recon nected in the same way. Tow-starting or towing away Permitted towing methods Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. Breakdown assistance 395

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow ing away incorrectly

# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 396 Breakdown assistance Permitted towing methods Vehicle equipment/towing method Vehicles with manual transmission Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised Vehicles with automatic transmis sion Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h No Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the centre position with a steering wheel lock. 4MATIC vehicles Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h No No Towing with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company.

# Make sure that the battery is connected and charged. Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground

# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods ( page 395). Observe the following points when the battery is discharged:

R the engine cannot be started R the electric parking brake cannot be released or applied R vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmission cannot be shifted to position i or j. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only% Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the automatic transmission cannot be shif ted to position i, or the multifunction dis play in the instrument cluster does not show anything, have the vehicle transported away

( page 398). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transporta tion.

* NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis tances The drivetrain could be damaged when tow ing at excessively high speeds or over long distances.

# A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded.

# A towing distance of 50 km must not be exceeded.

& WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy

# Fit the towing eye ( page 400).

# Fasten the tow bar. Breakdown assistance 397 If the vehicle being tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass, the following situations can occur:

R the towing eye may become detached. R the car/trailer combination may swerve or even overturn.

# If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permissible gross mass of your own vehicle. If a vehicle must be tow started or towed away, its permissible gross mass must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.

# Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden tification plate ( page 426).

# Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not open the driver's door or front passenger door, otherwise the automatic transmission automatically shifts to position j.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec tion

# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.

# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism

( page 80).

# Do not activate the HOLD function.

# Deactivate tow-away protection ( page 97).

# Deactivate Active Brake Assist ( page 207).

# Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the automatic transmission to position i.

# Release the electric parking brake. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 398 Breakdown assistance

& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi ted safety-related functions during the towing process Safety-related functions are limited or no lon ger available in the following situations:

R the ignition is switched off. R the brake system or power steering sys tem is malfunctioning. R the energy supply or the on-board electri cal system is malfunctioning. When your vehicle is then towed away, signif icantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required.

# Use a tow bar.

# Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely, before towing the vehicle away.

* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged.

# Pull away slowly and smoothly. Loading the vehicle for transport

# Observe the notes on towing away

( page 396).

# Connect the tow bar to the towing eye to load the vehicle.

% You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer hitch.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the automatic transmission to position i.

% Vehicles with automatic transmission:

the automatic transmission may be locked in position j in the event of damage to the electrical system. To shift to i, provide the on-board electrical system with power

( page 393).

# Load the vehicle onto the transporter.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the automatic transmission to position j.

# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle and prevent it from rolling away.

# Only secure the vehicle by the wheels. Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System PLUS)

& WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS The reduced damping forces on the vehicle being transported can cause the vehicle/

trailer combination to start to swing. As a result, when transporting vehicles with the Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/trailer combination may start to skid. Consequently, you could lose control of your vehicle. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# When transporting, ensure that:

R the vehicle has been loaded onto the transporter correctly R the vehicle is secured at all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps R the maximum permissible speed of 60 km/h is not exceeded when transporting

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur ing it incorrectly

# After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

# A minimum distance of 20 cm upwards and 10 cm downwards must be kept to the transport platform.

# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading. 4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission Towing eye storage location Breakdown assistance 399 Towing eye 1 is attached to the edge of the boot under the boot floor.

# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to incorrect positioning

# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi cle. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 400 Breakdown assistance Fitting the towing eye

# Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and remove.

# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten. Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a bracket at the back for the towing eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch.

% Make sure that cover 1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect use of the towing eye When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc ess.

# Only use the towing eye to tow away or tow start the vehicle. Tow starting the vehicle (emergency engine start) Vehicles with automatic transmission

* NOTE Damage to the automatic trans mission due to tow-starting The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow-starting vehicles with automatic transmission.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa ded. This could result in a fire.

# Always replace faulty fuses with speci fied new fuses containing the correct amperage. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Breakdown assistance 401

* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect fuses Incorrect fuses may cause damage to electri cal components or systems.

# Only use Mercedes-Benz approved fuses with the correct fuse rating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the col our and fuse rating. For engine compartment and boot fuses, only use those fuses marked with an "S". The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the boot ( page 403).

* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction.

# When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box.

# When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned cor rectly on the fuse box. R Fuse box in the boot on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel ( page 403) If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special ist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:

R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched off. R The ignition is switched off. The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes:

R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side ( page 401) R Fuse box on the driver's side of the dash board ( page 402) R Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell

( page 402) Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment Requirements:

R You need a dry cloth and a screwdriver. Observe the notes on electrical fuses

( page 400). Opening

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers while the engine bon net is open When the engine bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage.

# Always switch off the windscreen wip ers and ignition before opening the engine bonnet. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 402 Breakdown assistance

# Insert lid 3 into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box.

# Fold down lid 3 of the fuse box and tighten screws 4.

# Insert cover 1 on both sides.

# Turn clip 2 on cover 1 one quarter-turn to the right.

# Close the bonnet. Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit The fuse box is on the side of the dashboard under a cover.

# Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for further information. Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell Observe the notes on electrical fuses

( page 400).

# Turn clip 2 on cover 1 a quarter-turn to the left.

# Pull cover 1 upwards in the direction of the arrow.

# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.

# Loosen screws 4, remove fuse box lid 3 from the top. Closing

# Check whether the seal is positioned cor rectly in lid 3. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Breakdown assistance 403

# Fold cover 1 down in the direction of the arrow. The fuse allocation chart is in a recess on the side of the fuse box.

# Open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it. Opening and closing the fuse box in the boot Observe the notes on electrical fuses

( page 400). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 404 Wheels and tyres Notes on noise or unusual handling charac teristics While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre dam age could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres

& WARNING Risk of accident from dam aged tyres Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle.

# Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg ularly, at least once a month or as required, e.g. prior to a long journey or driving off-road:

R Check the tyre pressure ( page 405). R Visually inspect tyres and wheels for dam age. R Check the valve caps. The valves must be protected against mois ture and dirt by the valve caps approved especially for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm. Notes on snow chains

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect snow chain fitting If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, the snow chains may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres.

# Never fit snow chains on the front wheels.

# Only fit snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs.

* NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from fit ted snow chains If snow chains are fitted to steel wheels, the wheel trims can be damaged.

# Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels before fitting snow chains. R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R If snow chains are fitted, the maximum per missible speed is 50 km/h. R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted. R Vehicles with level control: if snow chains are fitted, only drive at raised vehicle level.

% You can permanently limit the maximum vehicle speed for driving with winter tyres

( page 211).

% You can deactivate ESP to pull away

( page 202). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force. Tyre pressure Notes on tyre pressure

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf ficient or excessive tyre pressure Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks:

R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.

# Comply with the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all tyres including the spare wheel regu larly:

R at least once a month R when the load changes Wheels and tyres 405 R before embarking on a longer journey R if operating conditions change, e.g. off-

road driving

# Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can:

R Shorten the service life of the tyres. R Cause increased tyre damage. R Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning.

& WARNING Risk of accident from repea ted tyre pressure drop If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Insufficient tyre pressure can cause the tyres to burst.

# Inspect the tyre for signs of foreign objects. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the tyre pressure of warm tyres. Trailer operation notes Always inflate the rear axle tyres to the recom mended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure table for increased load. Tyre pressure table The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. 406 Wheels and tyres

# Check whether the wheel or valve has a leak.

# If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Information on the recommended tyre pressure for the vehicle's factory-fitted tyres can be found on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap ( page 406). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring sys tem: you can also check the tyre pressure using the on-board computer. Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. Conditions for cold tyres:

R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km. A rise in the tyre temperature of 10 C increases the tyre pressure by approx. 10 kPa (0.1 bar/

The tyre pressure table shows the recommended tyre pressure for all tyres approved for this vehi cle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for cold tyres under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pres sure, the tyre pressure information following is only valid for those tyre sizes. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by the + symbol, the tyre pressure information following shows alternative tyre pressures. These tyre pressures may improve your vehicle's ride comfort. Fuel consumption may then increase slightly. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 405) Tyre pressure monitoring system Function of the tyre pressure monitoring sys tem The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre temperature of the tyres fitted to the vehicle by means of a tyre pressure sensor. New tyre pressure sensors, e.g. in winter tyres, are automatically taught-in during the first jour ney they are used. The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature appear in the multifunction display

( page 407). If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tyre temperature is excessive, a warning will be given:

R via display messages ( page 480) R via the h warning lamp in the instrument cluster ( page 517) It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation. Set the tyre pressure for cold tyres using a tyre pressure gauge. Note that the correct tyre pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tyre pressure monitoring sys tem. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring sys tem will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val ues by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system manually ( page 408). Wheels and tyres 407 System limitations The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R if the tyre pressure is set incorrectly R if there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for example, by a foreign object penetrating the tyre R if there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source Make sure to observe the following further rela ted subject:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 405) Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring system Requirement:

R The ignition is switched on. On-board computer:

, Service . Tyres One of the following displays appears:

R Current tyre pressure and tyre temperature of the individual wheels:

Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 408 Wheels and tyres R Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving R Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tyre pressures are already being moni tored.

# Compare the tyre pressure with the recom mended tyre pressure for the current operat ing condition ( page 406). Observe the notes on tyre temperature ( page 405).

% The values displayed in the multifunction dis play may deviate from those of the tyre pres sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated by pressure gauges are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressure. Make sure to observe the following further rela ted subject:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 405) Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring sys tem Requirements:

R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective operating condition on each of the four wheels ( page 405). Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in the following situations:

R The tyre pressure has changed. R The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly fitted. On-board computer:

, Service . Tyres

# Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Use current tyre pressures as new refer-

ence values? message is shown in the multi function display.

# To begin restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message is shown in the multifunction display. Current warning messages are deleted and the h yellow warning lamp goes out. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pres sures are within the specified range. The cur rent tyre pressures are then accepted as ref erence values and monitored. Make sure to observe the following further rela ted subject:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 405) Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Radio-equipment approval of the tyre pres sure monitoring system Radio equipment approval numbers Country Radio equipment approval number Abu Dhabi TRA REGISTERED NO: ER37156/15. DEALER NO: DA0047074/10 Argentina AFTIC:H14788 Dubai European Union TRA REGISTERED NO: ER37156/15. DEALER NO: DA0047074/10 Schrader Electronics Ltd. 11 Technology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland Country Jordan Radio equipment approval number Kingdom of Jordan Type approval for Tyre Pressure sensor. Manufacturer: Schrader Electron ics Ltd. Model: AG5SP4 Type Approval Number:

TRC/LPD/2015/21 Kingdom of Jordan Type approval for Tyre Pressure sensor. Manufacturer: Schrader Electron ics Ltd. Model: MFR Type Approval Number:

TRC/LPD/2015/223 Malaysia RCDD/04A/0615/S(15-2095) Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC Numero d'agrement :MR 10216 ANRT 2015 Date d'agrement :18/3/2015 Wheels and tyres 409 Radio equipment approval number IFT:RCPSCAG15-0627 IFT:RLVSCMF15-0959 NTC Type Approved. No:ESD-1510576CNTC Country Mexico Moldova Philip pines Serbia Singapore Complies with IDA Standards DA 105282 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 410 Wheels and tyres Country Radio equipment approval number South Africa TA-2015/072 Approved TA-2015/117 Approved Radio equipment approval number Country Country Ukraine Radio equipment approval number MFR

()

( 679 24 2009 .) Schrader Electronics emc team@schrader.co.uk United Arab Emi rates TRA REGISTERED NO :ER37156/15. DEALER NO:DA0047074/10 Schrader Electronics

, AG5SP4

()

( 679 24 2009 .) Schrader Electronics emc team@schrader.co.uk Schrader Electronics

, Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Brazil Vietnam Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito proteo contra interfer ncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Tyre pressure loss warning system Function of the tyre pressure loss warning system The tyre pressure loss warning system warns the driver by means of display messages when there is a severe tyre pressure loss. After a change in tyre pressure, a wheel rotation or a tyre change, or if you have refitted wheels or tyres, the tyre pressure loss warning system has to be restarted ( page 412). Wheels and tyres 411 The tyre pressure loss warning system does not replace the need to regularly check the tyre pressures. System limitations The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R if the tyre pressure is set incorrectly R if there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for example, by a foreign object penetrating the tyre R if the pressure loss in several tyres decrea ses at the same rate The system has a limited or delayed function:

R when the road surface is poor, e.g. snow or gravel R when driving with snow chains R when driving in a very sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or sudden accel eration R when towing a very heavy or large trailer R when driving with a high load Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 412 Wheels and tyres Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 405) R Display messages about the tyres

( page 480) Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system Requirements:

R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective operating condition on each of the four wheels ( page 405). Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system in the following situations:

R The tyre pressure has changed. R The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly fitted. On-board computer:

, Service . Tyres

# Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart: press Touch Control message is shown in the mul tifunction display. Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system in the following situations:

R The tyre pressure has changed. R The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly fitted.

# To begin restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tyre pressure now OK? message is shown in the multifunction display.

# Select Yes.

# To confirm restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message is shown in the multifunction display. After you have driven for a few minutes, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressures of all the tyres. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 405) Wheel change Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec ognise dangers. You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel/tyre combinations at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect dimensions of wheels and tyres If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or wheel suspension components may become damaged. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct:

R Designation R Type When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the correct:

R Designation R Manufacturer R Type

& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed ing the specified tyre load-bearing capa city or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the specified tyre load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating may lead to tyre damage and to the tyres burst ing.

# Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model.

# Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to vehicle and tyres due to non-approved tyre types and sizes For safety reasons, only use wheels, tyres and accessories which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These tyres have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, e.g. ABS or ESP, and are marked as follows:

R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(run-flat tyres only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer tain AMG tyres) Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may Wheels and tyres 413 otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tyre dimension var iations could cause the tyres to come into contact with the body and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea ded tyres Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor rec ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ ous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. For this reason driving safety cannot be guar anteed.

# Do not use used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 414 Wheels and tyres

* NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tyres when driving over obstacles

* NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low ambient temperatures Large wheels have a lower tyre section width. The lower the tyre section width, the greater is the risk of damage to wheels or tyres when driving over obstacles.

# Avoid obstacles or drive particularly carefully.

* NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tyre-fitting tools Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve. The tools could damage the electronic com ponent parts.

# Have the tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop only. Using summer tyres at very low ambient temperatures can cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently.

# At temperatures below 7 C use M+S-

tyres. Accessory parts that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about:

R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations

& WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tyres The special tyre tread in combination with the optimised tyre compound, means that the risk of skidding or hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tyre running temperature.

# Switch on the ESP and adapt your driving style accordingly.

# Use M+S tyres at outside temperatures of less than 50 F. Observe the following when selecting, fitting and replacing tyres:

R Country-specific requirements for tyre approval that define a specific tyre type for your vehicle. Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. R Only use tyres and wheels of the same type

(summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) and the same make. R Only fit wheels of the same size on one axle

(left and right). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only It is only permissible to fit a different wheel size in the event of a flat tyre in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Only fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. R Do not make any modifications to the brake system, the wheels or the tyres. The use of shims or brake dust shields is not permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. R Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tyre pres sure monitoring system. R At temperatures below 7 C, use winter tyres or all-season tyres marked M+S for all wheels. Winter tyres bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro vide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. R For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same tread. R Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres fitted. If this is below the vehicle's maximum speed, this must be indicated in an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. R Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. R Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. R When replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteris tics, e.g. winter tyres. For more information on wheels and tyres, con tact a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 405) R Tyre pressure table ( page 406) Wheels and tyres 415 R Notes on the emergency spare wheel

( page 422) Notes on interchanging wheels

& WARNING Risk of injury through differ ent wheel sizes Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions may severely impair the driving characteris tics. The disk brakes or wheel suspension compo nents may also be damaged.

# Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions. Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 416 Wheels and tyres The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ:

R Front wheels wear more on the shoulder of the tyre R Rear wheels wear more in the centre of the tyre On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel size, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for the wheels. It is imperative to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Wheel change" when doing so. Notes on storing wheels R After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease or fuel. Overview of the tyre-change tool kit Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi cles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit. For more information on which tyre-changing tool kits are required and approved for perform ing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Required tyre-change tool kit may include, for example:

R jack R chock R wheel wrench R centring pin

% The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg. The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the sticker affixed to the jack. The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified spe cialist workshop. The tyre-change tool kit is located under the boot floor. 1 Jack 2 Gloves 3 Wheel wrench 4 Centring pin 5 Folding chock 6 Ratchet for jack Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Wheels and tyres 417 Removing and fitting hub caps Requirements:

R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change

( page 417). Plastic hub cap

# To remove: turn the centre cover of the hub cap anti-clockwise and remove the hub cap.

# To fit: make sure that the centre cover of the hub cap is turned anti-clockwise.

# Position the hub cap and turn the centre cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly. Setting up the folding chock Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change Requirements:

R The required tyre-change tool kit is available. If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-

change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools. R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground.

# Apply the electric parking brake manually.

# Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift into position j.

# Vehicles with level control system: set the normal vehicle level ( page 222).

# Switch off the engine.

# Make sure that the engine cannot be started.

# Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diago nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

# Remove the hub caps if necessary

( page 417).

# Raise the vehicle ( page 418). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 418 Wheels and tyres Aluminium hub cap

# To remove: position socket 2 on hub cap 1.

% The socket can be found in the tyre-change tool kit.

# Position wheel spanner 3 on socket 2.

# Using wheel spanner 3, turn hub cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.

# To fit: position hub cap 1 and turn until it is completely flush with the wheel.

# Position socket 2 on hub cap 1.

# Attach wheel spanner 3 to socket 2 and tighten the hub cap clockwise. Specified tightening torque: 25 Nm.

# Raise the vehicle ( page 418). Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel Requirements:

R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change ( page 417). R The hub caps have been removed

( page 417). Important notes on using the jack:

R Only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for mainte nance work under the vehicle. R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay. R The foot of the jack must be positioned verti cally under the jacking point. Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:

R Never place your hands or feet under the vehicle. R Do not lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the engine and do not release the electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the boot lid. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Wheels and tyres 419

* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi cle raised.

# The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup port points.

# Take the ratchet ring spanner out of the tyre-

change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.

# Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Position of jack support points

& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.

# Only position the jack at the appropri ate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned ver tically under the jacking point of the vehicle. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 420 Wheels and tyres

# Position jack 2 at jack support point 1.

# Turn ratchet ring spanner 3 clockwise until jack 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

# Continue to turn ratchet ring spanner 3 until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm off the ground.

# Loosen and remove the wheel ( page 420). Removing a wheel Requirements:

R The vehicle is raised ( page 418). When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, since this could impair the level of comfort when braking.

* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts

# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.

# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com pletely.

# Screw centring pin 1 instead of the wheel bolt into the threading.

# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.

# Remove the wheel.

# Fit the new wheel ( page 420). Fitting a new wheel Requirements:

R The wheel is removed ( page 420). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/

wheel nuts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv ing.

# Never oil or grease the threads.

# In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam aged hub threads replaced.

# Do not continue driving.

# Observe the information on the choice of tyres ( page 412). For tyres with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when fitting.

# Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cen tring pin and push it on.

& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.

# Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

# Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel"

( page 412).

# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-

Benz and for the wheel in question.

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight.

# Unscrew the centring pin.

# Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-

tight.

# Lower the vehicle ( page 421). Wheels and tyres 421 Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change Requirements:

R The new wheel has been fitted ( page 420).

# Place the ratchet ring spanner onto the hexa gon nut of the jack so that the lettering "AB"

is visible.

# To lower the vehicle: turn the ratchet ring spanner of the jack anti-clockwise.

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated (1 to 5). Specified tightening torque: 150 Nm. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 422 Wheels and tyres

& WARNING Risk of injury through incor rect tightening torque The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.

# Have the tightening torque checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop after changing a wheel.

# Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun ted wheel and adjust accordingly.

# Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning system: restart the tyre pressure loss warn ing system ( page 412). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.

# Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: restart the tyre pressure monitoring system ( page 408). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel. Make sure to observe the following further rela ted subject:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 405) Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Mounting an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel may severely impair the driving char acteristics. To prevent hazardous situations:

# Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.

# Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size.

# Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size briefly.

# Do not switch off ESP.

# Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions. Check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel fitted. Correct the pressure as necessary. The maximum permissible speed with an emer gency spare wheel fitted is 80 km/h. Do not fit the emergency spare wheel with snow chains. Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.

% Vehicles with a tyre pressure loss warn ing system: If an emergency spare wheel is fitted the tyre pressure loss warning system cannot function reliably. Only restart the sys tem again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Wheels and tyres 423

# Detach the fastening straps.

# Unhook the retaining spring hooks of the fas tening straps from the brackets.

# Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with the emergency spare wheel.

# Open the emergency spare wheel bag and remove the emergency spare wheel. Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: If an emergency spare wheel is fit ted the tyre pressure monitoring system can not function reliably. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: For a few minutes after an emer gency spare wheel is fitted, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 405) R Tyre pressure table ( page 406) Removing the emergency spare wheel The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the boot.

# Observe the information on mounting tyres

( page 412).

# Open the boot. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 424 Technical data Notes on technical data Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers. The technical data was determined in accord ance with EU Directives. The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-

Benz Service Centre. Only for certain countries: you can find vehi cle-specific vehicle data in the EC-Certificate of Conformity (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehi cle. On-board electronics Notes on tampering with the engine elec tronics

* NOTE Premature wear through improper maintenance Improper maintenance may cause vehicle components to wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalida ted.

# Always have work on the engine elec tronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Two-way radios Notes on installing two-way radios

& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios The electromagnetic radiation from two-way radios can interfere with the on-board elec tronics if RF transmitters are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident from incor rect operation of two-way radios If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation could interfere with the on-board electronics, e.g.:

R if the two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial R if the exterior aerial is not correctly mounted or is not of low reflection This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

# Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only# When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior aerial.

* NOTE Invalidation of the operating per mit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed.

# Only use approved frequency bands.

# Observe the maximum permissible out put power in these frequency bands.

# Only use approved aerial positions. 1 Front roof area 2 Rear roof area 3 Rear wings 4 Boot lid On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, installing an aerial to the front or rear roof area is not permitted. Technical data 425 On the rear wings, it is recommended that you install the aerial on the side of the vehicle clos est to the centre of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and aerial con nectors provided in the pre-installation. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Supplements when installing. Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the values in the following table. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 426 Technical data Frequency band and maximum transmission output Frequency band Maximum transmis sion output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 4 m waveband 74 - 88 MHz 2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz trunked radio sys tem/Tetra 380 - 460 MHz 70 cm waveband 420 - 450 MHz Two-way radio

(2G/3G/4G) 100 W 30 W 50 W 10 W 35 W 10 W Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number Vehicle identification plate The following devices can be used in the vehicle without restrictions:

R two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW R two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W

(trunked radio system/Tetra) R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the follow ing wavebands:

R trunked radio system/Tetra R 70 cm waveband R 2G/3G/4G Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Technical data 427 5 Maximum permissible gross weight of vehi cle combination (kg) (only for specific coun tries) 6 Permissible front axle load (kg) 7 Permissible rear axle load (kg) 8 Paint code

% The data shown in the illustration is example data. Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 Place of manufacture 3 Manufacturing date 4 Vehicle model 5 VIN Vehicle identification plate (example: all other countries) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 EU general operating permit number (only for certain countries) 3 VIN (vehicle identification number) 4 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight

(kg) Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 428 Technical data VIN in front of the right-hand front seat VIN at the lower edge of the windscreen 1 Imprinted VIN (vehicle identification number) 2 Floor covering 1 VIN (vehicle identification number) as label The VIN as a label at the lower edge of the wind screen is only available in some countries. Engine number The engine number is stamped into the crank case. You can obtain further information from any qualified specialist workshop. Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe the information in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers.

& WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm ful to your health.

# Observe the text on the original con tainers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids.

# Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers.

# Always keep children away from operat ing fluids. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre sponsible disposal

# Dispose of operating fluids in an envi ronmentally responsible manner. Operating fluids include the following:

R fuels R DeNOx agent AdBlue for exhaust gas after treatment R lubricants R coolant R brake fluid R windscreen washer fluid R climate control system refrigerant Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. You can identify service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container:

R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Further information on approved operating fluids is available at the following locations:

R in the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Service Products by entering the designation

-

at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App

-

R at a qualified specialist workshop

& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable.

# Fire, naked flames, smoking and creat ing sparks must be avoided.

# Switch off the ignition and, if it has been in use, switch off the stationary heater before you refuel your vehicle. Technical data 429

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

# Do not inhale fuel vapour.

# Keep children away from fuel.

# Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.

# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten tion immediately. Do not induce vomit ing. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 430 Technical data

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. Fuel Information on fuel grades for vehicles with petrol engines Observe the notes on operating fluids

( page 428).

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

# Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free fuel that conforms to European EN 228, or an equivalent specification. Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10 vol. % ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel using:

R diesel R regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON R petrol with more than 10 vol. % ethanol e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100 R petrol with more than 3 vol.% methanol e.g. M15, M30 R petrol with additives containing metal If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:

# do not switch the ignition on.

# consult a qualified specialist workshop. The following compatibility indications for fuel apply to your vehicle:

1 For petrol with maximum 5 vol.% ethanol 2 For petrol with maximum 10 vol.% ethanol According to European standard EN 16942 you can find the compatibility indications at the fol lowing locations:

R on the instruction label on the fuel filler flap R on the fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul phur, this can produce unpleasant odours. E 400 4MATIC: observe the information on sul phur content on the instruction label in the fuel filler flap:

Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Technical data 431 All models: as a temporary measure, if the rec ommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with at least:

R E 180, E 250, E 300 e: 93 RON R All other models: 91 RON This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using petrol with an even lower RON. Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified specialist workshop. Information on additives in petrol Observe the notes on operating fluids

( page 428). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz service centre, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-

Benz. Be sure to observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Information on fuel grades for vehicles with a diesel engine General notes Observe the notes on operating fluids

( page 428).

* NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring.

# Only add cleaning additives recommen ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.

& WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. While the engine is running, component parts in the exhaust system may overheat without warning.

* NOTE Damage to the emission control system caused by fuel with a too high sulphur content

# Only use sulphur-free fuel (sulphur con tent 10 ppm). All models: the recommended octane number for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label in the fuel filler flap ( page 182). E 300, E 350, E 350 4MATIC: only refuel using super unleaded petrol with at least 98 RON if you wish to achieve maximum engine output. Alternatively, you can also refuel using premium grade petrol with at least 95 RON. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 432 Technical data

# Never refuel using petrol in diesel engines.

# Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

# Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European stand ard EN 590, or an equivalent specifica tion. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm.

# Vehicles without diesel particulate filter: refuel using only diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 500 ppm. Never refuel using:

R petrol R marine diesel R heating oil R pure bio-diesel fuel or vegetable oil R paraffin or kerosene If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:

# do not switch the ignition on.

# consult a qualified specialist workshop. The following compatibility indication for fuel applies to your vehicle:

1 For diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol. % bio-

diesel fuel (fatty acid methyl ester) According to European standard EN 16942 you can find the compatibility indications at the fol lowing locations:

R on the instruction label on the fuel filler flap R on the fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe Information on low outside temperatures Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel fuel as possible at the beginning of winter. Before changing over to winter diesel fuel, the fuel tank should be empty, if possible. When refuelling with winter diesel fuel for the first time, keep the fuel level low, for example at reserve level. The fuel tank can be filled as usual when next refuelling. Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified specialist workshop. Tank content and fuel reserve The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Capacity Model E 300 E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 450 4MATIC All other models Model E 450 4MATIC All other models Total capacity 66.0 l 66.0 l or 80.0 litres 50.0 l or 66.0 l of which reserve fuel 7.0 l or 12.0 litres 7.0 l Adblue Notes on AdBlue Observe the notes on operating fluids

( page 428). AdBlue is a water-soluble fluid for the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines.

* NOTE Malfunctions due to the dilution of AdBlue or the use of additive-enhanced AdBlue The function of the NOx exhaust gas after treatment can be impaired by the use of unsuitable denoxification agents.

# Only use AdBlue in accordance with ISO 22241.

# Do not dilute AdBlue with water.

# Do not use additive-enhanced AdBlue. Technical data 433

* NOTE Damage and malfunctions due to impurities in AdBlue Consequences of impurities in AdBlue:

R increased emission values R damage to the catalytic converter R NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment malfunc tions

# Avoid impurities in AdBlue. AdBlue residues crystallise after a period of time, and contaminate the surfaces with which they come into contact. Clean the dirty surfaces with water as soon as possible. When you open the AdBlue tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may escape. Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only fill the AdBlue tank in well-venti lated areas. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 434 Technical data AdBlue filling capacity and consumption Total capacity of AdBlue tank Model All models Total capacity 23.5 l AdBlue consumption Like fuel consumption, AdBlue consumption is highly dependent upon driving style and operat ing conditions. For this reason, your vehicle's actual consumption figures under normal operat ing conditions may differ from the consumption figures calculated. AdBlue consumption is between 1% and 5% of fuel consumption. Have the AdBlue supply checked at a qualified spe cialist workshop before making journeys outside of Europe. Before a longer stay outside of Europe, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display the AdBlue range and level

( page 264). Engine oil Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids

( page 428).

# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.

# Do not use additives.

# Have the engine oil renewed at regular intervals.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi tives

# Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines. Further information on engine oil and oil filters is available at the following locations:

R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids by entering the designation

-

at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app

-

R at a qualified specialist workshop Petrol engines: for certain countries, different engine oils can be used in conjunction with reduced maintenance intervals. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only% Further information on different engine oils can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Quality and capacity of engine oil MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval Petrol engines MB-Freigabe or MB-

Approval E 350 E 350 4MATIC 229.51, 229.52, 229.61, 229.71 All other models 229.5, 229.6 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval Diesel engines MB-Freigabe or MB-

Approval E 350 d E 400 d E 400 d 4MATIC All other models 229.52, 229.61 228.51, 229.31, 229.51, 229.52, 229.61, 229.71 If the engine oils listed in the table are not avail able, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre of the following engine oils once only:

R petrol engines:

-

-

E 350, E 350 4MATIC: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.31 or ACEA C3 E 450 4MATIC: MB-Freigabe or MB-

Approval 229.3 or ACEA A3/B4 all other models: MB-Freigabe or MB-

Approval 229.3, 229.51, 229.52 or ACEA A3/B4 R diesel engines:

-

-

-

E 350 d, E 400 d, E 400 d 4MATIC: MB-

Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.51 or ACEA C3 all other models: ACEA C3 The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter. Replacement amount Model E 200 d E 220 d E 220 d 4MATIC E 350 4MATIC E 200 4MATIC E 450 4MATIC E 300 d E 350 E 350 d E 400 d E 400 d 4MATIC All other models Technical data 435 Replacement amount 6.0 litres 6.5 litres 6.8 l 6.6 l 9.0 litres 8.0 litres 7.0 l Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 436 Technical data Notes on brake fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids

( page 428).

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapour pockets forming in the brake sys tem The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake sys tem when the brakes are applied hard. This impairs the braking effect.

# Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. You can obtain further information on brake fluid in the following places:

R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids

-

at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app

-

R at a qualified specialist workshop Coolant Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids

( page 428).

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart ment, it may ignite.

# Allow the engine to cool down before you top up the antifreeze.

# Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler opening.

# Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool ant

# Only add coolant that has been pre mixed with the required antifreeze pro tection. Information on coolant is available at the fol lowing locations:

R in the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Operating Fluids 310.1

-

at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app

-

R at a qualified specialist workshop

* NOTE Overheating at high outside tem peratures If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only tected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures.

# Always use coolant approved by Mercedes-Benz.

# Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper ating Fluids 310.1. Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. The proportion of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system should be:

R a minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to approximately -37 C) R a maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45 C) Notes on windscreen washer fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids

( page 428).

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate

* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer fluids Technical data 437 Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

# Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen washer fluid Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting.

# Only use windscreen washer fluids which are also suitable for use on plas tic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.

# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win terFit with other windscreen washer flu ids. Do not use distilled or de-ionised water as the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously. Recommended windscreen washer fluid:

R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa tion on the antifreeze container. Mix the washer fluid with the windscreen washer fluid all year round. Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors:

R tyres Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 438 Technical data R load R condition of the suspension R optional equipment Height when opened Model E 200 4MATIC E 220 d 4MATIC E 250 E 300 E 350 E 300 d E 350 d E 400 d E 400 d 4MATIC All other models 1 Height when opened 1845 mm 1839 mm 1826 mm 1840 mm 1846 mm 1833 mm Vehicle dimensions All models Vehicle length Vehicle width including out side mirrors Vehicle width excluding out side mirrors Wheelbase Model E 200 4MATIC E 220 d 4MATIC E 250 E 300 E 350 E 300 d E 350 d E 400 d 4923 mm 2065 mm 1852 mm 2939 mm Vehicle height 1480 mm 1474 mm 1460 mm 1475 mm Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Trailer hitch General notes on the trailer hitch Not all models can be used for trailer operation

( page 252). Modifications to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle model. The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissi ble if a towing capacity is specified in your vehi cle documents. Further information can be obtained at a quali fied specialist workshop. Model E 400 d 4MATIC E 350 4MATIC E 450 4MATIC All other models Vehicle height 1481 mm 1467 mm 1468 mm Weights and loads Please note that for the specified vehicle data:

R items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the payload. R vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate . Roof load All models Maximum roof load 100 kg Technical data 439 Mounting dimensions 1 Fastening points 2 Overhang dimension 3 Rear axle centre line Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 440 Technical data The overhang dimension and fastening points are valid for a trailer hitch installed at the fac tory. Model Model 2 Over hang dimen sion All models 1243 mm Permissible towing capacity The tongue weight is not included in the towing capacity. Permissible towing capacity, braked (at a minimum start-off gradeability of 8%) Model Manual trans mission Auto matic trans mission E 180 E 200 1900 kg 1500 kg 1900 kg Manual trans mission Auto matic trans mission 2000 kg 2100 kg E 250 All other models Permissible towing capacity, braked (at a minimum start-off gradeability of 12%) Model Manual trans mission Auto matic trans mission E 180 E 200 E 250 All other models 1900 kg 1500 kg 1900 kg 2000 kg 2100 kg Permissible towing capacity, unbraked Model Permissible towing capacity, unbraked All models 750 kg Maximum tongue weight

* NOTE Damage caused by the trailer coming loose If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose.

# The tongue weight must not be below 50 kg.

# Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maximum permissible tongue weight. Tongue weight Model Maximum tongue weight All models 84 kg Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Model E 350 d E 400 4MATIC E 350 d 4MATIC Axle load 1400 kg 1385 kg Technical data 441 Permissible rear axle load during trailer operation Axle load Model Axle load E 180 E 200, manual trans mission E 200, automatic transmission E 250 E 200 4MATIC E 200 d E 220 d E 220 d 4MATIC E 300 E 300 d 1335 kg 1340 kg 1345 kg 1375 kg 1365 kg 1370 kg Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 442 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Introduction Notes on display messages Display messages appear on the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic symbols are sim plified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols on the multifunction display. The multifunction display shows high-priority dis play messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. For some display messages, a symbol is also shown:

R Further information R O Hide display message You can select the desired symbol by swiping left or right on the left-hand touch control. Press the symbol to show further information on the multifunction display. Press the O symbol to hide the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the button or the left-hand touch control. The display messages are then stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hid den. The multifunction display shows these dis play messages continuously until the cause of the message has been rectified. Calling up stored display messages On-board computer:

, Service . 1 message If there are no display messages, No messages appears on the multifunction display.

# Scroll through the display messages by swip ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To exit the message memory: press the button. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 443 Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!

inoperative See Owner's Manual

* ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. The brake system continues to operate normally. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa tion.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning If ABS and ESP are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 444 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!

currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

* ABS and ESP are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa tion.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning If ABS and ESP are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 445 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

* ESP is temporarily unavailable. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 446 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions inoperative See Owner's Manual

* ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. The brake system continues to operate normally. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa tion.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 447 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions T

!

inoperative See Owner's Manual

!

Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake

* EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning If EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning, the wheels can lock when braking and ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The red ! indicator lamp is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off.

# Switch the ignition on. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 448 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

!

Release parking brake Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The red ! indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:

R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled ( page 194). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake ( page 195).

# Check that the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake are fulfilled.

# Release the electric parking brake manually. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!

Parking brake See Owner's Manual

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply:

# Switch off the ignition and switch it back on.

# Apply the electric parking brake manually ( page 194). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 449 If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away. The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunction ing. To release:

# Switch off the ignition and switch it back on.

# Release the electric parking brake manually ( page 194). or

# Release the electric parking brake automatically ( page 194). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is mal functioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 450 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Switch off the ignition and switch it back on. To apply:

# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually ( page 194). To release:

# Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually. If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash:

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away. The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the battery charge level is too low:

# Charge the battery. To apply:

# Switch off the ignition. The electric parking brake is applied automatically. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 451 If the electric parking brake should not be applied, e.g. when washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash or when having the vehicle towed, leave the ignition switched on. Do not do this when having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically:

# Switch off the ignition and switch it back on.

# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually ( page 194). If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away. To release:

# If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually ( page 194). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 452 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J Check brake fluid level

* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.

# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv ing.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Do not top up the brake fluid.

# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Do not top up the brake fluid.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. G Inoperative Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 453 Display messages Check brake pads See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The brake pads have reached the wear limit.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted braking power When the brake pads have reached their wear limit, the braking power may be restricted.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Active Brake Assist has performed autonomous braking.

# The symbol displayed for autonomous braking automatically disappears after a short time. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 454 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Radar sensors dirty See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes:

R soiling of the sensors R heavy rain R extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again. If the display message does not disappear:

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Clean all sensors ( page 376).

# Restart the engine. Mercedes me connect Services limited See Own-

er's Manual Active Brake Assist Func-

tions limited See Owner's Manual

* Service limited. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning.

# Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection ( page 24).

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS is malfunctioning. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages Active Brake Assist Func-

tions currently limited See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 455

* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits .

# Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions and restart the engine. PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual

* PRESAFE functions are malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* PRE-SAFE Impulse Side is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 456 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 Restraint sys. malfunction Consult workshop

* The restraint system is faulty .

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Detection of a restraint system fault:

R The restraint system warning lamp 6 does not light up when the ignition is switched on. R The restraint system warning lamp 6 lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 457 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 Front left malfunction Con-

sult workshop (example)

* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning .

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. 6 Left windowbag malfunc-

tion Consult work-

shop (example) Detection of a restraint system malfunction:

R The restraint system warning lamp 6 does not light up when the ignition is switched on. R The restraint system warning lamp 6 lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The corresponding windowbag is malfunctioning .

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window airbag The window airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration.

# Have the window airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 458 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Front-passenger airbag dis-

abled See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The front passenger airbag is disabled, even though an adult or a person of an adult's build is seated on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.

& WARNING Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, espe cially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.

# Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff ( page 40).

# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Man-

ual Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 459 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The front passenger airbag is enabled while the vehicle is in motion:

R even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat R even when the front passenger seat is not occupied The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag.

# Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG in front of it;

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff ( page 40).

# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 460 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!

ATTENTION ASSIST inoper-

ative Vehicle rising Lowering

* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver

( page 245).

# If necessary, take a break.

* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

* Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 461 Vehicle rising Please wait Stop vehicle Vehicle too low

* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.

# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.

# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIR BODY CONTROL/DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning:

# Do not drive faster than 80 km/h and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE The tyres of the front axle or the front wings could be damaged by large steering movements

# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.

# If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic con ditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.

# Set a higher vehicle level ( page 222). Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle is raised. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 462 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h Please reduce speed Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

* The AIR BODY CONTROL function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

# Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 80 km/h.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

# Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level.

# In order to adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive at speeds greater than 60 km/h.

# In order to adjust the vehicle level during trailer operation, you must not drive at speeds greater than 30 km/h.

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits ( page 249). Vehicles with Active Steering Assist: the camera view may be limited by the windscreen.

# Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. If the display message does not disappear on vehicles with Active Steering Assist:

# Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Clean the windscreen. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 463 Display messages Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera view restricted See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Vehicles without Active Steering Assist: the camera view is restricted. Possible causes:

R dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision R heavy rain, snow or fog Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear:

# Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Clean the windscreen. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 464 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Blind Spot Assist not availa-

ble when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached ( page 247).

# Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. or

# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions and restart the engine.

# If necessary, clean the rear bumper. If the bumper is extremely dirty, the sensors in the bumper may be mal functioning.

* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached ( page 247).

# Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.

# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions and restart the engine.

* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist is unavailable.

# Press the left-hand touch control and acknowledge the display message. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Man-

ual Blind Spot Assist inopera-

tive Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual Off Active Distance Assist available again Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist is unavailable.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 465

* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and restart the engine.

# If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is skidding or a condition for activation is not met.

# Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function ( page 219).

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated ( page 213). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 466 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions suspended

- - - km/h Active Distance Assist cur-

rently unavailable See Own-

er's Manual Active Distance Assist inop-

erative Active Steering Assist cur-

rently unavailable See Own-

er's Manual

* If you activate the accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will be put into passive mode ( page 217).

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions have been fulfilled.

# Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 213).

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits ( page 212).

# Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits( page 215).

# Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

# If necessary, clean the windscreen in the camera's field of vision. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 467 Active Steering Assist inop-

erative Limiter passive

- - - km/h Cruise control off Cruise control inoperative Cruise control and Limiter inoperative Limiter inoperative

* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is switched to passive mode

( page 210).

* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.

# Observe the activation conditions for cruise control ( page 210).

* Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been switched off automatically ( page 208).

* Cruise control is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The limiter is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 468 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

- - - km/h Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h Maximum speed exceeded Engine Display messages Top up coolant See Own-

ers Manual

* The limiter cannot be activated as not all activation conditions have been fulfilled.

# Observe the activation conditions of the limiter ( page 210).

* You have reached the stored maximum speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.

* The maximum permissible speed has been exceeded (for certain countries only).

# Drive more slowly. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The coolant level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.

# Add coolant ( page 368). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages

?

Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine off Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 469 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The coolant is too hot.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnet If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

# Wait until the engine has cooled down.

# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120 C. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 470 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

#

See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The battery is not being charged.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#

12 V battery See Owner's Manual

#

48 V battery See Owner's Manual

* The engine is off and the battery charge level is too low.

# Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.

# Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive for a longer distance. The battery will charge. If the message appears while the engine is running, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The 48 V system is malfunctioning. Convenience functions may be restricted.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 471 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#

Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual

* The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Switch off the engine.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Please wait Charging high-

voltage battery

* The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the ignition while the 12 V battery is being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle is providing starting assistance. The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, the Motor can be started again display message is shown on the multifunction display.

# Start the engine.

# Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger from the vehicle. If the Motor can be started again display message does not appear after a few minutes:

# Try to start the engine again.

# If the engine does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 472 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual Motor can be started again

#

Stop vehicle Leave engine running Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The charge level of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the engine.

# Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.

# Connect a suitable charger approved by Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connec tion point of the 12 V battery ( page 393). The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle.

* The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter.

# Start the engine and drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery.

* The battery charge level is too low.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Leave the engine running.

# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 473 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling

* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# Check the engine oil level when next refuelling. Top up the engine oil ( page 367). Notes on engine oil ( page 434). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 474 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 Engine oil level Stop vehi-

cle Switch engine off

* Display message only for certain engines:

The engine oil level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Switch off the engine.

# Add 1 l of engine oil.

# Check the engine oil level. Top up the engine oil ( page 367). Notes on engine oil ( page 434).

* Display message only for certain engines:

The engine oil level is too high.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil siphoned off. 4 Engine oil level Reduce oil level Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 475 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling

* Display message only for certain engines:

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. 4 Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off engine

# When next refuelling, add 1 litre of engine oil. Top up engine oil ( page 367). Notes on engine oil ( page 434).

* Display message only for certain engines:

The engine oil pressure is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil pressure

# Avoid driving with insufficient engine oil pressure.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 476 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 5 Engine oil level cannot be measured

* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor is interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Clean the fuel filter

!

8 Replace air cleaner Reserve fuel level

* Vehicles with diesel engines: the fuel filter is dirty or the water in the fuel filter must be drained off.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Vehicles with diesel engines: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.

# Refuel. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 477

?

Refill AdBlue See Owners Manual Top up AdBlue Perf. reduced in XXX miles See Owner's Manual Top up AdBlue Perf. reduced: XXX km/h No start in XXX km

* The fan motor is defective.

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120 C.

* The AdBlue level has fallen below the reserve range.

# Refill AdBlue immediately ( page 186).

* The low AdBlue level will lead to limited performance after the remaining distance displayed has been driven.

# Refill AdBlue immediately ( page 186).

* The low AdBlue level will lead to limited performance above the speed displayed. After the displayed remaining distance has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the engine.

# Refill AdBlue immediately. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 478 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages AdBlue system fault See Owner's Manual AdBlue system fault Perf. reduced in XXX km See Owner's Manual AdBlue system fault Perf. reduced: XXX mph No start in XXX miles Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The AdBlue system is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The AdBlue system is malfunctioning. Performance will be reduced after the remaining distance displayed has been covered.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* Power reduction due to the AdBlue system fault. After the distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the engine.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 479 Display messages AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible Refill AdBlue Eng. start not possible Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The AdBlue system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the engine.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The AdBlue tank is empty. You can no longer start the engine.

# Top up at least 4.5 l of AdBlue ( page 186).

# Switch the ignition on. You can restart the engine after approximately one minute. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 480 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Tyres Display messages Tyre pressure Check tyres Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose the following risks:

R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. R The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure ( page 405) and the tyres.

# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system ( page 411).

* The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.

# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system ( page 411).

* The tyre pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Check tyre pressures then restart Run Flat Indicator Run Flat Indicator inopera-

tive Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages h Rectify tyre pressure h Check tyre(s) Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 481 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great.

# Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.

# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitoring system ( page 408).

* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose the following risks:

R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. R The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure ( page 405) and the tyres. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 482 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages h Warning tyre defect Tyre press. monitor cur-

rently unavailable Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tyre Flat tyres are dangerous in the following ways:

R The tyres can overheat and cause a fire. R The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Do not drive with a flat tyre.

# Observe the notes on flat tyres. Notes on flat tyres ( page 383).

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the tyres.

* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are received. The tyre pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.

# Drive on. The tyre pressure monitoring system restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 483 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Wheel sensor(s) missing Tyre press. monitor inoper-

ative No wheel sensors Tyre press. monitor inoper-

ative Tyre(s) overheated

* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed.

# Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

* The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.

# Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.

* The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning If the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may, for example, affect the vehicle's handling characteristics, steering and braking.

# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.

# Drive more slowly. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 484 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Tyre(s) overheated Reduce speed Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* At least one tyre is overheating.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres Overheated tyres may burst, particularly at high speeds.

# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.

# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down. Key Display messages Replace key Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The key needs to be replaced.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 485 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

, Replace key See Owner's Manual

* Vehicles with a digital vehicle key: only a few or no authorisations remain for starting the engine.

# Make sure that the internet connection is not limited by certain mobile phone settings.

# Open the Mercedes me connect http://www.mercedes.me and call up the digital vehicle key service.

# Deactivate the service first and then activate it again.

# If the display message still appears, contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (CAC). Vehicles with a digital vehicle key sticker: only a few or no authorisations remain for starting the engine.

# Order a new digital vehicle key sticker from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or at http://www.mercedes-

benz.com/connect. Change key batteries Key not detected(white display message)

* The key battery is discharged.

# Replace the battery ( page 74).

* The key is currently undetected.

# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

# If the key is still not recognised, start the engine with the key in the slot ( page 169). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 486 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Key not detected(red dis play message)

* The key cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine:

R You can no longer start the engine. R you cannot centrally lock the vehicle.

# Ensure that the key is in the vehicle. If the key detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source:

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key ( page 169). Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual

* The key detection function is malfunctioning.

# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

# Start the vehicle with the key in the slot ( page 169). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions j Trailer coupling extending

* Retract or extend the ball neck. Do not attempt to speed up, slow down or initiate the retracting or extending process using your hand, foot or other aids. During the retracting or extending process, do not couple a trailer. When the ball neck has reached an operational position, the display message disappears. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 487 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 488 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions j Check trailer hitch lock

* The trailer hitch is not operational when you are driving with a trailer.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

# Uncouple the trailer and safeguard it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivelling procedure ( page 252).

# If the ball neck is extended, press and hold the button on the boot lid until the ball neck engages beneath the bumper.

# When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked If the ball neck is not in the locked position, the trailer may come loose.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears. If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is defective and the ball neck is not locked.

# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The trailer hitch is not operational when the vehicle is at a standstill. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 489

# Uncouple the coupled trailer and safeguard it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivelling procedure ( page 252).

# If the ball neck is retracted: press and hold the button on the boot lid until the ball neck engages vertically in the locked position and then engages beneath the bumper.

# If the ball neck is extended: press and hold the button on the boot lid until the ball neck engages beneath the bumper. If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is defective and the ball neck is not locked.

# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position j and into another transmission position.

# Depress the brake pedal.

* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position j or i into another transmission position.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Start the engine.

* The driver's door is not fully closed and the transmission is in position k, i or h.

# Shift the transmission to position j when you park the vehicle. Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door open and trans-

mission not in P Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 490 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages N permanently active Risk of vehicle rolling Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary Without changing gear, consult workshop d Vehicle is operational Switch off the ignition before exiting Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, the transmission has been shifted to position i.

# Depress the brake pedal to stop and, when the vehicle is stationary, shift the transmission to position j.

# To continue your journey, shift the transmission to position h or k.

* The transmission can be shifted to position j only when the vehicle is stationary.

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be shifted.

# When the transmission is in position h, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not shift the transmis sion position.

# For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state.

# When leaving the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the key with you.

# If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heater. Otherwise, the 12V battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only using a donor battery (starting assis tance). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 491 Display messages Transmission Malfunction Stop Reversing not poss. Con-

sult workshop Stop vehicle Leave engine running Wait Transmission cooling Auxiliary battery malfunc-

tion Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to position i automatically.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Switch the transmission to position j.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The transmission is malfunctioning. Reverse gear can no longer be engaged.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Leave the engine running.

# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

* The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Until then, always manually set the transmission to position j before you switch off the engine.

# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Air conditioning Malfunc-

tion See Owner's Manual

* Operation of the climate control system is temporarily restricted. Airflow and fresh air supply are set to automatic mode.

# Have the climate control system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 492 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Apply brake to select R j Operation only possible in transmission position N j Operation only possible in transmission position P Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* You have tried to switch to transmission position k.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Switch the transmission to position k.

* You have attempted to swivel the ball neck and the transmission is not in position i.

# Switch the transmission to position i.

* You have attempted to swivel the ball neck and the transmission is in position k, i or h.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Switch the transmission to position j. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 493 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual

* The steering is malfunctioning Steering capability is considerably impaired.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The power assistance for the steering is malfunctioning. You may need to use more force to steer.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Steering malfunction Drive carefully Visit workshop Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 494 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Let fresh air into the vehi-

cle interior! Air condition-

ing malf. Visit workshop Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The climate control system is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of injury and accident due to an insufficient supply of fresh air If the climate control system is malfunctioning, carbon dioxide levels may increase in the passenger compart ment. Breathing in carbon dioxide may cause dizziness.

# Open the window to ensure that there is a sufficient supply of fresh air.

# Open the window to ensure that there is an adequate supply of fresh air.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The power assistance for the steering is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.

# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.

# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.

# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages

&

inoperative Battery low

&

inoperative Refuel vehicle Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual

&

inoperative See Owner's Man. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 495 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low. The stationary heater has switched itself off.

# Drive for an extended period until the battery has reached a sufficient charge level again.

* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on.

# Refuel the vehicle.

* The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.

# When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the stationary heater, waiting several minutes between each attempt.

# If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 496 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions M C

* The bonnet is open.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the engine bonnet unlocked An unlocked engine bonnet may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view.

# Never unlock the engine bonnet when driving.

# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Close the bonnet.

* At least one door is open.

# Close all doors. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 497 N _ Rear left seat backrest not locked (example) Top up washer fluid

* The boot lid is open.

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

# Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.

# Never drive with the boot lid open.

# Close the boot lid.

* The corresponding seat backrest of the rear bench seat is not engaged.

# Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages.

* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.

# Top up the washer fluid ( page 369). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 498 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Lights Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b Left dipped beam (example) b Active Light System inoper-

ative b Intelligent Light System inoperative

* The corresponding light source is defective.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. or

# Check whether you are permitted to replace the light source yourself ( page 144).

% LED light bulbs: the display message for the corresponding lamp appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the lamp have failed.

* The active headlamps are faulty.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of the Intelligent Light System.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 499 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b Malfunction See Owner's Manual b Automatic driving lights inoperative

* The exterior lighting is faulty.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the fuses and replace them if necessary ( page 400).

* The light sensor is faulty.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Switch off lights b b Switch on headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative

* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.

# Turn the light switch to the position.

* You are driving without dipped-beam headlamps.

# Turn the light switch to the L or position.

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is faulty.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 500 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Camera view restric-

ted See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached ( page 141).

# Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus available again display message appears.

* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes:

R dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision R heavy rain, snow or fog Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear:

# Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Clean the windscreen. Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist Camera view restricted See Owner's Manual Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 501 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached ( page 140) ( page 139).

# Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist available again display message appears.

* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes:

R dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision R heavy rain, snow or fog Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear:

# Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Clean the windscreen. Warning and indicator lamps Overview of warning and indicator lamps Some systems perform a self-test when the igni tion is switched on. Some warning and indicator lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behav iour is non-critical. These warning and indicator lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the engine has been started or dur ing a journey. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 502 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Instrument display (standard) Progressive setting in the widescreen cock pit Seat belt is not fastened

( page 509) J Brakes (red) ( page 503) J Brakes (yellow) ( page 503)

! ABS malfunction( page 503) AIR BODY CONTROL malfunction ing( page 510) Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit If you select the progressive display setting in vehicles with a widescreen cockpit, the positions of the indicator lamps on the instrument display change. Warning and indicator lamps:

L Dipped beam ( page 134) T Standing lights ( page 134) K Main beam ( page 136)

#! Turn signal lights ( page 136) R Rear fog light ( page 134) DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL malfunc tioning ( page 510) ESP ( page 503) ESP OFF ( page 503)

! Electric parking brake ( page 503) Power-assisted steering malfunction ing ( page 512)

# Electrical fault ( page 514) 6 Restraint system ( page 503)

; Engine diagnostics ( page 514) 8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler flap loca tion indicator ( page 514)

? Coolant too hot/cold ( page 514) Distance warning ( page 510) Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 503

% Preglow h Tyre pressure monitoring system

( page 517) j Trailer hitch is not operational or swivels ( page 512) Safety systems Warning/indicator lamp J Brake system warning lamp

(yellow) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Adjust your speed and continue to drive carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.

# If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 504 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp J Brake system warning lamp

(red) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes:

R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. Braking char acteristics may be impaired. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.

# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Do not top up the brake fluid.

# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Observe the messages on the multifunction display. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Warning/indicator lamp

!

ABS warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 505

& WARNING There is risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning If EBD or ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Observe the messages on the multifunction display.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP is intervening ( page 198).

# Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. ESP warning lamp flashes Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 506 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp ESP warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Observe the messages on the multifunction display.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Warning/indicator lamp ESP OFF warning lamp Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 507 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP is deactivated.

& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP deactivated If ESP is deactivated, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.

# Drive on carefully.

# Only deactivate ESP for as long as the situation requires. If ESP cannot be activated, ESP is malfunctioning.

# Have ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP ( page 198). Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 508 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow indicator lamp is also lit if the electric parking brake malfunctions.

# Observe the messages on the multifunction display. Warning/indicator lamp

!

Red indicator lamp, electric parking brake applied

!

Yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is mal functioning Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Warning/indicator lamp 6 Restraint system warning lamp Seat belt Warning/indicator lamp 7 Seat belt warning lamp lights up Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 509 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is faulty ( page 29).

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Observe the messages on the multifunction display.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine is started. In addition, an acoustic warning tone may sound. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.

# Fasten your seat belt( page 34). If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the seat belt warning lamp may remain lit. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 510 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp 7 Seat belt warning lamp flashes Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.

# Fasten your seat belt( page 34). There are objects on the front passenger seat.

# Remove the objects from the front passenger seat. Driving systems Warning/indicator lamp Suspension warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow AIR BODY CONTROL warning lamp is on. The yellow DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL warning lamp is on. AIR BODY CONTROL is faulty. There is a fault in the DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.

# Observe the messages on the multifunction display. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 511 Warning/indicator lamp Distance warning warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.

# Be prepared to brake immediately.

# Increase the distance. Active Brake Assist . Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 512 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Vehicle Warning/indicator lamp j Trailer hitch warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red trailer hitch warning lamp is on. The trailer hitch is not operational or swivels.

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked If the ball neck is not in the locked position, the trailer may come loose.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

# Observe the messages in the multifunction display. If the trailer hitch swivels:

# Wait until the ball neck has reached the operational position. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 513 Warning/indicator lamp Power steering system warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red power steering system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power steering assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Observe the messages on the multifunction display. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 514 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Engine Warning/indicator lamp

;

Engine diagnosis warning lamp

#

Electrical fault warning lamp 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.

# Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank may have been run dry.

# Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked. The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault in the electrics.

# Observe the messages in the multifunction display. The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.

# Refuel. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 515 Warning/indicator lamp

?

Coolant warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes:

R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120 C.

& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnet If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not con tinue driving.

# Observe the messages on the multifunction display. If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:

# consult a qualified specialist workshop Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 516 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions or

# exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down

# Check the coolant level ( page 368).

# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120 C. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 517 Tyres Warning/indicator lamp h Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose the following risks:

R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. R The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 518 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp h Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning If the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may, for example, affect the vehicle's handling characteristics, steering and braking.

# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 1, 2, 3 ... 12 V battery ............................................. 394 Replacing ............................................. 394 12 V socket see Socket (12 V) 230 V socket see Socket (230 V) 360 Camera ........................................... 230 Care ..................................................... 376 Function .............................................. 230 Selecting a view .................................. 233 Setting favourites ................................ 234 A A/C function Activating/deactivating (multimedia system) ................................................ 156 Switching on/off (control panel) ......... 156 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ............. 197 Acceleration see Kickdown Access data Editing ................................................. 342 Setting (Bluetooth) ............................. 341 Setting up (business telephony) .......... 340 Acoustic locking verification signal Activating/deactivating ......................... 73 Activating/deactivating automatic volume adjustment Burmester surround sound system .... 361 Active Blind Spot Assist .......................... 247 Activating/deactivating ....................... 249 Brake application ................................. 247 Function .............................................. 247 System limitations ............................... 247 Trailer operation .................................. 247 Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) .. 363 Operation ............................................ 363 Resetting ............................................. 363 Active Brake Assist Function/notes ................................... 203 Setting ................................................. 207 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ......... 212 Calling up a speed ............................... 213 Displays in the Instrument Display ....... 217 Function ............................................... 212 Increasing/decreasing speed .............. 213 Index 519 Requirements: ..................................... 213 Selecting .............................................. 213 Steering wheel buttons ........................ 213 Storing a speed .................................... 213 Switching off/deactivating .................. 213 Switching on/activating ....................... 213 System limitations ............................... 212 Active headlamps .................................... 138 Active Lane Keeping Assist .................... 249 Activating/deactivating ....................... 251 Function .............................................. 249 System limitations ............................... 249 Active Parking Assist .............................. 234 Cross Traffic Alert ................................ 245 Drive Away Assist ................................ 244 Exiting a parking space ....................... 237 Function .............................................. 234 Manoeuvring assistance ...................... 245 Parking ................................................ 236 System limitations ............................... 234 Active Steering Assist ............................. 215 Activating/deactivating ....................... 217 Displays in the Instrument Display ....... 217 Function ............................................... 215 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 520 Index System limitations ............................... 215 Adaptive brake lights .............................. 208 Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED see Intelligent Light System Adaptive Highbeam Assist Activating/deactivating ....................... 140 Function .............................................. 139 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Function ............................................... 141 Switching on/off ................................. 142 AdBlue .................................................... 433 Additives ............................................. 433 Capacity .............................................. 434 Consumption ....................................... 434 Fill level ............................................... 264 Notes ................................................... 185 Purity ................................................... 433 Range .................................................. 264 Topping up ........................................... 186 Additional door lock .................................. 76 Additives .................................................. 434 AdBlue ................................................. 433 Engine oil ............................................ 434 Fuel ..................................................... 431 Additives (AdBlue) see AdBlue Additives (engine oil) see Additives Additives (fuel) see Fuel Address book see Contacts Adjusting the balance/fader Burmester surround sound system .... 361 Adjusting the headlamp range ............... 135 Adjusting the sound focus Burmester surround sound system .... 361 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings Burmester surround sound system ... 360 ADS PLUS damping system see AIR BODY CONTROL Adverse weather light ............................. 139 After-sales service centre see ASSYST PLUS AIR BODY CONTROL ................................ 221 Setting ................................................. 222 Suspension .......................................... 221 Air conditioning system see Climate control Air distribution ........................................ 154 Air freshener system see Fragrance system Air suspension see AIR BODY CONTROL Air vents ................................................... 164 Adjusting (front) ................................... 164 Adjusting (rear) .................................... 165 Glove box ............................................. 165 Air vents see Air vents Air-recirculation mode ............................ 157 Airbag ......................................................... 36 Activation .............................................. 30 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Belt airbag ............................................. 34 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) .... 36 Installation locations ............................. 36 Knee airbag ........................................... 36 Overview ............................................... 36 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 40 Protection .............................................. 37 Reduced protection ............................... 38 Side impact airbag ................................ 36 Window airbag ....................................... 36 Airflow ...................................................... 154 AIRPANEL (care) ....................................... 376 Alarm see Panic alarm Alarm system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Alternative route see Route Ambient lighting ...................................... 143 Android Auto ............................................ 331 Connecting a mobile phone ................. 331 Ending ................................................. 332 Information .......................................... 331 Overview .............................................. 331 Sound settings .................................... 332 Transferred vehicle data ...................... 332 Animals Pets in the vehicle .................................. 71 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains see Snow chains Anti-theft alarm system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Anti-theft protection Additional door lock ............................... 76 Immobiliser ........................................... 96 Anti-theft protection see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) Apple CarPlay ....................................... 329 Connecting an iPhone ....................... 330 Index 521 Ending ................................................. 331 Notes .................................................. 330 Overview ............................................. 329 Sound settings .................................... 330 Transferred vehicle data ...................... 332 Ashtray Front centre console ........................... 126 Rear passenger compartment ............. 127 Assistance systems see Driving safety system Assistant display Menu (on-board computer) .................. 264 ASSYST PLUS ........................................... 362 Battery disconnection periods ............. 363 Displaying the service due date ........... 362 Function/notes ................................... 362 Regular maintenance work .................. 362 Special service requirements .............. 362 ATA (anti-theft alarm system) .................. 96 Deactivating the alarm .......................... 96 Function ................................................ 96 Function of interior protection ............... 97 Priming/deactivating interior protec tion ........................................................ 98 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 522 Index Priming/deactivating tow-away pro tection ................................................... 97 Tow-away protection function ................ 97 ATTENTION ASSIST .......................... 245, 246 Function .............................................. 245 Setting ................................................. 246 System limitations ............................... 245 Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST Audio 20 see Multimedia system Audio mode Connecting USB devices ..................... 350 Copyrights ........................................... 348 Information .......................................... 347 Inserting/removing an SD card ........... 348 Media search ....................................... 351 Overview ............................................. 349 Pause and playback function ............... 350 Selecting a track ................................. 350 Selecting playback options .................. 350 Switching on media mode ................... 348 Track list .............................................. 350 Authorised workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Automatic driving lights ......................... 135 Automatic engine start (ECO start/

stop function) .......................................... 173 Automatic engine stop (ECO start/

stop function) .......................................... 173 Automatic front passenger front air bag deactivation system see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff .......................................... 39, 40 Function of the automatic front passenger front airbag deactivation system ................................................... 39 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 40 Automatic lateral support adjustment Setting ................................................. 107 Automatic mirror folding function Activating/deactivating ....................... 152 Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever ........................... 178 Drive program display .......................... 177 Drive programs .................................... 177 DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 177 Engaging drive position ....................... 180 Engaging neutral .................................. 179 Engaging park position ........................ 180 Engaging reverse gear ......................... 179 Kickdown ............................................. 181 Manual gear changing ......................... 180 Steering wheel gearshift paddles ........ 180 Transmission position display .............. 178 Transmission positions ........................ 178 Axle load Permissible .......................................... 426 Trailer operation .................................. 441 B Ball neck Extending/retracting ........................... 252 BAS (Brake Assist System) ..................... 198 Battery Charging (Remote Online) .................... 170 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Key ......................................................... 74 Remote control (stationary heater) ...... 162 Battery (vehicle) Charging .............................................. 393 Notes ........................................... 389, 391 Starting assistance .............................. 393 Belt see Seat belt Belt airbag Activation .............................................. 30 Function/notes ..................................... 34 Bicycle rack Trailer operation .................................. 256 Blind Spot Assist ..................................... 247 Activating/deactivating ....................... 249 Function .............................................. 247 System limitations ............................... 247 Blower see Climate control BlueTEC see AdBlue Bluetooth ............................................... 283 Information .......................................... 283 Setting up an Internet connection ....... 341 Switching on/off ................................. 283 Switching profile (DUN/PAN) .............. 342 Bluetooth audio Activating ............................................ 355 De-authorising (de-registering) the device .................................................. 355 Information .......................................... 352 Overview ............................................. 353 Searching for a track ........................... 355 Searching for and authorising the device .................................................. 354 Selecting a music player ..................... 355 Switching device via NFC .................... 355 Boot box see EASY-PACK boot box Boot lid Activating/deactivating the tailgate opening limiter ...................................... 86 Closing .................................................. 82 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ........................... 84 Locking separately ................................ 85 Opening ................................................. 81 Opening dimensions ............................ 437 Index 523 Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Notes .................................................. 436 Brake force distribution EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu tion) ..................................................... 202 Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 197 Active Brake Assist .............................. 203 Adaptive brake lights ........................... 208 BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 198 Driving tips .......................................... 171 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu tion) ..................................................... 202 HOLD function ..................................... 219 Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads) .................................................. 171 New/replaced brakepads/brake discs .................................................... 170 Running-in notes .................................. 170 Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System) Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 524 Index Breakdown Overview of the help functions .............. 16 Tow-starting ........................................ 400 Towing away ........................................ 396 Transporting the vehicle ...................... 398 Wheel change ...................................... 417 Breakdown see Flat tyre Burmester surround sound system ..... 360 Adjusting the balance/fader ................ 361 Adjusting the sound focus ................... 361 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings ............................................... 360 Automatic volume adjustment ............. 361 Calling up the sound menu .................. 360 Information .......................................... 360 Switching the surround sound on/off

............................................................. 361 Business telephony Setting up an Internet connection ....... 340 Buttons Steering wheel .................................... 260 C Call list Making a call ....................................... 328 Overview ............................................. 328 Calling up the sound menu Burmester surround sound system ... 360 Calls .......................................................... 325 Accepting ............................................ 325 Activating functions during a call ........ 325 Calls with several participants ............. 325 Declining ............................................. 325 Ending a call ........................................ 325 Incoming call during an existing call .... 325 Making ................................................ 325 Via the overhead control panel

(Mercedes me connect) ...................... 334 Camera see 360 Camera see Reversing camera Car key see Key Car wash see Care Car wash (care) ....................................... 370 Care .......................................................... 378 AIRPANEL ............................................ 376 Car wash ............................................. 370 Carpet ................................................. 378 Decorative foil ...................................... 374 Display ................................................. 378 EASY-PACK boot box ............................ 378 Exhaust pipes ...................................... 376 Exterior lighting ................................... 376 High-pressure cleaner .......................... 371 Matt finish ........................................... 373 Paintwork ............................................ 373 Plastic trim .......................................... 378 Real wood/trim elements .................... 378 Reversing camera/360 camera ......... 376 Roof lining ........................................... 378 Seat belt .............................................. 378 Seat cover ........................................... 378 Sensors ............................................... 376 Trailer hitch .......................................... 376 Washing by hand .................................. 371 Wheels/rims ........................................ 376 Windows .............................................. 376 Wiper blades ........................................ 376 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Carpet (Care) ............................................ 378 Changing bulbs ........................................ 144 Dipped beam ....................................... 145 Fitting/removing cover (front wheel arch) .................................................... 145 Main beam .......................................... 145 Notes ................................................... 144 Opening/closing the side trim pan els ....................................................... 146 Overview ............................................. 144 Reversing lights ................................... 146 Turn signal light (front) ........................ 145 Turn signal lights (rear) ........................ 146 Changing gears ........................................ 180 Manually .............................................. 180 Changing hub caps .................................. 417 Changing the lights Driving abroad (symmetrical dipped beam) .................................................. 134 Charging Battery (vehicle) .................................. 393 Mobile phone (wireless) ....................... 129 USB port .............................................. 129 Chassis level (AIR BODY CONTROL) Setting ................................................. 222 Child safety lock Rear door .............................................. 69 Rear side windows ................................. 70 Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle ............. 46 Basic instructions .................................. 45 Chock ........................................................ 416 Storage location ................................... 416 Index 525 Child seat Approval categories ............................... 53 Attaching (notes) ................................... 52 Basic instructions .................................. 45 Front passenger seat (notes) ................. 67 Front passenger seat (without auto matic airbag shutoff) ............................. 66 ISOFIX/i-Size (fitting) ............................ 58 Notes on risks and dangers ................... 46 Recommended child restraint sys tems ...................................................... 49 Seats suitable for belt-secured child restraint systems ................................... 62 Seats suitable for iSize child restraint systems ................................... 57 Seats suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems ................................... 55 Securing on the co-driver's seat ............ 68 Securing on the rear seat ...................... 65 Top Tether .............................................. 60 Cigarette lighter Front centre console ............................ 127 City lighting ............................................. 139 Cleaning see Care Climate control ........................................ 154 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel) ....................... 156 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (multimedia system) .............. 156 Activating/deactivating the synchro nisation function (control panel) .......... 157 Activating/deactivating the synchro nisation function (multimedia sys tem) ..................................................... 157 Air distribution settings ....................... 156 Air-recirculation mode ......................... 157 Automatic control ................................ 156 Climate style function .......................... 156 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 526 Index Defrosting the windscreen ................... 154 Demisting windows .............................. 157 Front air vents ..................................... 164 Glove box air vent ................................ 165 Inserting/removing the flacon (fra grance system) .................................... 158 Ionisation ............................................. 158 Note .................................................... 154 Rear air vents ...................................... 165 Rear operating unit .............................. 154 Residual heat ....................................... 157 Setting the air distribution ................... 154 Setting the airflow ............................... 154 Setting the climate style ...................... 156 Setting the fragrance system ............... 158 Setting the temperature ...................... 154 Stationary heater/ventilation .............. 159 Switching on/off ................................. 155 Switching the rear window heater on/off ................................................. 154 THERMATIC control panel .................... 154 THERMOTRONIC control panel ............ 154 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening) ................................................ 89 Windscreen heating ............................. 159 Climate style Function .............................................. 156 Setting ................................................. 156 Cockpit ......................................................... 6 Overview ................................................. 6 Combination switch ................................ 136 Combination switch see Turn signal lights Compass ................................................... 316 Computer see On-board computer Connection status Displaying ............................................ 343 Overview ............................................. 343 Contacts ................................................... 326 Calling up ............................................ 326 Deleting ............................................... 328 Downloading (from mobile phone) ...... 326 Importing ............................................. 327 Importing (overview) ........................... 327 Information .......................................... 326 Making a call ....................................... 327 Name format ....................................... 327 Options ................................................ 327 Storing ................................................. 327 Controller Operating ............................................. 274 Convenience closing ................................. 89 Convenience opening ................................ 89 Coolant (engine) Check level .......................................... 368 Notes .................................................. 436 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ................................................... 28 Cornering light ......................................... 138 Cover .......................................................... 86 Cross Traffic Alert ................................... 245 Crosswind Assist Function/notes ................................... 202 Cruise control .......................................... 208 Activating ............................................. 210 Buttons ................................................ 210 Calling up a speed ............................... 210 Deactivating ......................................... 210 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Function .............................................. 208 Requirements ...................................... 210 Selecting .............................................. 210 Setting a speed .................................... 210 Storing a speed .................................... 210 System limitations ............................... 208 Cup holder Rear ..................................................... 126 Cup holder in the centre console installing/removing (automatic transmission) ....................................... 125 D Damage detection (parked vehicle) ....... 195 Dashboard see Cockpit Dashboard lighting see Instrument lighting Data acquisition Vehicle .................................................. 26 Data import/export ................................ 286 Function/notes ................................... 286 Importing/exporting ............................ 287 Data storage Electronic control units ......................... 26 Online services ...................................... 27 Vehicle .................................................. 26 Date Setting the time and date automati cally ..................................................... 282 Deactivating the alarm (ATA) .................... 96 Declaration of conformity Electromagnetic compatibility ............... 22 Jack ....................................................... 22 TIREFIT kit ............................................. 23 Wireless vehicle components ................ 22 Decorative foil (cleaning instructions) .. 374 DeNOx agent see AdBlue Designs Menu (on-board computer) .................. 270 Destination .............................................. 307 Editing intermediate destinations ........ 297 Editing the previous destinations ........ 308 External ............................................... 308 Saving (current vehicle position) ......... 307 Index 527 Saving as global favourite .................... 308 Storing a map position ........................ 308 Destination entry .................................... 293 Entering a POI or address .................... 293 Entering an intermediate destination ... 297 Entering geo-coordinates .................... 298 Selecting a contact ............................. 298 Selecting a POI .................................... 296 Selecting from the map ....................... 299 Selecting previous destinations ........... 296 Detecting inattentiveness see ATTENTION ASSIST Diagnostics connection ............................ 24 Diesel Low outside temperatures ................... 431 Notes ................................................... 431 Digital Owner's Manual ............................. 18 Digital speedometer ............................... 265 Digital Vehicle Key sticker Locking the vehicle ................................ 77 Starting the vehicle ............................. 168 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 77 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 528 Index Dinghy towing see Tow-bar system Dipped beam Changing bulbs .................................... 145 Setting ................................................. 142 Setting for abroad ................................ 134 Switching on/off ................................. 134 DIRECT SELECT lever ............................... 178 Engaging drive position ....................... 180 Engaging neutral .................................. 179 Engaging park position ........................ 180 Engaging park position automatically .. 180 Engaging reverse gear ......................... 179 Function ............................................... 178 Display Care ..................................................... 378 Display (multimedia system) Notes ................................................... 272 Settings ............................................... 281 Display (on-board computer) Displays in the multifunction display ... 263 Display content Additional value range ......................... 262 Display message ..................................... 442 Calling up (on-board computer) ........... 442 Notes .................................................. 442 Display messages

? ................................................... 477 C ................................................... 496 M ................................................... 496 N ................................................... 497

.................................................... 467

#12 V battery See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 470 Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 464 Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative .... 465 Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual ................................................ 465 Active bonnet malfunction See Own er's Manual ......................................... 495 Active Brake Assist Functions cur rently limited See Owner's Manual ...... 455 Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual ........................... 454 Active Distance Assist available again ................................................... 465 Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 466 Active Distance Assist inoperative ...... 466 Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera view restricted See Owner's Manual ... 463 Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 462 Active Lane Keeping Assist inopera tive ...................................................... 463 bActive Light System inoperative .. 498 Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own er's Manual ......................................... 465 Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 466 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Active Steering Assist inopera tive ...................................................... 467 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Camera view restricted See Owner's Manual ... 501 Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 501 Adaptive Highbeam Assist inopera tive ...................................................... 500 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Cam era view restricted See Owner's Manual ................................................ 500 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur rently unavailable See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 500 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inop erative ................................................. 499 AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible ................................ 479 AdBlue system fault Perf. reduced in XXX km See Owner's Manual ................................................. 478 AdBlue system fault See Own er's Manual .......................................... 478 4Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling ............................................. 475 Air conditioning Malfunction See Owner's Manual ................................... 491 Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position ............................................... 489 Apply brake to select R ....................... 492 ATTENTION ASSIST inoperative ... 460 ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break! .................................................. 460 bAutomatic driving lights inoper ative .................................................... 499 Auxiliary battery malfunction ............... 491 Blind Spot Assist currently unavaila ble See Owner's Manual ...................... 464 Index 529 Blind Spot Assist inoperative ............... 465 Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual ... 464

.................................................... 466 Change key batteries .................. 485 JCheck brake fluid level ................ 452 4Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling ............................................. 473 jCheck trailer hitch lock ............... 488 hCheck tyre(s) ............................... 481

!Clean the fuel filter ...................... 476

?Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine off ............................................ 469 Cruise control and Limiter inopera tive ...................................................... 467 Cruise control inoperative ................... 467 Cruise control off ................................ 467

!currently unavailable See Own er's Manual ......................................... 444 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 530 Index currently unavailable See Own er's Manual ......................................... 445

.................................................... 468 5Engine oil level cannot be measured ............................................. 476 4Engine oil level Reduce oil level ... 474 4Engine oil level Stop vehicle Switch engine off ................................. 474 4Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off engine ............................................ 475 Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h ............... 462 6Front left malfunction Consult workshop (example) ............................ 457 Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual .................................. 458 Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual .................................. 459

!inoperative See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 443 inoperative See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 446 Tinoperative See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 447 GInoperative .................................. 452 bIntelligent Light System inoper ative .................................................... 498 Key not detected (white dis play message) ..................................... 485 Key not detected(red display message) ............................................. 486 bLeft dipped beam (example) ........ 498 6Left windowbag malfunction Consult workshop (example) ............... 457 Let fresh air into the vehicle interior!

Air conditioning malf. Visit workshop .. 494 Limiter inoperative ............................... 467 Limiter passive .................................... 467 Lowering .................................... 460 bMalfunction See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 499 Maximum speed exceeded .......... 468 Mercedes me connect Services limi ted See Owner's Manual ..................... 454 N permanently active Risk of vehicle rolling .................................................. 490 Off ............................................... 465 Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary ............................................ 490 jOperation only possible in transmission position N ....................... 492 jOperation only possible in transmission position P ....................... 492

!Parking brake See Owner's Manual ................................................ 449 Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual ................. 486 Please reduce speed ........................... 462 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual ........................... 455 PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual ................................................ 455 Radar sensors dirty See Owner's Manual ................................................ 454 _Rear left seat backrest not locked (example) ................................. 497 hRectify tyre pressure ................... 481 Refill AdBlue Eng. start not pos sible ..................................................... 479 Refill AdBlue See Owners Man ual ....................................................... 477

!Release parking brake ................. 448 Replace air cleaner ...................... 476

,Replace key See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 485 Replace key ................................. 484 8Reserve fuel level ........................ 476 6Restraint sys. malfunction Con sult workshop ...................................... 456 Reversing not poss. Consult work shop .................................................... 491 Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door open and transmission not in P ........... 489

#See Owner's Manual ................... 470 Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h ... 468 Steering malfunction Drive carefully Visit workshop ...................... 493 Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual .... 494 Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual ....... 493 Stop vehicle Leave engine running Wait Transmission cooling ................... 491

#Stop vehicle Leave engine run ning ..................................................... 472

#Stop vehicle See Owner's Man ual ........................................................ 471 Index 531 Stop vehicle Vehicle too low ........ 461 suspended .................................. 466 bSwitch off lights .......................... 499 bSwitch on headlamps .................. 499 To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine .................................. 489 Top up coolant See Owners Manual ... 468 Top up washer fluid ..................... 497 jTrailer coupling extending ......... 487 Transmission Malfunction Stop ............ 491

!Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake ................................ 447 Tyre press. monitor currently unavail able ..................................................... 482 Tyre press. monitor inoperative ........... 483 Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors ..................................... 483 Tyre pressure Check tyres ................... 480 Tyre(s) overheated ............................... 483 Tyre(s) overheated Reduce speed ........ 484 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 532 Index dVehicle is operational Switch off the ignition before exiting .............. 490 Vehicle rising Please wait ............ 461 Vehicle rising ............................... 460 hWarning tyre defect ..................... 482 hWheel sensor(s) missing ............. 483 Without changing gear, consult work shop .................................................... 490 Display on the windscreen see Head-up display Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Distance recorder see Trip distance DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Door Additional door lock ............................... 76 Child safety lock (rear door) .................. 69 Locking (emergency key) ....................... 80 Opening (from the inside) ...................... 76 Unlocking (emergency key) ................... 80 Unlocking (from the inside) .................... 76 Door control panel ..................................... 14 Drawbar see Tow-bar system Drive Away Assist .................................... 244 Drive position Engaging .............................................. 180 Drive program display ............................. 177 Drive programs see DYNAMIC SELECT Driver's seat see Seat Driving abroad Symmetrical dipped beam ................... 134 Driving lights see Automatic driving lights Driving safety system ............................. 196 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 197 Active Brake Assist .............................. 203 Adaptive brake lights ........................... 208 BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 198 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu tion) ..................................................... 202 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) Crosswind Assist ................................. 202 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) trailer stabilisation .............................. 202 Overview .............................................. 197 Radar sensors ...................................... 197 Responsibility ...................................... 196 STEER CONTROL ................................. 203 Driving system see 360 Camera see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Steering Assist see AIR BODY CONTROL see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system see HOLD function see Limiter see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only see Remote Parking Assist see Reversing camera Driving tips Driving abroad (changing the lights) .... 134 General driving tips .............................. 171 Running-in notes .................................. 170 Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST Dynamic handling control system see ESP (Electronic Stability Program) DYNAMIC SELECT .................................... 177 Configuring drive program I ................. 178 Displaying engine data ......................... 178 Displaying vehicle data ........................ 178 Drive program display .......................... 177 Drive programs .................................... 177 Function .............................................. 177 Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch)

............................................................. 177 Selecting the drive program ................ 177 Showing operation feedback ............... 178 E E10 ............................................................ 430 Easy entry feature Function/notes .................................... 111 Setting ................................................. 112 Easy exit feature Function/notes .................................... 111 Setting ................................................. 112 EASY-PACK boot box ................................ 123 Adjusting the height to any position ..... 121 Care ..................................................... 378 Installing/removing ............................. 123 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu tion) Function/notes ................................... 202 ECO Assist Displaying ............................................ 177 Function/notes .................................... 175 ECO display Function ............................................... 175 Resetting ............................................. 266 ECO start/stop function .................. 173, 174 Automatic engine start ........................ 173 Automatic engine stop ......................... 173 Operation ............................................. 173 Switching off/on .................................. 174 Index 533 Electric parking brake ............. 193, 194, 195 Applying automatically ........................ 193 Applying or releasing manually ............ 194 Emergency braking .............................. 195 Releasing automatically ....................... 194 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity ...................... 22 Electronic Stability Program see ESP (Electronic Stability Program) Electronics ............................................... 424 Emergency Fire extinguisher .................................. 383 First-aid kit (soft sided) ....................... 382 Overview of the help functions .............. 16 Removing the warning triangle ............ 382 Safety vest ........................................... 381 Setting up the warning triangle ........... 382 Emergency braking ................................. 195 Emergency call system see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Emergency engine start ......................... 400 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 534 Index Emergency key Inserting/removing ................................ 74 Locking a door ....................................... 80 Unlocking a door ................................... 80 Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle ............................. 169 Emergency spare wheel ......................... 422 Notes .................................................. 422 Removing ............................................ 423 Energy consumption Key ........................................................ 73 Engine ECO start/stop function ...................... 173 Engine number .................................... 426 Starting (Digital Vehicle Key sticker) .... 168 Starting (emergency operation mode) .................................................. 169 Starting (mobile phone) ....................... 168 Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 170 Starting (start/stop button) ................. 167 Starting assistance .............................. 393 Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 188 Engine bonnet Function (active bonnet) ...................... 363 Opening/closing ................................. 364 Resetting (active bonnet) .................... 363 ERA-GLONASS test mode Starting/ending .................................. 339 Engine data Displaying ............................................ 178 Engine electronics Notes ................................................... 424 Engine number ........................................ 426 Engine oil ................................................. 367 Additives ............................................. 434 Capacity .............................................. 435 Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick ............................................... 366 Checking the oil level using the on-

board computer ................................... 366 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ............... 435 Quality ................................................. 435 Topping up ........................................... 367 Entering characters Function/notes ................................... 279 On the touchpad ................................. 280 Using the controller ............................. 280 EQ Boost ECO start/stop function (operation) .... 173 Glide mode .......................................... 181 ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ESP Crosswind Assist ................................. 202 Trailer stabilisation .............................. 202 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ...... 198 Activating/deactivating ....................... 202 Function/notes ................................... 198 EU general operating permit number .... 426 Exhaust pipes (care) ................................ 376 Exterior lighting Care ..................................................... 376 Exterior lighting see Lights F Fatigue detection see ATTENTION ASSIST Fault message see Display message Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Favourites ................................................ 276 Adding ................................................. 277 Calling up ............................................. 276 Deleting ............................................... 277 Moving ................................................ 277 Overview .............................................. 276 Renaming ............................................ 277 Fill level AdBlue ............................................... 264 Filling station search Starting an automatic filling station search ................................................. 297 Switching the automatic filling sta tion search on/off ............................... 302 Fire extinguisher ..................................... 383 First-aid kit (soft sided) .......................... 382 Flacon Inserting/removing ............................. 158 Flat towing see Tow-bar system Flat tyre .................................................... 383 MOExtended tyres ............................... 384 Notes .................................................. 383 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 385 Wheel change ...................................... 417 Floor mats ................................................ 131 Fog light (extended range) ...................... 139 Fragrance see Fragrance system Fragrance system .................................... 158 Inserting/removing the flacon ............. 158 Setting ................................................. 158 Free software ............................................ 28 Frequencies Mobile phone ...................................... 425 Two-way radio ...................................... 425 Frequency band Dialling (on-board computer) ............... 267 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ..... 36 Front passenger seat Adjusting from the driver's seat .......... 103 Front passenger seat see Seat Front wheel arch ..................................... 145 Fitting/removing the cover .................. 145 Index 535 Front wheel arch cover Fitting/removing ................................. 145 Fuel ........................................................... 431 Additives .............................................. 431 Diesel .................................................. 431 E10 ...................................................... 430 Fuel reserve ........................................ 432 Low outside temperatures ................... 431 Petrol ................................................... 430 Quality (diesel) ..................................... 431 Quality (petrol) .................................... 430 Refuelling ............................................ 182 Sulphur content ................................... 430 Tank content ....................................... 432 Fuel consumption On-board computer ............................. 265 Function seat see Door control panel Fuse insert see Fuses Fuses ........................................................ 400 Before replacing a fuse ........................ 400 Fuse assignment diagram ................... 400 Fuse box in the boot ............................ 403 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 536 Index Fuse box in the engine compartment .. 401 Fuse box in the front passenger foot well ...................................................... 402 Fuse box on the dashboard ................. 402 Notes .................................................. 400 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ........................... 191 Opening or closing the door ................. 191 Programming buttons .......................... 189 Radio equipment approval numbers .... 192 Resolving problems ............................. 190 Synchronising the rolling code ............ 190 Gearshift recommendation ..................... 181 General operating permit number

(EU) ........................................................... 426 Genuine parts ............................................ 20 Glide mode ............................................... 181 Glove box Air vent ................................................ 165 Locking/unlocking ............................... 115 H Handbrake see Electric parking brake Handling characteristics (unusual) ....... 404 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ................................ 84 Hazard warning lights ............................. 137 Head restraint ......................................... 104 Front (adjusting mechanically) ............. 104 Front (luxury head restraint) ................ 105 Rear (adjusting) ................................... 106 Rear (fitting/removing) ........................ 106 Head-up display ....................................... 269 Adjusting display elements (on-board computer) ............................................ 269 Adjusting the brightness (on-board computer) ............................................ 269 Function .............................................. 270 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 269 Operating the memory function ........... 112 Setting the position (on-board com puter) .................................................. 269 Switching on/off ................................. 271 Headlamp flasher .................................... 136 Headlamp flasher see Combination switch Heating see Climate control High-pressure cleaner (care) .................. 371 Hill Start Assist ........................................ 219 HOLD function ......................................... 219 Function/notes .................................... 219 Switching on/off ................................. 219 Hooking the luggage net ......................... 120 Hotspot Setting up (Wi-Fi) ................................. 285 Via business telephony ........................ 283 I i-Size child seat securing system Fitting .................................................... 58 Seats suitable for attaching ................... 57 Identification plate Engine ................................................. 426 Vehicle ................................................ 426 Ignition Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 166 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Ignition key see Key Immobiliser ................................................ 96 Implied warranty Vehicle .................................................. 25 Indicator lamps see Warning/indicator lamps Individual drive program Configuring .......................................... 178 Selecting ............................................. 177 Instrument cluster see Instrument display see Warning/indicator lamps Instrument display .................................. 259 Adjusting the lighting .......................... 263 Function/notes ................................... 259 Overview ......................................... 8, 259 Warning/indicator lamps ..................... 501 Instrument lighting ................................. 263 Intelligent Light System .......................... 137 Active headlamps ................................ 138 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ............ 141 Adverse weather light .......................... 139 City lighting ......................................... 139 Cornering light ..................................... 138 Fog light (extended range) ................... 139 Motorway mode ................................... 138 Overview .............................................. 137 Switching on/off ................................. 139 Interior lighting ....................................... 143 Ambient lighting .................................. 143 Setting ................................................. 143 Switch-off delay time ........................... 144 Interior lighting see Interior lighting Interior protection Function ................................................ 97 Priming/deactivating ............................. 98 Intermediate destination Calculating a route with intermediate destinations ........................................ 298 Editing ................................................. 297 Entering ............................................... 297 Starting an automatic filling station search ................................................. 297 Starting the automatic service sta tion search .......................................... 302 Index 537 Internet Calling up a web page ......................... 343 Closing the browser ............................ 345 Deleting a bookmark ........................... 345 Deleting browser data ......................... 345 Managing bookmarks .......................... 345 Internet connection Cancelling permission (mobile phone) ................................................. 342 Connection status ............................... 343 Displaying the connection status ........ 343 Editing access data ............................. 342 Establishing ......................................... 343 Information .......................................... 339 Mobile phone details ........................... 343 Restrictions ......................................... 339 Setting access data ............................. 341 Setting up (Bluetooth) ........................ 341 Setting up (business telephony) .......... 340 Setting up (Wi-Fi) ................................. 340 Switching Bluetooth profile (DUN/

PAN) .................................................... 342 Via communication module ................. 340 Internet radio Calling up ............................................ 345 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 538 Index Deleting stations ................................. 346 Logging out ......................................... 347 Overview ............................................. 346 Registering .......................................... 347 Saving stations .................................... 346 Selecting and connecting to a station

............................................................. 346 Selecting stream ................................. 347 Setting options .................................... 347 Terms of use ........................................ 347 Ionisation ................................................. 158 iPhone see Apple CarPlay see Mercedes-Benz Link ISOFIX child seat securing system Fitting .................................................... 58 Seats suitable for attaching ................... 55 J Jack Declaration of conformity ...................... 22 Storage location ................................... 416 Jump-start connection ............................ 393 Notes ................................................... 391 K Key .............................................................. 72 Acoustic locking verification signal ........ 73 Battery ................................................... 74 Emergency key ....................................... 74 Energy consumption .............................. 73 Features ................................................ 72 Key ring attachment .............................. 74 Overview ............................................... 72 Panic alarm ............................................ 73 Problem ................................................. 75 Unlocking setting ................................... 73 KEYLESS-GO Locking the vehicle ................................ 78 Problem ................................................. 79 Unlocking setting ................................... 73 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 78 Kickdown .................................................. 181 Using ................................................... 181 Knee airbag ................................................ 36 L Lamps see Interior lighting Lamps (instrument display) see Warning/indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist Language Notes .................................................. 286 Setting ................................................. 286 LED light see Intelligent Light System Level control system see AIR BODY CONTROL Light switch Overview ............................................. 134 Lighting see Lights Lights ........................................................ 134 Active headlamps ................................ 138 Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... 139 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ............ 141 Adjusting the instrument lighting ........ 263 Adverse weather light .......................... 139 Automatic driving lights ....................... 135 Changing bulbs .................................... 144 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only City lighting ......................................... 139 Combination switch ............................. 136 Cornering light ..................................... 138 Dipped beam ....................................... 134 Driving abroad ..................................... 134 Fog light (extended range) ................... 139 Hazard warning lights .......................... 137 Headlamp flasher ................................ 136 Headlamp range .................................. 135 Intelligent Light System ....................... 137 Light switch ......................................... 134 Main beam ........................................... 136 Motorway mode ................................... 138 Parking lights ....................................... 134 Rear fog light ....................................... 135 Responsibility for lighting systems ...... 134 Setting the dipped beam ..................... 142 Standing lights ..................................... 134 Turn signal lights ................................. 136 Limiter ...................................................... 209 Activating ............................................. 210 Buttons ................................................ 210 Calling up a speed ............................... 210 Deactivating ......................................... 210 Function .............................................. 209 Passive mode ...................................... 209 Permanent setting ................................ 211 Requirements: ..................................... 210 Selecting .............................................. 210 Setting a speed .................................... 210 Storing a speed .................................... 210 System limitations ............................... 209 Limiting speed see Limiter Live Traffic Information Displaying subscription information .... 309 Displaying the traffic map .................... 310 Displaying traffic incidents .................. 310 Extending a subscription ..................... 309 Issuing hazard alerts ............................ 311 Registering on Mercedes me ............... 309 Loading ..................................................... 120 Notes ................................................... 114 Roof rack ............................................. 124 Stowage space under the boot floor .... 123 Tie-down eyes ...................................... 120 Loading guidelines ................................... 114 Loads Securing ............................................... 114 Index 539 Locking/unlocking Activating/deactivating the auto matic locking feature ............................. 80 Additional door lock ............................... 76 Digital Vehicle Key sticker ..................... 77 Emergency key ...................................... 80 KEYLESS-GO .......................................... 78 Mobile phone ........................................ 77 Smartphone .......................................... 77 Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside ............................................... 76 Lubricant additives see Additives Luggage Luggage net ......................................... 120 Securing ............................................... 114 Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way) Lumbar support (4-way) ......................... 104 M Main beam Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... 139 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ............ 141 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 540 Index Changing bulbs .................................... 145 Switching on/off ................................. 136 Main beam see Combination switch Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction Restraint system ................................... 30 Map ............................................ 310, 311, 312 Avoiding an area .................................. 314 Avoiding an area (overview) ................. 314 Changing an area ................................. 315 Deleting an area ................................... 315 Displaying Qibla ................................... 316 Displaying the compass ....................... 316 Displaying the map version .................. 314 Displaying the next intersecting street ................................................... 314 Displaying the traffic map .................... 310 Displaying weather information ........... 316 Map data ............................................. 316 Moving ................................................. 313 Overview .............................................. 311 Selecting POI symbols ......................... 313 Selecting text information .................... 313 Selecting the map orientation .............. 313 Setting the map scale .......................... 312 Setting the map scale automatically .... 316 Updating .............................................. 315 Map and compass Overview .............................................. 311 Massage programs Overview .............................................. 107 Resetting the settings .......................... 107 Selecting the front seats ..................... 107 Massage settings Resetting ............................................. 107 Matt finish (cleaning instructions) ........ 373 Maximum gross vehicle weight ............. 426 Maximum speed see Limiter Mecca ....................................................... 316 Media Menu (on-board computer) .................. 268 Searching ............................................ 351 Media Interface Activating ............................................. 351 Information .......................................... 351 Overview ............................................. 352 Media mode Activating ............................................ 348 Media playback Operating (on-board computer) ........... 268 Media search Starting ................................................ 351 Media source Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 268 Memory function Head-up display Calling up stored settings ................................................ 112 Head-up display Storing settings ...... 112 Operating ............................................. 112 Outside mirrors Calling up stored settings ................................................ 112 Outside mirrors Storing settings ....... 112 Seat Calling up stored settings ......... 112 Seat Storing settings ........................ 112 Steering wheel Calling up saved settings ................................................ 112 Steering wheel Saving settings ......... 112 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Menu (on-board computer) Assistant display ................................. 264 Designs ............................................... 270 Head-up display ................................... 269 Media .................................................. 268 Navigation ........................................... 266 Overview .............................................. 261 Radio ................................................... 267 Service ................................................ 264 Telephone ............................................ 268 Trip ...................................................... 265 Mercedes me connect Accident management ........................ 335 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre ................................................. 333 Consenting to data transfer ................. 335 Information .......................................... 333 Making a call via the overhead con trol panel ............................................. 334 Service call with the me button ........... 334 Service message ................................. 335 Transferred data .................................. 336 Mercedes-AMG vehicles Notes ................................................... 166 Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys tem ........................................................... 336 Automatic emergency call ................... 337 Information .......................................... 336 Manual emergency call ........................ 337 Overview ............................................. 336 Self-diagnosis (Russia) ........................ 338 Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode ................................................... 339 Transferred data .................................. 338 Mercedes-Benz Link ........................ 328, 329 Connecting .......................................... 329 Ending ................................................. 329 Overview ............................................. 328 Using ................................................... 329 Mercedes-Benz Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Message (multifunction display) see Display message Message memory .................................... 442 Mirrors see Outside mirrors Mobile phone Authorising (Remote Parking Assist) .... 244 Index 541 Cancelling permission for Internet connection .......................................... 342 Damage detection (parked vehicle) ..... 195 Frequencies ......................................... 425 Locking the vehicle ................................ 77 Starting the vehicle ............................. 168 Transmission output (maximum) ......... 425 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 77 Wireless charging ................................ 131 Mobile phone see Android Auto see Apple CarPlay see Mercedes-Benz Link see Second telephone see Telephone Mobile phone voice recognition Starting ............................................... 324 Stopping .............................................. 324 Model series ............................................ 426 MOExtended tyres .................................. 384 Motorway mode ....................................... 138 MULTIBEAM LED see Intelligent Light System Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 542 Index Multifunction display (on-board com puter) ........................................................ 263 Multifunction steering wheel Overview of buttons ............................ 260 Multifunction steering wheel see Steering wheel Multimedia system .................................. 272 Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 196 Adjusting the volume ........................... 278 Central control elements ..................... 273 Configuring display settings ................ 281 Main functions ..................................... 276 Overview ............................................. 272 Rear climate control ............................ 157 Restoring the factory settings .............. 291 Switching the sound on/off ................. 278 Multimedia system see Favourites see Touchpad N Navigation Calling up the Digital Owner's Man ual ........................................................ 317 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 266 Showing/hiding the menu ................... 293 Switching on ....................................... 292 Updating the map data ........................ 315 Navigation see Destination see Destination entry see Map see Route see Route guidance see Traffic information Navigation announcements Activating/deactivating ....................... 305 Adjusting the volume ........................... 306 Repeating ............................................ 306 Switching audio fadeout on/off .......... 306 Switching on/off during a phone call .. 305 Navigation messages On-board computer ............................. 266 Navigation mode Inserting/removing an SD card ........... 291 Near Field Communication (NFC) .......... 323 Connecting the mobile phone to the multimedia system .............................. 323 Information .......................................... 323 Locking the vehicle (digital vehicle key sticker) ............................................ 77 Locking the vehicle (mobile phone) ....... 77 Starting the vehicle (Digital Vehicle Key sticker) .......................................... 168 Starting the vehicle (mobile phone) ..... 168 Switching Bluetooth audio equip ment .................................................... 355 Switching mobile phones .................... 323 Unlocking the vehicle (digital vehicle key sticker) ............................................ 77 Unlocking the vehicle (mobile phone) .... 77 Using a mobile phone .......................... 323 Neutral Engaging .............................................. 179 NFC see Near Field Communication (NFC) Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Non-operational time Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 196 O Occupant safety Pets in the vehicle .................................. 71 Occupant safety see Airbag see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) see PRE-SAFE Impulse Side see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt Odometer see Total distance Oil see Engine oil On-board computer ................................. 261 Assistant display menu ........................ 264 Displaying the service due date ........... 362 Head-up display menu ......................... 269 Media menu ........................................ 268 Menu designs ...................................... 270 Menu overview .................................... 261 Multifunction display ........................... 263 Navigation menu ................................. 266 Operating ............................................. 261 Radio menu ......................................... 267 Service menu ...................................... 264 Telephone menu .................................. 268 Trip menu ............................................ 265 On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection On-board electronics Engine electronics ............................... 424 Notes ................................................... 424 Two-way radios .................................... 424 Open-source software .............................. 28 Opening the boot lid using your foot HANDS-FREE ACCESS ........................... 84 Operating fluids AdBlue ............................................... 433 Additives (fuel) ..................................... 431 Index 543 Brake fluid ........................................... 436 Coolant (engine) .................................. 436 Engine oil ............................................ 434 Fuel (diesel) ......................................... 431 Fuel (petrol) ......................................... 430 Notes .................................................. 428 Windscreen washer fluid ..................... 437 Operating safety Declaration of Conformity (electro magnetic compatibility) ......................... 22 Declaration of conformity (jack) ............ 22 Declaration of conformity (TIREFIT kit) .. 23 Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components) ............................. 22 Information ............................................ 21 Operating system see On-board computer Outside mirrors ............................... 149, 150 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) .............. 150 Automatic mirror folding function ........ 152 Folding in/out ..................................... 149 Operating the memory function ........... 112 Parking position ................................... 151 Setting ................................................. 149 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 544 Index Overhead control panel Making calls (Mercedes me connect)

............................................................. 334 Overview ................................................ 12 Owner's Manual Vehicle equipment ................................. 21 Owner's Manual (digital) ........................... 18 P Paint code ................................................ 426 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) .......... 373 Panel heating Setting ................................................. 109 Panic alarm ................................................ 73 Activating/deactivating ......................... 73 Panoramic sliding sunroof see Sliding sunroof Park position Inserting .............................................. 180 Selecting automatically ....................... 180 Parking see Electric parking brake Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .................. 224 Activating ............................................ 226 Adjusting warning tones ...................... 227 Deactivating ........................................ 226 Function .............................................. 224 Side impact protection ........................ 225 System limitations ............................... 224 Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist Parking brake see Electric parking brake Parking lights ........................................... 134 Parking position Outside mirrors .................................... 151 Storing the position of the passenger outside mirror using reverse gear ........ 152 Parking up ................................................ 196 PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff Pedestrian protection see Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Pennant holder ........................................ 132 Perfume see Fragrance system Perfume vial see Fragrance system Permissible axle load .............................. 426 Permissible gross mass .......................... 426 Permitted towing methods ..................... 395 Personalisation see User profile Petrol ........................................................ 430 Pets in the vehicle ..................................... 71 Phone book see Contacts PIN protection Switching on/off ................................. 287 Plastic trim (Care) ................................... 378 Playback options Selecting ............................................. 350 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only POI Selecting ............................................. 296 POI symbols Selecting .............................................. 313 Power supply Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 166 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection) ................................................. 43 Function ................................................ 43 PRE-SAFE Sound ................................. 43 Reversing measures .............................. 44 PRE-SAFE Impulse Side ........................... 44 Activation .............................................. 30 Function ................................................ 44 PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occu pant protection plus) ................................ 44 Function ................................................ 44 Reversing measures .............................. 44 Preventative occupant protection sys tem see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) Previous destinations Selecting ............................................. 296 Programs see DYNAMIC SELECT Protection of the environment Notes ..................................................... 19 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles ............ 19 Q Qibla .......................................................... 316 QR code Rescue card .......................................... 25 Qualified specialist workshop .................. 24 R Radar sensors .......................................... 197 Radiator shutters see AIRPANEL (care) Index 545 Radio Activating/deactivating radio text ....... 359 Calling up a slide show ........................ 358 Calling up the station list ..................... 358 Deleting channels ................................ 358 Direct frequency entry ........................ 358 Displaying information ......................... 359 Displaying radio text ............................ 359 Editing station presets ......................... 358 Frequency fix ....................................... 359 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 267 Moving stations ................................... 358 Overview ............................................. 357 Searching for stations ......................... 358 Setting a channel ................................ 358 Setting station tracking ....................... 359 Setting the frequency band ................. 358 Setting the traffic information service volume increase ...................... 359 Storing radio stations .......................... 358 Switching on ....................................... 356 Switching traffic announcements on/off ................................................. 359 Tagging music tracks ........................... 359 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 546 Index Radio stations Dialling (on-board computer) ............... 267 Rain closing function Sliding sunroof ...................................... 93 Rain-closing feature Side windows ........................................ 88 Range AdBlue ............................................... 264 Displaying ............................................ 265 Reading light see Interior lighting Real wood (Care) ..................................... 378 Rear climate control Setting ................................................. 157 Rear door (child safety lock) .................... 69 Rear fog light ........................................... 135 Rear seat see Seat Rear seat belt Status display ........................................ 36 Rear seat belt status display .................... 36 Rear window Roller sunblind ...................................... 86 Rear window heater ................................ 154 Rear-view mirror see Outside mirrors Recycling see Take-back of end-of-life vehicles Reducing agent see AdBlue Refuelling Refuelling the vehicle .......................... 182 Topping up AdBlue ............................. 186 Registration Vehicle .................................................. 25 Remote control (stationary heater) Displays ............................................... 162 Problems ............................................. 163 Replacing the battery .......................... 162 Setting ................................................. 161 Remote Online Charging the battery ............................ 170 Cooling or heating the vehicle inte rior ....................................................... 169 Starting the vehicle ............................. 170 Remote Parking Assist ............................ 239 Authorising a mobile phone ................. 244 Function .............................................. 239 Operating ............................................. 241 System limitations ............................... 239 Replacing a bulb see Changing bulbs Replacing the battery (vehicle) see 12 V battery Replacing the vehicle battery see 12 V battery Rescue card ............................................... 25 Reserve Fuel ..................................................... 432 Reset function (multimedia system) ..... 291 Residual heat ........................................... 157 Restoring (factory settings) see Reset function (multimedia system) Restraint system ....................................... 29 Basic instructions for children ............... 45 Function in an accident ......................... 30 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Functionality .......................................... 30 Malfunction ........................................... 30 Protection .............................................. 29 Reduced protection ............................... 29 Self-test ................................................. 30 Warning lamp ........................................ 30 Reverse gear Inserting .............................................. 179 Reversing camera .................................... 227 Care ..................................................... 376 Function .............................................. 227 Opening the camera cover (360 Camera) .............................................. 234 Setting favourites (360 Camera) ....... 234 Switching automatic operation on/off (360 Camera) ......................... 234 Reversing lights (changing bulbs) ......... 146 Rims (care) ............................................... 376 Roll away protection see HOLD function Roller sunblind Rear window .......................................... 86 Side windows ........................................ 86 Roller sunblind see Cover Roof lining (care) ..................................... 378 Roof load .................................................. 439 Roof rack .................................................. 124 Route ................................................ 300, 302 Activating a commuter route ............... 302 Calculating .......................................... 300 Displaying destination information ...... 302 Planning .............................................. 297 Selecting a type .................................. 300 Selecting an alternative route ............. 302 Selecting notifications ......................... 301 Selecting options ................................. 301 Starting the automatic service sta tion search .......................................... 302 Switching the automatic filling sta tion search on/off ............................... 302 With intermediate destinations ........... 298 Route guidance ....................................... 303 Cancelling ............................................ 307 Changing direction .............................. 304 Destination reached ............................ 305 From an off-road location .................... 307 Index 547 Lane recommendations ....................... 304 Notes .................................................. 303 Off-road ............................................... 307 To an off-road destination .................... 307 Route-based speed adaptation Displays in the Instrument Display ....... 217 Run-flat characteristics MOExtended tyres ............................... 384 Running-in notes ...................................... 170 S Safety systems see Driving safety system Safety vest ............................................... 381 SD card Inserting/removing ............................. 348 Seat ................................................... 100, 116 4-way lumbar support .......................... 104 Adjusting (electrically) ......................... 103 Adjusting (manually and electrically) ... 100 Adjusting (Seat Comfort) ..................... 102 Backrest (rear) locking ......................... 118 Correct driver's seat position ................ 99 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 548 Index Folding the backrest (rear) back .......... 118 Folding the backrest (rear) forwards .... 116 Massage programme overview ............ 107 Operating the memory function ........... 112 Panel heating ....................................... 109 Resetting the settings .......................... 107 Setting automatic lateral support adjustment .......................................... 107 Setting options ...................................... 14 Seat see Head restraint Seat belt ............................................... 31, 35 Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment ............................................ 35 Adjusting the height .............................. 34 Belt airbag ............................................. 34 Care ..................................................... 378 Protection .............................................. 31 Rear seat belt status display ................. 36 Reduced protection ............................... 32 Releasing ............................................... 35 Seat belt adjustment (function) ............. 35 Warning lamp ........................................ 35 Wearing ................................................. 34 Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating ......................... 35 Function ................................................ 35 Seat belt tensioners Activation .............................................. 30 Seat belt warning see Seat belt Seat cover (Care) ..................................... 378 Seat heater Activating/deactivating ....................... 108 Seat settings Configuring .......................................... 106 Seat ventilation Activating/deactivating ....................... 109 Second telephone ................................... 320 Connecting .......................................... 320 Features .............................................. 320 Selecting a gear see Changing gears Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever Self-test Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff ............................................ 40 Sensors (care) .......................................... 376 Service Menu (on-board computer) .................. 264 Service see ASSYST PLUS Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Service interval display see ASSYST PLUS Setting a speed see Cruise control Setting summer time .............................. 282 Setting the date format .......................... 282 Setting the distance unit ........................ 286 Setting the map scale see Map Shift paddles see Steering wheel gearshift paddles Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Shifting gears Gearshift recommendation .................. 181 Side impact airbag .................................... 36 Side impact protection ........................... 225 Side windows ............................................. 87 Automatic function ................................ 88 Child safety lock in the rear ................... 70 Closing .................................................. 87 Closing using the key ............................ 89 Convenience closing ............................. 89 Convenience opening ............................ 89 Opening ................................................. 87 Opening with the key ............................. 89 Problem ................................................. 90 Rain-closing feature ............................... 88 Roller sunblind ...................................... 86 Ski/snowboard bag ................................. 119 Sliding sunroof ........................................... 91 Automatic functions .............................. 93 Closing .................................................. 91 Closing using the key ............................ 89 Opening ................................................. 91 Opening with the key ............................. 89 Problem ................................................. 94 Rain closing function ............................. 93 Smartphone Locking the vehicle ................................ 77 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 77 Smartphone see Android Auto see Apple CarPlay see Mercedes-Benz Link see Telephone Snow chains ............................................ 404 Socket (12 V) ............................................ 127 Front centre console ............................ 127 Rear ..................................................... 128 Socket (230 V) ......................................... 128 Rear passenger compartment ............. 128 Software update ...................................... 289 Important system updates .................. 290 Information .......................................... 289 Performing .......................................... 290 Sound PRE-SAFE Sound ................................. 43 Wheels and tyres ................................. 404 Index 549 Sound see Burmester surround sound system see Tone settings Sound settings Adjusting the balance/fader ............... 360 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings ............................................... 360 Automatic volume adjustment ............. 360 Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel Spectacles compartment ........................ 116 Speed limitation for winter tyres Setting ................................................. 211 Speedometer Digital .................................................. 265 Standby mode Activating/deactivating ....................... 196 Function .............................................. 196 Standing lights ........................................ 134 Start/stop button Parking the vehicle .............................. 188 Starting the vehicle .............................. 167 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 550 Index Switching on the power supply or ignition ................................................ 166 Station tracking Setting ................................................. 359 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting assistance see Jump-start connection Starting the engine see Vehicle Starting-off aid see Hill Start Assist Station Deleting ............................................... 358 Direct frequency entry ........................ 358 Frequency fix ....................................... 359 Moving ................................................ 358 Searching ............................................ 358 Setting ................................................. 358 Storing ................................................ 358 Station list Calling up ............................................ 358 Station presets Modifying ............................................ 358 Stationary heater/ventilation Displays (remote control) .................... 162 Problems (remote control) ................... 163 Setting (remote control) ....................... 161 Setting (using the multimedia sys tem) ..................................................... 161 Switching on/off (control panel) ......... 159 STEER CONTROL Function/notes ................................... 203 Steering wheel ........................................ 260 Adjusting (electrically) ......................... 110 Adjusting (manually) ............................ 109 Buttons ................................................ 260 Operating the memory function ........... 112 Steering wheel heater .......................... 111 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .......... 180 Steering wheel heater Switching on/off .................................. 111 Stowage areas see Loading see Stowage compartment Stowage compartment ............................ 115 Armrest ................................................ 115 Centre console ..................................... 115 Door ..................................................... 115 Glove box ............................................. 115 Rear armrest ........................................ 116 Spectacles compartment ..................... 116 Stowage compartments see Loading see Stowage compartment Stowage space under the boot floor ..... 123 Sulphur content ...................................... 430 Sun visor Operating ............................................ 152 Surround lighting Setting ................................................. 142 Surround View see 360 Camera Suspension Adjusting the chassis level (AIR BODY CONTROL) ................................. 222 Suspension see AIR BODY CONTROL Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Switch-off delay time Exterior ................................................ 142 Interior ................................................ 144 Switching the surround sound on/off Burmester surround sound system .... 361 Synchronisation function Activating/deactivating (multimedia system) ................................................ 157 Switching on/off (control panel) ......... 157 System Setting the time/date format .............. 282 System settings Activating/deactivating PIN protec tion ...................................................... 287 Language ............................................. 286 Notes on language selection ............... 286 Reset function (multimedia system) .... 291 Setting the distance unit ..................... 286 Setting the time and date automati cally ..................................................... 282 Setting the time zone .......................... 282 Switching transmission of the vehicle position on/off .................................... 283 System settings see Bluetooth see Data import/export see Software update see Wi-Fi T Take-back of end-of-life vehicles .............. 19 Protection of the environment ............... 19 Tank content AdBlue ............................................... 434 Fuel ..................................................... 432 Reserve (fuel) ...................................... 432 Technical data Axle load (trailer operation) ................. 441 Fastening points (trailer hitch) ............. 439 Information .......................................... 424 Mounting dimensions (trailer hitch) ..... 439 Notes (trailer hitch) ............................. 439 Overhang dimension (trailer hitch) ...... 439 Tongue weight ..................................... 440 Towing weight (towing a trailer) ........... 440 Tyre pressure monitoring system ........ 409 Vehicle identification plate .................. 426 Index 551 Telephone ......................................... 268, 317 Activating functions during a call ........ 325 Authorising a mobile phone (Remote Parking Assist) ..................................... 244 Business telephony settings ................ 322 Call and ringtone volume ..................... 324 Calls with several participants ............. 325 Connecting a mobile phone (busi ness telephony) ................................... 321 Connecting a mobile phone (Near Field Communication (NFC)) ............... 323 Connecting a mobile phone (Pass key) ...................................................... 319 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing) ..................................... 319 De-authorising a mobile phone ............ 323 Disconnecting a mobile phone ............ 323 Importing contacts .............................. 327 Importing contacts (overview) ............. 327 Incoming call during an existing call .... 325 Information .......................................... 319 Interchanging mobile phones .............. 322 Locking the vehicle (mobile phone) ....... 77 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 268 Mobile phone voice recognition ........... 324 Notes ................................................... 318 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 552 Index Operating modes ................................. 318 Reception and transmission volume .... 324 Starting the vehicle (mobile phone) ..... 168 Switching mobile phones (Near Field Communication (NFC)) ........................ 323 Symbols for business telephony .......... 322 Telephone menu overview .................... 317 Telephone operation ............................ 325 Unlocking the vehicle (mobile phone) .... 77 Using a SIM card for business tel ephony ................................................ 320 Using Near Field Communication

(NFC) ................................................... 323 Wireless charging (mobile phone) ........ 131 Telephone see Second telephone Telephone number Dialling (on-board computer) ............... 268 Telephone operation see Calls Telephony operating modes Bluetooth Telephony .......................... 318 Business telephony .............................. 318 Telephony operating modes see Second telephone Temperature ............................................ 154 Through-loading feature see Seat Tie-down eyes .......................................... 120 Time Manual time setting ............................. 282 Setting summer time ........................... 282 Setting the time and date automati cally ..................................................... 282 Setting the time zone .......................... 282 Setting the time/date format .............. 282 TIREFIT kit ................................................ 385 Declaration of conformity ...................... 23 Storage location .................................. 385 Using ................................................... 385 Tone settings ........................................... 359 Calling up the sound menu .................. 360 Information .......................................... 359 Tongue weight ......................................... 440 Tool see Vehicle tool kit Top Tether .................................................. 60 Total distance .......................................... 265 Displaying ............................................ 265 Touch Control On-board computer ............................. 261 Operating ............................................ 273 Setting the sensitivity .......................... 273 Touchpad .................................................. 274 Activating/deactivating haptic oper ation feedback ..................................... 275 Operating ............................................. 274 Reading the handwriting recognition aloud ................................................... 275 Selecting a station and track ............... 275 Setting the sensitivity .......................... 275 Switching on/off ................................. 274 Tow-away protection Function ................................................ 97 Priming/deactivating ............................. 97 Tow-bar system ....................................... 258 Tow-starting ............................................. 400 Towing away ............................................ 396 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Towing eye Installing .............................................. 400 Storage location .................................. 399 Towing methods ...................................... 395 Track Selecting (audio mode) ....................... 350 Traffic announcements Activating/deactivating ....................... 359 Traffic information .................................. 309 Displaying the traffic map .................... 310 Displaying traffic incidents .................. 310 Extending a Live Traffic Information subscription ........................................ 309 Issuing hazard warnings ....................... 311 Live Traffic Information ....................... 309 Overview ............................................. 309 Registering Live Traffic Information ..... 309 Traffic information service volume increase Setting ................................................. 359 Traffic map see Map Trailer hitch Axle load .............................................. 441 Bicycle rack ......................................... 256 Care ..................................................... 376 Extending/retracting the ball neck ...... 252 Fastening points .................................. 439 General notes ...................................... 439 Mounting dimensions .......................... 439 Notes .................................................. 252 Overhang dimension ........................... 439 Socket ................................................. 254 Tongue weight ..................................... 440 Trailer operation Active Blind Spot Assist ....................... 247 Bicycle rack ......................................... 256 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer ........ 254 Extending/retracting the ball neck ...... 252 Notes .................................................. 252 Socket ................................................. 254 Trailer stabilisation Function/notes ................................... 202 Trailer tow hitch Towing weight ..................................... 440 Index 553 Transferred vehicle data Android Auto ....................................... 332 Apple CarPlay ................................... 332 Transmission position display ................ 178 Transporting Vehicle ................................................ 398 Trim element (Care) ................................. 378 Trip Menu (on-board computer) .................. 265 Trip computer Displaying ............................................ 265 Resetting ............................................. 266 Trip distance ............................................ 265 Displaying ............................................ 265 Resetting ............................................. 266 Trip meter see Trip distance Turn signal indicator see Turn signal lights Turn signal lights ..................................... 136 Changing bulbs (front) ......................... 145 Changing bulbs (rear) .......................... 146 Switching on/off ................................. 136 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 554 Index Turn signal lights see Combination switch Two phone mode see Second telephone Two-way radios Frequencies ......................................... 425 Notes on installation ............................ 424 Transmission output (maximum) ......... 425 Tyre inflation compressor see TIREFIT kit Tyre pressure Checking (tyre pressure monitoring system) ................................................ 407 Notes .................................................. 405 Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system .................................... 412 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor ing system ........................................... 408 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 385 Tyre pressure loss warning system

(function) .............................................. 411 Tyre pressure monitoring system

(function) ............................................. 407 Tyre pressure table .............................. 406 Tyre pressure loss warning system Function ............................................... 411 Restarting ............................................ 412 Tyre pressure monitor Checking the tyre pressures ................ 407 Checking the tyre temperature ............ 407 Tyre pressure monitoring system Function .............................................. 407 Restarting ............................................ 408 Technical data ..................................... 409 Tyre pressure table ................................. 406 Tyre temperature Checking (tyre pressure monitoring system) ................................................ 407 Tyre pressure monitoring system

(function) ............................................. 407 Tyre tread ................................................. 404 Tyre-change tool kit Overview .............................................. 416 Tyres Changing hub caps .............................. 417 Checking ............................................. 404 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pressure monitoring system) ............... 407 Fitting .................................................. 420 Flat tyre ............................................... 383 MOExtended tyres ............................... 384 Noise ................................................... 404 Notes on fitting .................................... 412 Removing ............................................ 420 Replacing ...................................... 412, 417 Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system .................................... 412 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor ing system ........................................... 408 Selection .............................................. 412 Snow chains ........................................ 404 Storing ................................................. 416 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 385 Tyre pressure (Notes) .......................... 405 Tyre pressure loss warning system

(function) .............................................. 411 Tyre pressure monitoring system

(function) ............................................. 407 Tyre pressure table .............................. 406 Unusual handling characteristics ........ 404 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only U Units of measurement Setting ................................................. 286 Unlocking setting ...................................... 73 USB devices Connecting .......................................... 350 USB port ................................................... 129 User profile .............................................. 288 Creating .............................................. 288 Importing/exporting ........................... 289 Options ................................................ 289 Setting ................................................. 288 V Vehicle ...................................... 167, 169, 170 Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 196 Additional door lock ............................... 76 Correct use ........................................... 25 Damage detection (parking) ................ 195 Data acquisition .................................... 26 Data storage .......................................... 26 Diagnostics connection ......................... 24 Equipment ............................................. 21 Implied warranty ................................... 25 Locking (automatically) ......................... 80 Locking (digital vehicle key sticker) ....... 77 Locking (from the inside) ....................... 77 Locking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................... 78 Locking (mobile phone) ......................... 77 Locking/unlocking (emergency key) ..... 80 Lowering .............................................. 421 Parking up ........................................... 196 QR code rescue card ............................. 25 Qualified specialist workshop ................ 24 Raising ................................................. 418 Registration ........................................... 25 Starting (Digital Vehicle Key sticker) .... 168 Starting (emergency operation mode) .................................................. 169 Starting (mobile phone) ....................... 168 Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 170 Starting (start/stop button) ................. 167 Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 188 Towing ................................................. 258 Unlocking (digital vehicle key sticker) .... 77 Unlocking (from the inside) ................... 77 Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ....................... 78 Unlocking (mobile phone) ...................... 77 Index 555 Ventilating (convenience opening) ......... 89 Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT) ............ 178 Roof load ............................................. 439 Transferring to Android Auto ............ 332 Transferring to Apple CarPlay ........... 332 Vehicle height ...................................... 437 Vehicle length ...................................... 437 Vehicle width ....................................... 437 Wheelbase ........................................... 437 Vehicle dimensions ................................. 437 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate EU general operating permit number .. 426 Paint code ........................................... 426 Permissible axle load ........................... 426 Permissible gross mass ....................... 426 VIN ...................................................... 426 Vehicle identification plate see Model series Vehicle interior Cooling or heating (Remote Online) ..... 169 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only 556 Index Vehicle key see Key Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Vehicle position Transmitting ........................................ 283 Vehicle tool kit ........................................ 385 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 385 Towing eye .......................................... 399 Ventilating Convenience opening ............................ 89 Ventilation see Climate control Vents see Air vents VIN ............................................................ 426 Identification plate .............................. 426 Seat ..................................................... 426 Windscreen ......................................... 426 Vision Demisting windows .............................. 157 Windscreen heating ............................. 159 W Warning lamps see Warning/indicator lamps Warning system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Warning triangle Removing ............................................ 382 Setting up ............................................ 382 Warning/indicator lamp

!ABS warning lamp ....................... 505 JBrake system warning lamp

(red) .................................................... 504 JBrake system warning lamp

(yellow) ................................................ 503

?Coolant warning lamp .................. 515 Distance warning warning lamp ... 511

#Electrical fault warning lamp ........ 514

;Engine diagnosis warning lamp .... 514 ESP OFF warning lamp .............. 507 ESP warning lamp flashes ......... 505 ESP warning lamp lights up ....... 506 8Fuel reserve warning lamp ........... 514 Power steering system warning lamp ..................................................... 513

!Red indicator lamp, electric parking brake applied .......................... 508 6Restraint system warning lamp ... 509 7Seat belt warning lamp flashes .... 510 7Seat belt warning lamp lights up ........................................................ 509 Suspension warning lamp ............ 510 jTrailer hitch warning lamp ............ 512 hTyre pressure monitoring sys tem warning lamp flashes .................... 518 hTyre pressure monitoring sys tem warning lamp lights up .................. 517

!Yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is malfunctioning ......... 508 Warning/indicator lamps ................... 8, 501 Instrument display (overview) .................. 8 Overview .............................................. 501 PASSENGER AIR BAG ............................ 40 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Warranty .................................................... 25 Washer fluid see Windscreen washer fluid Washing by hand (care) .......................... 371 Weather information ............................... 316 Web browser Calling up a web page ......................... 343 Calling up options ............................... 344 Calling up the settings ......................... 344 Deleting a bookmark ........................... 345 Deleting browser data ......................... 345 Ending ................................................. 345 Managing bookmarks .......................... 345 Overview ............................................. 344 Showing/hiding the menu ................... 343 Website Calling up ............................................ 343 Showing/hiding the web browser menu ................................................... 343 Wheel change Fitting a new wheel ............................. 420 Lowering the vehicle ............................ 421 Preparation .......................................... 417 Raising the vehicle ............................... 418 Removing a wheel ............................... 420 Removing/fitting hub caps .................. 417 Wheel change see Emergency spare wheel Wheel chock see Chock Wheel rotation ......................................... 415 Wheels Care ..................................................... 376 Changing hub caps .............................. 417 Checking ............................................. 404 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pressure monitoring system) ............... 407 Fitting .................................................. 420 Flat tyre ............................................... 383 Interchanging ....................................... 415 MOExtended tyres ............................... 384 Noise ................................................... 404 Notes on fitting .................................... 412 Removing ............................................ 420 Replacing ...................................... 412, 417 Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system .................................... 412 Index 557 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor ing system ........................................... 408 Selection .............................................. 412 Snow chains ........................................ 404 Storing ................................................. 416 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 385 Tyre pressure (Notes) .......................... 405 Tyre pressure loss warning system

(function) .............................................. 411 Tyre pressure monitoring system

(function) ............................................. 407 Tyre pressure table .............................. 406 Unusual handling characteristics ........ 404 Wi-Fi ......................................................... 283 Overview ............................................. 283 Setting ................................................. 284 Setting up a hotspot ............................ 285 Setting up an Internet connection ....... 340 Window airbag ........................................... 36 Windows see Side windows Windows (care) ........................................ 376 Windscreen .............................................. 154 Defrosting ............................................ 154 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Wiper blades Care ..................................................... 376 Replacing ............................................. 148 Wireless charging Function/notes ................................... 129 Mobile phone ....................................... 131 Wireless vehicle components Declaration of conformity ...................... 22 Workout programme Overview .............................................. 107 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop 558 Index Infrared reflective ................................ 153 Windscreen see Windscreen see Windshield Windscreen heating ................................ 159 Windscreen heating see Windscreen heating Windscreen washer fluid ........................ 437 Notes ................................................... 437 Windscreen washer system Topping up ........................................... 369 Windscreen wipers Changing the wiper blades .................. 148 Switching on/off ................................. 147 Windshield ............................................... 148 Changing the wiper blades .................. 148 Wing see Front wheel arch Winter operation Snow chains ........................................ 404 Winter tyres Setting the permanent speed limita tion ...................................................... 211 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites:

http://www.mercedes-benz.com http://www.daimler.com Editorial office You are welcome to forward any queries or sug gestions you may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address:

Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with out written permission from Daimler AG. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstrasse 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany As at 25.09.2017 Nur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Digital in the vehicle Familiarise yourself with the con tents of the Owner's Manual directly via the vehicle's multi media system (menu item "Vehi cle"). Start with the quick guide, discover your vehicle's highlights or broaden your knowledge with useful tips. Vehicle document wallet Here you can find comprehen sive information about operating your vehicle and about services and warranties in printed form. Digital on the Internet You can find the Owner's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz home page. Digital as an App The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available free-of-charge in familiar App stores. 2135842910Z102&

2135842910Z102 Order no. P213 0991 02 Part no. 213 584 29 10 Z102 Edition J2018-1a Apple iOSAndroidTMNur fr internen Gebrauch / For internal use only

 

 

To Whom It May Concern:

FCC ID: KR5HERMES2 IC: 7812D-HERMES2 FCC 15.19 Labelling requirements This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC 15.21 Information to user Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. RF Exposure Requirements To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, the device must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. ISED Statements (Canada) Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. RF Exposure Requirements This equipment complies with Canada radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator and your body. Dclaration dexposition aux radiations:

Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. The above mentioned statements and paragraphs will be placed in a prominent location in the final user manual.